Skip to main content

Full text of "The Police State Road Map"

See other formats

The Police State Road Map 

Michael Nield 

The Police State Road Map 

March 2005 Edition 

Michael Nield 

Copyright © by Michael Nield 2004, 2005 

All rights Reserved. 

Permission granted to reproduce for personal and educational use only. Commercial copying, 

hiring, lending is prohibited 

1 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 




Chapter 1 MONEY 10 

1.1 The Money Magicians 
1.2 The Banking Cartel 

Chapter 2 THE GREAT TRUST 16 

2.1 The Military-Industrial Complex 

2.2 Five Monopolies 

2.3 Who Owns the Stock? 

2.4 Who Owns the Media? 


3.1 International Relations Policy Groups 

3.2 Tax Exempt Foundations and Charity Funding 

3.3 The IMF and World Bank 

3.4 Control over Western Governments 


4.1 The Heart of the Issue: Power and Property Rights 

4.2 Lessons From History 


5.1 Empowering Third World Governments 
5.2 The Sell Off 


6.1 Public Private Partnership 

6.2 The Policy Comes from the Top 

2 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


Chapter 7 THE ECONOMY 48 

7.1 The Function of Poverty 

7.2 Monetary and Fiscal Policy 

7.3 Free Trade Agreements 

7.4 Open Borders 

7.5 The Environmental Movement 

7.6 War as a Means of Planned Waste 

7.7 Criminalizing Society 

7.8 Disease 


8.1 The Future of Democracy 

8.2 Banning Opposition to World Government 

8.3 Creating Regional Governments 

8.4 World Government or World War Three 

Chapter 9 THE WAR ON TERROR 92 

9.1 CIA/MI6/Mossad/ISI: The Global Terrorist Network 
9.2 Proliferating Weapons of Mass Destruction 

Chapter 10 MARTIAL LAW 99 

10.1 Martial Law Legislation 

10.2 Foreign Troops 
10.3 Gun Confiscation 


11.1 Integration 

11.2 UK Mental Health Laws 

11.3 Abolition of Juries and Arbitrary Detention 

11.4 Expanding the Definition of 'Terrorism' 

11.5 Surveillance Legislation 

11.6 The Ruling Class Above the Law 



12.1 ID Cards and Biometric Identification 
12.2 Computer Databases 

12.3 DNA Databases 
12.4 Implantable Microchips 

12.5 Radio Frequency Identification 

3 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

12.6 Car and Mobile Phone Tracking 

12.7 Surveillance Cameras 

12.8 Black Budget Funding 


13.1 Elitism and the New Age Religion 
13.2 Caught in the Act at Bohemian Grove 

13.3 Targeting the Young 

13.4 Banning Monotheism 
13.5 Enforcing Love of Big Brother 

13.6 Sexual Abuse 


14.1 Funding Population Control 

14.2 Aims and Methods 

14.3 Environmentalism 

14.4 Public Health Policy and Western Medicine 

14.5 Cancer 

14.6 Vaccination 

14.7 Mind Control Technology 

14.8 Junk Food 

14.9 Fluoride 

14.10 Germ Warfare 

14.11 Depleted Uranium 

14.12 Forced Abortion and Sterilization 

14.13 GM Food 

14.14 Weather Modification 

14.15 Nanotechnology 

14.16 Eugenics 


4 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


What is at stake is more than one small country; it is a big idea: a 
new world order, where diverse nations are drawn together in 
common cause to achieve the universal aspirations of mankind — 
peace and security, freedom, and the rule of law - George H.w. Bush, 
State of the Union Address, 29 January 1991. 

There is a chance for the President of the United States to use this 
disaster to carry out what his father - a phrase his father used I think 
only once, and it hasn't been used since - and that is a new world 
order- Senator Gary Hart, Council on Foreign Relations meeting, 12 September 

Noting that the European Union was coming to a turning point in 
its existence, the European Council which met in Laeken, Belgium, on 
14 and 15 December 2001 convened the European Convention on the 
Future of Europe. The Convention was asked to draw up proposals on 
three subjects: how to bring citizens closer to the European design 
and European Institutions; how to organise politics and the European 
political area in an enlarged Union; and how to develop the Union into 
a stabilising factor and a model in the new world order. Valery Giscard 
d'Estaing, President of the Convention, Preface to the Draft Treaty establishing a 
Constitution for Europe, July 2003 

Once the legal and technological apparatus of totalitarianism is 
established, there exists the very real prospect of a permanent 
planetary dictatorship where human existence is micro-managed 
from cloud cuckoo land by a tiny ruling elite who are themselves 
above the law. - chapter 11, the book you are about to read... 

A 'new world order' is a vision long shared by political leaders, industrialists, 
and intellectuals around the world. 'Peace and security, freedom, and the rule of 
law', what a wonderful idea! Strange then, that they have tried to conceal the 
reality of their vision from the wider public. For over thirty years, the European 
project was sold to the British people as little more than a benign free-trade 
agreement, despite the fact most of our new laws originate in Brussels and we 
are being asked to relinquish most of our independence under the European 
Constitution. The same process is underway on the American continent: NAFTA 
and the Free Trade Area of the Americas are the basis for supra-national political 
bureaucracies based on the European model. Evolution rather than revolution is 
the chosen course because, as the Fabian Society noted, the wolf in sheep's 
clothing stands a better chance of getting lunch than his colleague openly 
salivating amongst the flock. 

The end game is one-world government: The relinquishing of sovereignty to 

5 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

continental mega-states and the unification of these power blocs under the 
United Nations. This is the geo-political skeleton of the New World Order, which 
its advocates realize most people would reject. 

Now that many of the levers and motors have been assembled onto the 
frame, the nature and function of the Death Star is plain to see. This is not the 
birth global liberal democracy and universal human rights; it is the end of them. 
'Global fascism' or 'global feudalism' are terms often used by its detractors. 
Parliamentary democracy, human rights, economic freedom, and scientific 
integrity are rapidly being replaced with a privately controlled dictatorship of 
bureaucracy and technocracy that surpasses Orwell's nightmarish vision. 

This is the point at which we enter the world of 'conspiracy', for which the 
internet is renowned. This a place where mainstream opinion fears to tread, 
fearing close encounters with flying saucers or alien abduction. This e-book 
sketches the panorama of the grand scheme unfolding, examining major trends 
in politics, international relations, science, and medicine. It contains hundreds of 
references - most of which can be checked at the click of a mouse - which will 
help readers to decide whether this is conspiracy theory or conspiracy fact. 

Much of the evidence presented here appears in the mainstream press but is 
rarely supplemented with contextual analysis which would reveal the grand 
design. All too often, journalists find that Big Brother has his hand on their pen. 
This has created a niche for an 'alternative media', largely based on the internet. 
Former British Environment Minister, Michael Meacher MP, said that the internet 
hosts the 'new reality', the forum in which unconventional questions can be 

So what does the future have in store? The first part of this book, 'Three 
Hundred Trillion Dollars and Counting', describes how the driving force behind 
political globalization is financial globalization. The world's super-rich elite who 
own and direct the world's banks and conglomerates are creating the first 
financial global empire through corporate mergers and international economic 
piracy. These kingmakers have financial interests in countries all over the world 
and work together to create the international political structures necessary for 
world domination. And because the media focuses on the stage of the puppet 
show, few suppose there might be a hidden aristocracy pulling the strings. 

The second part, 'The Art of Killing Quietly', identifies what this cartel of 
financial barons, media moguls and key political minions are doing, or want to do 
to us. It concludes that this de facto elite regard most people on the planet as 
'useless eaters' worthy of execution at their whim. Of course, the 'cattle' carrying 
out their plan do so unwittingly. Mass manipulation is the supreme application of 
money power since humanity would not knowingly build a prison for itself and 
hand the key over to a tiny ruling elite. Some have even been persuaded that in 
order to 'save the planet' we must kill off most of the people. Jacques Cousteau 
said in the UNESCO Courier of November 1991 that, 

One American burdens the Earth much more than twenty Bangladeshis.... In order 
to stabilize world population, we must eliminate 350,000 people per day 

This resembles George Bernard Shaw's summation in his Intelligent Woman's 
Guide to Socialism and Capitalism, that under socialism you need permission to 
live, and if you didn't live well you'd be executed (in a kindly manner). And so 
today, in most policy areas we proceed on the basis of a manufactured premise 
handed down from on-high so that the end appears to justify the means. As 

6 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

O'Brien explains to Winston, 'Truth' is defined by the Party: 

You must get rid of those nineteenth-century ideas about the laws of Nature. We 
make the laws of Nature'. -1984, Part 3, Chapter 3 

Interestingly most of the witting participants also believe that they are doing 
good, just as many brutal dictators throughout history have done. However, 
whilst the unwitting participants are the turkeys praying for Christmas, the 
witting participants are more often the power-brokers who will be attending 
Christmas dinner. This is the natural patronage of the credulous by the crooked. 

The modus operandi of the New World Order is the 'psychological operation', 
dressing up policies as something else, getting the populace to dig their own 
mass grave. Often they will actually create problems so that they can impose 
solutions which are favourable to their hidden agendas. This has been called 
'problem-reaction-solution', applied with dramatic effect on September 11th to 
launch the global 'War on Terror' - actually a war against citizens- and the big 
push for the New World Order that Senator Hart encouraged. 

So, how can the ordinary citizen compete against this international jet-set of 
the 'haves' and 'have mores'? Team New World Order is quite happy to murder 
millions in pursuit of Utopia. However its fastidious requirement for deception is 
also its Achilles heal: We can strike it down with the plain old 'sword of truth'. 
The opposing team is not a right wing team or a left wing team, or a religious 
team; it's ordinary people from across the board who value their freedom and 
basic rights. As Soviet dissident Vladimir Bukovsky said: 

I am neither from the revolutionary camp, nor from the reactionary camp - I am 
from the concentration camp. 

If memory hole-enabled electronic voting machines have not replaced the 
ballot box before the referendum on the European Constitution, there waits a 
great opportunity to throw a spanner in the works of one of the key meat 
grinders. The U.K. Independence Party is currently the only major British political 
party dedicated to exposing the reality of E.U. membership and to opposing the 
existence of this unaccountable regime. A vote for UKIP is a vote against the 
'cartel' behind the curtain whose megalomania - for which the Union is a key 
instrument - extends into every sphere of human existence. This has become 
apparent to millions of Britons outraged by the Brussels vitamin ban which takes 
effect in August this year. 

On a personal level, the now easily obtainable knowledge of the cartel's 
petrochemical-pharmaceutical sorcery and its public health disinformation, will 
afford great protection against a health catastrophe we might otherwise endure 
at its hand. 

But one might also heed the wry encouragement of one of Mr Bukovsky's 
colleagues from the old days in the Soviet Union: 

Cheer up comrades, things are getting worse! 

The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

There is now an unprecedented window of opportunity to perceive the reality 
of the situation before it becomes too late to do anything about it. The U.S. has 
many independent radio programmes broadcast over the internet which routinely 
interview guests whose expertise is the ammunition for this information war. The 
Alex Jones Show, Radio Liberty, and The Power Hour, are prominent examples of 
this great resource. Alex Jones' websites and are updated daily with all the latest news from around the 
world. Collectively, these, and thousands more like them, are making great 
strides towards a 'popular awakening' and a demand for change. 

However, the internet may not survive much longer as a global free speech 
forum and another major terrorist attack will be used to take away more of our 
rights. Perhaps print off this preface and mail it to your elected representative or 
email it to your friends. You can copy and distribute this entire book for non- 
profit purposes. Hopefully, American readers will find as much of interest and 
relevance as Europeans, reflecting both the subject matter and the source 
material. But whatever you do, do it fast! 

This March 2005 edition of The Police State Road Map builds on the original 
version published in January 2004. There have been many updates and 
improvements based on readers' feedback and new research. 

The website,, is updated regularly with articles 
and radio interviews that develop the themes outlined in the book. 

Hard times lie ahead comrades but cheer up, things are getting worse. 

Michael Nield 

March 2005 

8 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Part 1 

Three Hundred Trillion Dollars and Counting 

9 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 1 


The Western money monopoly is the central pillar of the New World Order 
monolith. The ownership and control of commercial activity by a few European 
and American families has created the necessary concentration of financial power 
to manipulate public policy at all levels through co-option of politicians, policy 
institutes, charities, educational establishments, and media outlets. Maintaining 
this international army is a very expensive business, so it is important to 
understand the source of its funds. 


I am afraid that the ordinary citizen will not like to be told that the banks can 
and do create money... And they who control the credit of the nation direct the 
policy of Governments and hold in the hollow of their hands the destiny of the 

- Reginald McKenna speaking to stockholders as Chairman of the Board of 
Midland Bank in January 1924. (i) 

G. Edward Griffin's book The Creature from Jekyll Island is the source for the 
following explanation^) - a benchmark publication on the subject of banking and 
the New World Order. 

Western banks create money through a fractional-reserve lending system. 
Central banks lend money to governments to make up for the deficit in taxation 
receipts. The banks print money out of nothing and receive interest bearing 
government bonds in return. These bonds are called "securities" because they 
are backed by the full credit and integrity of taxpayers who pay back the loans 
through taxation. 

Eventually every pound or dollar borrowed passes through the current 
accounts and savings accounts operated by commercial banks. Under the rules of 
fractional-reserve banking, for the purpose of lending money, the commercial 
banker is allowed to print nine more pounds or dollars than he holds on deposit, 
or what ever ratio the central bank decides. He pays savers a modest rate of 
interest and charges borrowers a much higher rate on up to ten times the 
amount. His only costs are his buildings, employees, and book-keeping. The only 
risk he takes is an accounting risk if too many loans go into default at once. 
However, if he gets into serious trouble the central bank will come running to his 
aid with more money printed out of nothing. 

Looking for the equity in this system is fruitless. Every penny and cent in 
circulation requires interest payment to the money powers because money is 
debt. Hundreds of billions of dollars world-wide are paid in interest every year to 
men who print money out of nothing. 

A frequently asked question is, 'where does the money come from to pay the 
interest on the loan?' Quite simply there is none. Interest payments are serviced 

10 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

by payment in kind - through labour. This is a game of musical chairs where the 
money keeps on circulating between creditors and debtors. The profits from the 
banks are used by their shareholders to buy goods and services, passing the 
money to the workers to pay back the capital and the interest. If the game of 
musical chairs ever stopped there wouldn't be enough money in circulation to 
repay a penny or cent of interest. But the game is designed to go on forever. 

Having said all this, the bankers are permanently and necessarily interposed 
between parties in the market place, allowing us to trade goods and services for 
money. But they charge a high price for their services, as many Third World 
nations have found out, and have become fantastically wealthy as a result. The 
problem of this money monopoly is as much a political one as an economic one. 

On the eve of the 2001 General Election, Prime Minister Tony Blair was 
interviewed by the BBC's leading news presenter, Jeremy Paxman. There was an 
extraordinary exchange over the question of whether or not someone can 
become too rich. (3) In describing the extent to which money really is power, the 
rest of this book explains one of the reasons why Tony Blair did not want to 
answer that question. 

PAXMAN: Do you believe that an individual can earn too much money? 

BLAIR: I don't really - it is not - no, it's not a view I have. Do you mean that we 
should cap someone's income? Not really, no. Why? What is the point? You can spend 
ages trying to stop the highest paid earners earning the money but in an international 
market like today, you probably would drive them abroad. What does that matter? 
Surely the important thing is to level up those people that don't have opportunity in 
our society. 

PAXMAN: But where is the justice in taxing someone who earns £34,000 a year, 
which is about enough to cover a mortgage on a one-bedroom flat in outer London, at 
the same rate as someone who earns £34 million. Where is the justice? 

BLAIR: The person who earns £34 million, if they're paying the top rate of tax, will 
pay far more tax on the £34 million than the person on £34,000. 

PAXMAN: I am asking you about the rate of tax. 

BLAIR: I know and what I am saying to you is the rate is less important in this 
instance than the overall amount of tax that people would pay. You know what would 
happen, if you go back to the days of high top rates of tax. All that would happen is 
that those people, who are small in number actually, and you can spend a lot of time 
getting after the person earning millions of pound a year, and then what you don't do 
is apply the real energy where it's necessary on things like the children's tax credit, 
the Working Families Tax Credit, the minimum wage, the New Deal, all the things 
that have helped people on lower incomes. 

PAXMAN: But where is the justice in it? 

BLAIR: When you say where is the justice in that, the justice for me is concentrated 
on lifting incomes of those that don't have a decent income. It's not a burning 

11 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

ambition for me to make sure that David Beckham earns less money. 

PAXMAN: But Prime Minister, the gap between rich and poor has by widened while 
you have been in office. 

BLAIR: A lot of those figures are based on a couple of years ago before many of the 
measures we took came into effect. But the lowest income families in this country are 
benefiting from the government. Their incomes are rising. The fact that you have 
some people at the top end earning more 

PAXMAN: ..Benefiting more! 

BLAIR: If they are earning more, fine, they pay their taxes. 

PAXMAN: But is it acceptable for gap between rich and poor to widen? 

BLAIR: It is acceptable for those people on lower incomes to have their incomes 
raised. It is unacceptable that they are not given the chances. To me, the key thing is 
not whether the gap between those who, between the person who earns the most in 
the country and the person that earns the least, whether that gap is. 

PAXMAN: So it is acceptable for gap to widen between rich and poor? 

BLAIR: It is not acceptable for poor people not to be given the chances they need in 

PAXMAN: That is not my question. 

BLAIR: I know it's not your question but it's the way I choose to answer it. If you end 
up going after those people who are the most wealthy in society, what you actually 
end up doing is in fact not even helping those at the bottom end. 

PAXMAN: So the answer to the straight question is it acceptable for gap between rich 
and poor to get wider, the answer you are saying is yes. 

BLAIR: No, it's not what I am saying. What I am saying is that my task is 

PAXMAN: You are not saying no. 

BLAIR: But I don't think that is the issue 

PAXMAN: You may not think it is the issue, but it is the question. Is it OK for the gap 
to get wider? 

BLAIR: It may be the question. The way I choose to answer it is to say the job of 
government is make sure that those at the bottom get the chances. 

PAXMAN: With respect, people see you are asked a straightforward question and 
they see you not answering it. 

12 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

BLAIR: Because I choose to answer it in the way that I'm answering it. 

PAXMAN: But you are not answering it. 

BLAIR: I am answering it. What I am saying is the most important thing is to level 
up, not level down. 

PAXMAN: Is it acceptable for gap between rich and poor to get bigger? 

BLAIR: What I am saying is the issue isn't in fact whether the very richest person 
ends up becoming richer. The issue is whether the poorest person is given the chance 
that they don't otherwise have. 

PAXMAN: I understand what you are saying. The question is about the gap. 

BLAIR: Yes, I know what your question is. I am choosing to answer it in my way 
rather than yours. 

PAXMAN: But you're not answering it. 

BLAIR: I am. 

PAXMAN: You are answering another question. 

BLAIR: I am answering actually in the way that I want to answer it. I tell you why I 
want to answer it in this way. Because if you end up saying no, actually my task is to 
stop the person earning a lot of money earning a lot of money, you waste all your 
time and energy, taking money off the people who are very wealthy when in today's 
world, they probably would move elsewhere and make their money. What you are not 
asking me about, which would be a more fruitful line of endeavour, is what are you 
doing for the poorest people to give them a boost. 

PAXMAN: Let's talk about tax. You have promised... 

BLAIR: Why don't we talk about the poorest of society and what we are doing for 

PAXMAN: I assume you want to be Prime Minister. I just want to be an interviewer. 
Can we stick to that arrangement? 


The monopoly underlying all other monopolies is the banking cartel. The 
wealth of the Rothschild dynasty in the nineteenth century was legendary. In 
building the mightiest private bank the world has ever seen, the Rothschilds 
amassed the largest private fortune in the history of capitalism. Since 1919, the 
world gold price has been fixed daily at the office of N.M. Rothschild & Sons in 
London. However, before World War I the European and American money powers 

13 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

had already formed a lasting partnership. 

Potential competitors on Wall Street, which included European banking houses, 
decided that they could reduce competition from the provincial banks and 
achieve higher profits if only they had a functional central bank like those in 
Europe and cooperated in printing America's money. (4) 

A central bank is a private cartel enforced by the police power of government. 
Created in 1913, the Federal Reserve 'System' was designed to benefit the most 
powerful New York banks, halting the loss of business to the hundreds of smaller 
banks in the southern and western states. The system appeared to distribute 
power equally between the twelve regional branches but in reality, it gave power 
to the New York branch controlled by The Money Trust on Wall Street. (5) The 
Jekyll Island Plan for the Federal Reserve Act was drawn up by the five biggest 
banking houses in Europe and America: Rothschild, Rockefeller, Morgan, 
Warburg and Kuhn Loeb.(6) It's chief architect was Paul Warburg of the German 
and Swiss banking house who moved to America only nine years earlier. He 
brought with him all the experience of European central banking. His brother Max 
Warburg was financial adviser to the Kaiser and later Director of Germany's 
central bank, The Reichsbank.(7) Paul Warburg's Wall Street banking operation 
was a partnership with the Rothschilds in Kuhn Loeb & Co.. 

After working together to create the 'Fed', the members of the cartel devised 
the acceptance market which powered up their newly created money printing 
press. Through the 1920s the acceptance market created over half of all the 
money printed by the Fed. (8) 

Since then, the agents of the private commercial banks, who sit on the 
boards of the central banks throughout the world, have worked together to 
formulate international monetary policy. In 1966, Bill Clinton's mentor at 
Georgetown University, Professor Carroll Quigley, described the system in his 
book Tragedy and Hope: (9) 

The substantive financial powers of the world were in the hands of these 
investment bankers... who remained largely behind the scenes in their own 
unincorporated private banks. These formed a system of international co- 
operation and national dominance which was more private, more powerful and 
more secret than that of their agents in the central banks... In addition to these 
pragmatic goals, the powers of financial capitalism had another far reaching aim, 
nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands 
able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the 
world as a whole. This system was to be controlled in a feudalistic fashion by the 
central banks of the world acting in concert, by secret agreements arrived at 
infrequent private meetings and conferences. The apex of this system was to be 
the Bank for International Settlements in Basle, Switzerland, a private bank 
owned and controlled by the world's central banks which were themselves 
private corporations... 

The international nature of the cartel was evidenced during the 1920s when 
the Governor of the New York Federal Reserve Bank, Benjamin Strong, worked 
with Montague Norman, the Governor of the Bank of England, to assist the 
economy of Great Britain at the expense of American investors. Increasing the 
U.S. money supply contributed to a massive speculative boom in the stock 
market and the Wall Street Crash in 1929. (io) 

Woodrow Wilson was the U.S. President when the Fed was created. In his book 
The New Freedom he commented on the centralization of banking power: 

14 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Since I entered politics, I have chiefly had men's views confided to me 
privately. Some of the biggest men in the United States, in the field of commerce 
and manufacturing are afraid of somebody, afraid of something. They know that 
there is a power somewhere so organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocking, 
so complete, so pervasive that they had better not speak above their breath 
when they speak in condemnation of it.(ii) 

In July 2003 it was mentioned in the news that the Rothschild international 
investment banking group is controlled by a parent company called Rothschild 
Continuation Holdings A.G., located in Switzerland. Far from being competing 
factions, the English and French Rothschilds have worked out a deal merging 
control of their respective banking houses by forming a new holding company, 
Concordia B.V..(i2) 

It is these family run private banks which continue to coordinate central bank 
policy. On 28 June 1998, The Washington Post published an article about the 
Bank for International Settlements describing how "this economic cabal.... this 
secretive group... the financial powers who control the world's supply of money" 
shape the world's economy. (13) 

The next chapter asks the question, 'who today really has all the money and 
where is it invested?'. This is not possible to answer with satisfactory precision 
but there are some good indicators that provide much food for thought. 

Chapter 1 End Notes 

1. Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time, The Macmillan 
Company, New York, 1966, p. 325 

2. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 

3. Transcript of Jeremy Paxman's Newsnight interview with Tony Blair,4th June 2001. 
BBC news on-line. 


4. Ibid., p. 437 

5. Ibid., p. 473 

6. Ibid., p. 12 

7. Ibid., p. 18 

8. Ibid., p. 482 

9. Quigley, op cit., pp. 324, 326-327 

10. Griffin op cit., pp. 474-475 

11. Globalization, Robert Gaylon Ross Sr. See http://www.4rie. com/index. html#Anchor- 

12. Rothschilds Continuation Holdings AG: Restructuring, C\av\net News, 9 July 2003. See se/webnews/wed/de/Brothschilds-continuation.R- 

Jl DI9.html 

15 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

13. Dr. Stanley Monteith, The Brotherhood of Darkness, Hearthstone Publishing, 2000, 
p. 33. See 

Chapter 2 


In 1888, Edward Bellamy wrote a book entitled Looking Backward: 2000- 
1887 in which he predicted the future exactly as it happened: 

The nation... organized as the one great business corporation in which all 
other corporations were absorbed; it became the one capitalist in the place of all 
other capitalists... the final monopoly in which all previous and lesser monopolies 
were swallowed up... The epoch of trusts had ended in The Great Trust.(i) 


The bankers have invested their vast fortunes in every branch of commerce, 
cementing monopolies with interlocking shareholdings and directorships. In John 
D. Rockefeller's immortal phrase "competition is a sin." 

The establishment of the European-American petrochemical cartel was 
achieved in 1929 with the marriage of I.G. Farben of Germany to I.C.I, and Shell 
Oil of Great Britain, and to Standard Oil and DuPont of America. (2) The cartel was 
formed after I.G. Farben discovered how to make petroleum out of coal. I.G. 
agreed not to enter the petroleum market so long as Standard Oil did not enter 
the chemical industry unless as a partner with Farben. By the beginning of WWII, 
Farben had become the largest industrial enterprise in Europe, the largest 
chemical company in the world, and part of the most powerful cartel in history. 
Besides the afore-mentioned companies, it had cartel agreements with 2000 
companies around the world including Ford Motor Co, Alcoa, General Motors, 
Texaco, Proctor and Gamble, and virtually every enterprise that involved 

Hermann Schmitz, president of Bayer A.G and I.G. Farben during WWII, who 
also largely directed the Deutsche Bank, held a substantial amount of stock in 
Standard Oil of New Jersey. (3) G. Edward Griffin's investigation into the cancer 
industry found that the cartel agreement signed between Standard Oil and 
Farben on 9 November 1929 involved the exchange of some of Farben's patent 
rights over the coal-hydrogenation process for $30,000,000 of Standard's stock. 
The Rockefeller group concealed its Farben holdings in false fronts and dummy 
accounts and when Farben's vast holdings were finally sold in 1962, the 
Rockefellers were the dominant force in carrying out the transaction. (4) Paul 
Warburg, another founding member of the Wall St. banking cartel, was also a 
director of several Farben subsidiaries. (5) 

A cartel is a grouping of companies that are bound together by contracts or 
agreements designed to promote inter-company cooperation and thereby reduce 
competition between them. Some of these agreements may deal with harmless 
subjects such as industry standards and nomenclature. But most of them involve 
the exchange of patent rights, the dividing of regional markets, the setting of 
prices, and agreements not to enter into product competition within specific 

16 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

categories. (6) In 1937, Fortune magazine editorialized: 

By and large, the chemical industry has regulated itself in a manner that 
would please even a Soviet Commissar... The industry. the practitioner of 
one definite sort of planned economy. 

In 1973, the United States Tariff Commission observed: 

In the largest and most sophisticated multinational corporations, planning 
and subsequent monitoring of plan fulfillment have reached a scope and level of 
detail that, ironically, resemble more than superficially the national planning 
procedures of Communist countries. 

Far from the money powers fighting for free-markets and against government 
regulation, the exact opposite is true. Giant cartels use government regulation 
and anti-trust laws to break up smaller cartels or to prevent competitors entering 
into the market. The ultimate objective is a feudal 'comand and control' society in 
which the corporations use government to diminish our freedoms. 


Corpororate monopolies over water, food, energy, medicine, and information, 
are just some manifestations of The Great Trust today. 

The explosive growth of three private water utility companies in the last 10 
years raises fears that mankind may be losing control of its most vital resource to 
a handful of monopolistic corporations. In Europe and North America, analysts 
predict that within the next 15 years these companies will control 65 percent to 
75 percent of what are now public waterworks. The companies have worked 
closely with the World Bank and other international financial institutions to gain a 
foothold on every continent. A yearlong investigation by the International 
Consortium of Investigative Journalists (ICIJ), a project of the Center for Public 
Integrity,(7) found that world's three largest water companies - France's Suez and 
Vivendi Environnement, and British-based Thames Water owned by Germany's 
RWE AG - have expanded into every region of the world since 1990. Three other 
companies, Saur of France, and United Utilities of England working in conjunction 
with Bechtel of the United States, have also successfully secured major 
international drinking water contracts. But their size pales in comparison to that 
of the big three. The water companies are chasing a business with potential 
annual revenue estimated at anywhere from $400 billion to $3 trillion. (8) 

In 2002, the American retailer Wal-Mart was the biggest company in the 
world, with turnover of $219 billion ahead of Exxon at $191 billion and General 
Motors at $177 billion. Five retailers- Wal-Mart, Safeway, Kroger, Albertson's and 
Ahold- take 33% of American grocery sales. (9) In the U.K. there is even more 
consolidation: 60-75% of groceries are purchased in the top 5 supermarkets. (io) 

The oil industry is dominated by five companies: ( In order of size) 
ExxonMobil, Royal Dutch-Shell, British Petroleum-Amoco, Chevron-Texaco, and 
TotalFinaElf. Interestingly the recent Exxon -Mobil merger reunited the two 
biggest chunks of John D. Rockefeller's Standard Oil monopoly dismantled by 
the U.S. government 90 years ago. Mobil was Standard Oil of New York and 
Exxon was Standard Oil of New Jersey. (ii)(i2) 

The world's drug industry is dominated by 10 companies whose total market 
value at the time of writing exceeded (U.S.) $ 1.1 trillion. (13) 

17 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Rank in (U.S.) $ billion: 

Pfizer $244 

Johnson and Johnson $161 

Merck $124 

GlaxoSmithKline $119 

Novartis $113 

Amgen $83 

Roche $ 72 

AstraZeneca $70 

Eli Lilly $ 67 

Wyeth $58 

In 1985, there were 50 substantial media conglomerates in the U.S. By Year 
2000 there were six: AOL Time Warner, The Walt Disney Company, Bertelsmann 
A. G, Viacom, Newscorporation, and Vivendi Universal. Vivendi Universal is the 
parent company of Vivendi Environment, the water conglomerate. Recently legal 
rulings in Europe clearly indicate that there is more trans-Atlantic consolidation to 
come. The London Financial Times reported on 21 July 03: 

The passage into law of the Communications Bill closes a turbulent chapter 
in the history of UK media. ..allowed the lifting of the bar on investments in ITV 
or Channel Five by non-European interests, the largest of which are US media 
conglomerates... the bill is, by international standards, extremely liberal on 
ownership but highly structured for content regulation, to be applied by Ofcom, 
the new media regulator. (14) 

This followed a European Court of Justice ruling in favour of mergers and 
acquisitions. On 4 June 2002, the BBC reported that the European Court of 
Justice (ECJ) ruled that restrictions by some European governments on foreign 
ownership of privatized companies are illegal. The decision makes it more difficult 
for governments to block foreign investment in former state-owned firms on 
national interest grounds, paving the way for more cross-border takeovers and 
mergers. The decision has also boosted a planned overhaul of E.U. takeover law 
aimed at making it easier for firms to launch cross-border mergers and 
acquisitions. The reform is an important element of E.U. plans to create a single 
European market for investment services by 2005. (15) 


A recent article in the London Financial Times indicates why it is impossible to 
gain an accurate estimate of the wealth of the trillionaire banking elite. 
Discussing the sale of Evelyn Rothschild's stake in Rothschild Continuation 
Holdings, it states: 

..[this] requires agreement on the valuation of privately held assets whose 
value has never been tested in a public market. Most of these assets are held in a 
complex network of tax-efficient structures around the world. (16) 

Queen Elizabeth II's shareholdings remain hidden behind Bank of England 
Nominee accounts. The Guardian newspaper reported in May 2002 

18 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

... the reason for the wild variations in valuations of her private wealth 
can be pinned on the secrecy over her portfolio of share investments. This is 
because her subjects have no way of knowing through a public register of 
interests where she, as their head of state, chooses to invest her money. Unlike 
the members of the Commons and now the Lords, the Queen does not have to 
annually declare her interests and as a result her subjects cannot question her or 
know about potential conflicts of interests... In fact, the Queen even has an extra 
mechanism to ensure that her investments remain secret - a nominee company 
called the Bank of England Nominees. It has been available for decades to all the 
world's current heads of state to allow them anonymity when buying shares. 
Therefore, when a company publishes a share register and the Bank of England 
Nominees is listed, it is not possible to gauge whether the Queen, President Bush 
or even Saddam Hussein is the true shareholder. (17) 

By this method, the trillionaire masters of the universe remain hidden whilst 
Forbes magazine poses lower ranking billionaires like Bill Gates and Warren 
Buffett as the richest men in the world. Retired management consultant Gaylon 
Ross Sr, author of Who's Who of the Global Elite, has been tipped from a private 
source that the combined wealth of the Rockefeller family in 1998 was 
approximately (U.S.) $11 trillion and the Rothschilds (U.S.) $100 trillion .(is) 
However something of an insider's knowledge of the hidden wealth of the elite is 
contained in the article, Will the Dollar and America Fall Down on August 19?.." 
on pagel of the 12th July 2001 issue of Russian newspaper, Pravda(i9). The 
newspaper interviewed Tatyana Koryagina, a senior research fellow in the 
Institute of Macroeconomic Researches subordinated to the Russian Ministry of 
Economic Development (Minekonom), on the subject of a recent conference 
concerning the fate of the U.S. economy: 

Koryagina: The known history of civilization is merely the visible part of the 
iceberg. There is a shadow economy, shadow politics and also a shadow history, 
known to conspirologists. There are [unseen] forces acting in the world, unstoppable 
for [most powerful] countries and even continents. 

Pravda: Just these forces intend to smash America on August 19? 

Koryagina: There are international "super-state" and "super-government" groups. 
In accordance with tradition, the mystical and religious components play extremely 
important roles in human history. One must take into account the shadow economy, 
shadow politics and the religious component, while predicting the development of the 
present financial situation. 

Pravda: Still, I don't understand what could be done to this giant country [the 
U.S.], whose budget is calculated in the trillions of dollars. 

Koryagina: It is possible to do anything to the U.S... whose total debt has 
reached $26 trillion. Generally, the Western economy is at the boiling point now. 
Shadow financial activities of $300 trillion are hanging over the planet. At any 
moment, they could fall on any stock exchange and cause panic and crash. The recent 
crisis in Southeast Asia, which touched Russia, was a rehearsal. 

This is a startling revelation: $300 trillion of wealth is secretly controlled by 
an unspecified cabal of the world's richest families. 

The power of Rothschild family was evidenced on 24th September 2002 when 

19 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

a helicopter touched down on the lawn of Waddedson Manor, their ancestral 
home in Buckinghamshire, England. Out of the helicopter strode Warren Buffet, - 
touted as the second richest man in the world - and Arnold Schwarzenegger, 
candidate for the Governorship of California. They'd come to rub shoulders with 
James Wolfensohn, President of the World Bank and Nicky Oppenheimer, 
Chairman of De Beers at a two day conference hosted by Jacob Rothschild. 
Arnold went on to secure the governorship of one of the biggest economies on 
the planet a year later. The fact that he was initiated into the ruling class in the 
Rothschilds' English country manor is more evidence of the international nature 
of the cartel and the location of its centre of gravity. (20) 


The New World Order would be in serious trouble, if for one day, the 
mainstream media put the pieces together and told the whole truth, 'the story 
behind the story'. Editing certain news out of the press has been just as 
important as putting propaganda in, probably more so. Westerners receive 
relatively little news about the atrocities committed in the socialist dictatorships 
especially in the former Soviet Union and communist China which continue to this 
day. The last thing they want the public to hear on the evening news is the fact 
that its our money which has kept these regimes afloat, or to find out who helped 
them into power. 

In 1917 Congressman Oscar Callaway told the House that, in 1915 JP 
Morgan interests and their subsidiary organizations purchased the editorial 
policies of the 25 most important newspapers in the U.S. By controlling the policy 
of the most important, they were able to control the general policy of the whole 
media. They used this power to turn public opinion in favour of entering the First 
World War. (2i) The Rockefellers took over the Morgan empire, and in the 1950s 
they had one of their pharmaceutical company directors and publisher of the 
New York Times, Arthur Hays Sulzberger, appointed as Director of the Associated 
Press. They also owned the trend setting magazines Time, Life, Fortune, and 
Newsweek. (22) Laurance Rockefeller was a director of The Reader's Digest, a 
barometer of orthodox thinking, especially on the medical issues in which his 
family had enormous financial interests. (23) 

Forbes Magazine's recent bio' of media tycoon, Conrad Black read: 

67% ownership in Ravelston Corp., a privately held company, gives him 
control of a 78% stake in Hollinger Inc., a publicly traded Canadian holding 
company with real estate and other investments. Hollinger, in turn, owns 
32%of the equity and 73% of he voting control of Hollinger International, 
the Big Board media company that owns the newspapers. There is also a 
hefty dose of debt financing in this chain. Thus does Black, with a mere $13 
million of his own equity money in the till, control $2 billion in media assets. 
The assets are impressive: Black's 129 newspapers include the Chicago Sun- 
Times, the fifth-largest paper in the U.S.; the Jerusalem Post, with a 
circulation of 110,000; and the London Daily Telegraph, which has 40% of 
the market for national broadsheet newspapers in the U.K... Directors include 
such illuminati as Henry Kissinger; former Illinois Governor James R. 
Thompson; financier Henry Kravis' wife, Marie-Josee Kravis; former 
ambassador to Germany Richard Burt; and Richard Perle, the controversial 
member of the Defense Policy Board." (24) 

20 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Forbes ranks two media billionaires, Silvio Berlusconi and Rupert Murdoch, at 
numbers 3 and 4 in the world in terms of power and influence even though their 
wealth is ranked 45 and 54 respectively. Italy's Prime Minister owes much of his 
influence to Fininvest, his investment firm that owns 49% of Mediaset, Italy's 
largest television network. He also has interests in banking, insurance and 
publishing. (25) Murdoch's media empire includes NewsCorporation and its U.K. 
subsidiary News International, British Sky Broadcasting Group, Sky Global 
Networks Inc. and Fox Entertainment Group. Besides T.V. networks and 
newspapers, this group also owns the publisher HarperCollins. (26)(27) 

Two sisters Anne and Barbara Cox own 98% of Cox Enterprises which 
controls 17 daily newspapers (including flagship Atlanta Journal-Constitution), 15 
TV stations, 78 radio stations and cable systems (6.5 million users). Their 
personal wealth is estimated to be $1 lbillion each.(28)Two thirds of Viacom's 
voting stock is controlled by Sumner Redstone whose personal wealth is 
estimated at $9.7 billion. (29)Viacom now owns CBS, Infinity Broadcasting, 
Paramount, Nickelodeon, MTV, and Blockbuster. In 1980 Ted Turner launched 
America's first 24 hr. cable news service, CNN. Turner Broadcasting Systems was 
bought by Time Warner in 1996 but Turner remains Time Warner's largest 
individual shareholder (only 1% at June 2003) and sits on its board. (30) 

Sir Evelyn de Rothschild used to sit on the board of The Daily Telegraph (3i) 
and Edouard de Rothschild bought the controlling stake in French left-wing 
newspaper, Liberation, in December 2004. (32) 

From July 1999 to March 2002, The Carlyle Group, an $18 billion private equity 
firm, held a 40% stake in the French daily Le Figaro. Carlyle Group investors 
have included Frank Carlucci, former U.S. Defense Secretary and Deputy Director 
of the CIA; the Bin Laden family; and former heads of state, George Bush Sr. 
and John Major. In March 2004, Le Figaro was purchased by Serge Dassault, 
head of Dassault Aviation a major military contractor. (33) 

However, ownership, directorship and censorship is not the whole story of 
media manipulation. Much of what appears in the press is shaped by the 
education of journalists and their sources. The roots of the 'psychological 
operation' are in the schools, universities, charities, think-tanks and policy 
institutes - the subject of the next chapter. 

Chapter 2 End Notes 

1. Dr. Stanley Monteith, The Brotherhood of Darkness, Hearthstone Publishing, 2000, 
p. 15 

2. G. Edward Griffin, World Without Cancer: The Story of Vitamin B17, American Media, 
second edition 1997, p. 183 

3. Manning P, Martin Bormann: Nazi in Exile. Secaucus, NJ: Lyle Stuart, 1981, pp. 29, 
56, 69, 116-17; 134-35. see article by Dr Leonard Horowitz at 
http://www.liqhtstreamers.coni/horowitz/Solvinq The Anthrax.html 

4. G. Edward Griffin, op cit.,p.236 

5. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 
2002, p. 482 and Antony C. Sutton, Wall Street and the Rise of Hitler, CSG and 
Associates, 1976 p. 164 

21 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

6. Griffin, World Without Cancer, pp. 187-189 

7. International Consortium of Investigative Journalists (lCU),The Water Barons, a report 
for The Center for Public Integrity, 2003. See 

8. Bill Marsden, Cholera and The Age of The Water Barons, The Center for Public 
Integrity, 2003. See http://www.icii.oro/water/report.aspx?sid=ch&rid=44&aid=44 

9. Impact of Wal-Mart on Retail Consolidation and Standardization, Infosys Technologies 

See capital/ 
thouqht-papers/WalMart Impact on Retail-Consolidation.pdf 

10. What's Wrong With Supermarkets? Corporate Watch. 

See wrong suprmkts.htm 

11. James A. Paul, Iraq: the Struggle for Oil , Global Policy Forum, August, 2002 (revised 
December, 2002). See http://www.qlobalpolicy.Org/security/oil/2002/08iim.htm#4 

12. Jobs slashed at new oil colossus, BBC news, London, 1 December 1998. See company file/222402.stm 

13. The 2003 Global Scoreboard, BusinessWeek Online, November 2003. 
See h ttp:// 1000/2003/index.asp? 
sortCol = ind code&sortOrder=ASC&paoeNum = 19&.resultNum = 25&country= 

14. The United States of Television, Global Policy Forum. 


15. EU Court Boosts Foreign Mergers, Global Policy Forum. 


16. French Rothschild is set to take helm in London, Charles Pretzlik, Banking Editor, The 
Financial Times, London, 10 February 2003. 

17. Horses, stamps, cars - and an invisible portfolio, The Guardian, London, 30 May 
2002. See, 11 550, 724327, 00 .htm I 

18. Robert Gaylon Ross Sr. 

See http://www.4rie.eom/index.html#Anchor-51540 

19. Dr. Alexandr Nemets, Expert: Russia Knew in Advance, Encouraged Citizens to Cash 
Out Dollars,, 17 Sept. 2001. See 

20. Arnold and Buffett's Loaded Elephant Gun? Buffett's Back with the Terminator! , 

24 Sept. 2002 . 

See copy at roths.htm 

21. Monteith, op cit., p. 31 

22. Hans Ruesch, The Drug Story. 


new world order/Rockefeller Drug Censor Empire.html 

22 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

23. Dr Leonard G. Horowitz, Death In The Air, Tetrahedron Publishing Group, 2001 p. 364. 

24. Robert Lenzner, Press Lord Pressed, Forbes Magazine, 26 May 2003. 

25. The 10 Most Powerful Billionaires, Forbes Magazine, 17 March 2003. 
See forbes/2003/0317/1 15.html 

26. Keith Rupert Murdoch, tearsheet, Forbes Magazine, November 2003. 

From MktGuideldPersonTearsheet.i htm l?passedMktGuide!d = 130391 

27. Who Owns What: News Corporation, Columbia Journalism Review, 21 July 2003. 

28. Star Power, Forbes Magazine, 10 June 2003. 


29. Sumner M Redstone, World's Richest People 2003, Forbes Magazine. 
See h ttp:// 
LIR.ihtml?passl_istId = 10&passYear=2003&.passl_istType= 
Person&.uniqueId = KJHY&datatype= Person 

30. Robert E. (Ted) Turner, World's Richest People 2003. Forbes Magazine. 
See h ttp://www.forbes.eom/finance/lists/10/2003/LIR.i htm l?passl_istld = 
10&passYear=2003&passListType=Person&uniqueId = ETX7&datatype= Person . 

31. Dominic Rush, Black narcissi, The Times Business section, 28 March 2004,, 8209- 10 55652 2,00 .htm I 

32. Colin Randall, Banker sets sights on Left-wing newspaper, The Daily Telegraph, 15 

December 2004 buys left wing newspaper.htm 

33. Dassault Buys Le Figaro from the Carlyle Group, buys le fiqaro from the carlyle group 

23 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 3 



There exists behind closed doors, a high command of policy groups which feed 
the argument for political globalization. Policies are passed down the chain of 
command into the public arena by lavish patronage of public institutions and key 
politicians. In discrete pursuit of financial globalization, they have also advanced 
the view that the future of mankind is best served by a transfusion of wealth 
from the West to lesser developed countries in the form of foreign aid and bank 
loans. This chapter identifies the groups which constitute the Ministry of Truth for 
International Relations and the next three reveal how they have miraculously 
consolidated financial power in the hands of their members. 



In 1870, John Ruskin, professor of Fine Arts at Oxford University, inspired a 
student named Cecil Rhodes with the dream of uniting the English speaking world 
under a federal government. Rhodes went on to become one of the richest men 
in the world. Besides the Rhodes Scholarships which provided for American 
students to study at Oxford, Rhodes' legacy was the formation of a secret society 
which professor Quigley called 'the Milner group'. (i) 

Lord Rothschild loaned £750,000 to assist Rhodes in creating De Beers in 
1888. As well as being the largest shareholder in De Beers, Rothschild was also 
amongst the 'circle of initiates' in the Milner group.This clique of British 
aristocrats invented the Round Table movement aimed at fostering international 
government. Two important Round Table groups were set up after the end of 
World War I: The Royal Institute of International Affairs in London, also known as 
The Chatham House Study Group founded in 1919; and The Council on Foreign 
Relations in New York founded in 1921. The plans for these two groups were 
drawn up at the 1919 Paris Peace Conference. The RIIA was largely funded by 
the Astor family, The Rhodes Trust and certain British banks whilst the CFR was a 
front for JP Morgan &Co.(2) 

The financial elite have dominated the Round Table movement ever since. 
Lord Waldorf Astor was Chairman of RIIA 1935-1949 (3) and David Rockefeller 
was CFR director 1949-1985, Chairman of the board 1970-1985 and vice 
president 1950-1970. Despite being over 80 years old he is still the honary 
chairman of the CFR International Advisory Board. (4) CFR members currently 
number around 4000 of the most influential people in the United States. All of the 
major American news anchors are members of the CFR including Dan Rather, 
Peter Jennings, Barbara Walters and Tom Brokaw.(5) Both the Royal Institute of 
International Affairs and the CFR have offthe record meetings which observe the 
Chatham House Rule of secrecy. (6) 

24 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


David Rockefeller founded another international relations policy making forum 
in 1973 called the Trilateral Commission. It is dedicated to fostering closer 
cooperation between North America, Europe and Japan. (7) Consisting of the top 
few hundred industrialists and policy makers, this semi-secretive organization is 
far more exclusive than the CFR. 


Like Round Table and the Trilateral Commission, Bilderberg's purpose is to 
coordinate American and European foreign policy. The annual Bilderberg meeting 
of the top 120 European-American movers and shakers is the world's most 
secretive and exclusive foreign policy making forum. There are no published 
minutes and only recently have the meetings been mentioned in the mainstream 
press. (8) They normally take place a week or two before the publicized G8 inter- 
governmental conferences. Bilderberg was founded in 1954 by Prince Bernhard of 
the Netherlands, a card carrying member of the Nazi SS. Whilst membership 
appears to change year to year, David Rockefeller has been spotted several 
times over the last few years and Dutch Royalty are regular attendees. Kenneth 
Clarke, Tony Blair and Peter Mandelson are just some British Ministers who have 
attended Bilderberg in recent years. 

On the 'official participants list' from Bilderberg published before the 2002 
meeting in Chantilly Virginia, media personnel included: Kenneth Whyte, National 
Post (CDN), Tager Sidenfaden, Editor of Politiken (Germany); Andrea Mithcell, 
Foreign Affairs correspondent for NBC ; Charles Krauthammer, columnist 
Washington Post; Jim Hoagland, Associate Editor, Washington Post; Paul A Gitot, 
Wall Street Journal; Conrad Black, Chairman, Telegraph Group; Jean de Belot, 
Editor-in-Chief, Le Figaro (French). (9) 

Bilderberg's control over the mainstream press is evidenced by the fact that 
on 20th July 1976, London Financial Times correspondent C. Gordon Tether was 
finally fired after several attempts to publish articles about Bilderberg in the 
Lombard Column (io) 


Unlike Mr Tether, Financial Times columnist Martin Wolf has been a regular 
attendee of Bilderberg for years. Only this year did he publish the fact in the FT, 
writing an article on the conference in Versailles in May 2003. Since the meetings 
are strictly confidential, we can only assume that Mr Wolf 's suggestion of a rift in 
American and European foreign policy is the first ever official - and well timed - 
piece of Bilderberg propaganda. (ii) 


In addition to these secretive groups, the elite manage a high-level 
international think-tank on environmental issues- The Club of Rome. Its 
members are one hundred individuals, at present drawn from 52 countries and 
five continents. (12) It was founded in 1968 by Dr Aurelio Peccei on behalf of Fiat 
and Olivetti. (13) With a particular focus on environmental issues, the group is 

25 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

charged with finding internationalist solutions to the world's problems. Members 
have included top businessmen, notably Canada's environmentalism ambassador 
and multi-billionaire, Maurice Strong. Honary members include European royalty 
and presidents such as Mikhail Gorbachev, the Red who mysteriously turned 


The high command launch their policies into the public arena on a wave of 
money that washes over schools, universities and charitable organizations. In the 
United States that wave has been directed at changing the bias of American 
education away from individualism towards socialism and internationalism. 

The Ford Foundation was established in 1936 by Henry Ford of Ford Motor 
Company. In January 2002 its assets were valued at $13 billion and total grants 
since 1972 alone total $10.2 billion!(i4) The major Rockefeller family foundations 
were established by John D. Rockefeller - the General Education Board in 1903 
endowed with $129 million, and The Rockefeller Foundation in 1913 endowed 
with $50 million. Total grants to date by the Rockefeller Foundation are 
estimated at $ 2 billion. (15) The Rockefeller Brothers Fund was founded in 1940 
and by January 2003 it had given away $574,466,677. RBF merged with The 
Charles E. Culpepper Foundation in July 1999. (16) The Carnegie Endowment Fund 
was established in 1910 with a $10 million endowment from Andrew Carnegie(i7) 
and became a key partner of the Rockefeller and Ford foundations in pursuit of a 
single aim. 

That aim became apparent to The Congressional Special Committee to 
Investigate Tax-exempt Foundations, known as the 'Reece Committee', set up in 
1952. To their concern, the Committee discovered that the Rockefeller and 
Carnegie group of foundations exercised a very significant degree of control over 
American schools and universities. In 1954 Norman Dodd was the staff director 
of the committee. He recorded an interview with G. Edward Griffin shortly before 
he died in which he described how the Carnegie Endowment and the Rockefeller 
Foundation joined forces after the end of World War I to use the education 
system, and the teaching of American history in particular, to promote 
internationalism and collectivism. And when Rowan Gaither, President of the Ford 
Foundation, met with Mr Dodd he made an astonishing admission: 

Mr. Dodd, all of us who have a hand in the making of policies here have had 
experience operating under directives, the substance of which is that we shall 
use our grant-making power so to alter life in the United States that it can be 
comfortably merged with the Soviet Union. (18) 


The establishment of the United Nations in 1945, only a year after the IMF and 
World Bank, is some evidence of the parity of political and financial globalization. 
Vladimir Bukovsky, possibly the most famous Soviet dissident after Alexander 
Solzhenitsyn, spent twelve years in Soviet prisons and psychiatric hospitals due 
to his opposition to communism. He gave his opinion on the U.N. in a recent 

It was meant to serve the "progressive causes", such as advancement of 
26 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

socialism, "national liberation", unilateral disarmament of the West, 
redistribution of wealth from the "rich North" to the "poor South" or just plain 
anti-Western propaganda. (19) 

Whilst the U.N. has pursued that goal through international aid and inter- 
governmental agencies, its sister financial organizations have been the key 
drivers for international socialism and the first world financial empire. In 
September 1963, President Kennedy addressed the annual conference of the 
IMF/World Bank and described the intent behind the creation of these 

Twenty years ago, when the architects of these institutions met to design an 
international banking structure, the economic life of the world was polarized in 
overwhelming, and even alarming measure on the United States... Sixty percent 
of the gold reserves of the world were here... There was a need for redistribution 
of the financial resources of the world.. And there was an equal need to organize 
a flow of capital to the impoverished countries of the world. All this has come 
about. It did not come about by chance but by conscious and deliberate and 
responsible planning. (20) 

Under the Bretton Woods agreements, The World Bank was to make loans to 
under-developed countries and the IMF was to promote monetary cooperation 
between nations by maintaining fixed exchange rates between their currencies. 
Under the IMF quota system, the majority of the donated capital to the IMF 
comes from Western governments, especially the U.S.. In 1970, the IMF came 
up with the "SDR " scheme for increasing quota capital. Special Drawing Rights, 
which are merely government promises to pay, increase the quota by 25%. (2i) 
The IMF now has reserves against which its sister organization the World Bank 
can obtain loans from western commercial banks for developing countries. These 
loans can be obtained at a very low rate of interest because western 
governments offer to bail out the World Bank with "callable capital" if it gets into 
trouble. The callable capital is about ten times as much as the quota capital. Over 
the last fifty years a torrent of Dollars, Pounds, Francs, Deutsche Marks and Yen 
gushed through the World Bank/IMF directly into the hands of foreign dictators 
and used to build the one system dictators knew how to build: Socialism and 
despotism. (22) 

The following chapters show that what appeared here to be simple foreign 
investment,was actually laying down the gangplank for the captains of Western 
industry and finance to board the ship, loot it, and sail off into the sunset with 
most of the Third World's natural resources and industries. Financial globalization 
has been achieved through economic piracy masquerading as international credit. 


Before the bankers could channel billions of dollars to foreign dictators and set 
up inter-governmental structures, they needed Western politicians who were 
amenable to their plan. By controlling policy-making groups, education and the 
media, the bankers have helped to make international socialism more politically 
acceptable than it otherwise would be. There have also been very significant 
instances where the financial elite have selected and sponsored witting servants 
for the top jobs in politics to further their globalist aims. For example, Rothschild 

27 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

agent Colonel Mandell House personally chose Woodrow Wilson - the most 
unlikely of all political candidates - and secured his nomination for President on 
the Democratic ticket in 1912. It was House who convinced the Morgan group, 
and others with power in politics and the media, to throw their support to Wilson, 
allowing him to win the election and become the 28th President of the United 
States. Under Wilson, the United States got itself a central bank - the Federal 
Reserve system - and entered into a World War. Col. House moved into the 
Whitehouse with the President for six years and remained his most important 
adviser. In his memoirs, President Wilson said, 

Mr. House is my second personality. He is my independent self. His thoughts and 
mine are one. (23 

More recently, representing the most powerful money families in Europe, 
Helmut Kohl was the spearhead for European monetary and political union during 
his sixteen year tenure as German Chancellor 1982-1998. Between 1959 and 
1969 Helmut Kohl worked for the 'Verband der Chemischen Industrie' 
(Association of the Chemical Industry), the largest lobby organization of the 
chemical-pharmaceutical industry - the Rockefeller/I.G. Farben cartel. (24) These 
interests systematically promoted Helmut Kohl's political career in order to 
further their global expansion plans. Kohl's chancellorship ended in scandal when 
it was revealed that he had accepted millions of Deutsche Marks in bribes, the 
source of which he refused to disclose. (25) 

On 19 September 2000, an article appeared in The Daily Telegraph by 
Ambrose Evans-Pritchard which pullled all this together in just a few paragraphs 
(26). It began: 

DECLASSIFIED American government documents show that the US intelligence 
community ran a campaign in the Fifties and Sixties to build momentum for a united 
Europe. It funded and directed the European federalist movement. 

The documents confirm suspicions voiced at the time that America was working 
aggressively behind the scenes to push Britain into a European state. One 
memorandum, dated July 26, 1950, gives instructions for a campaign to promote a 
fully fledged European parliament. It is signed by Gen William J Donovan, head of the 
American wartime Office of Strategic Services, precursor of the CIA. 

The article went on to decribe how the Rockefeller and Ford Foundations set up 
an organization called the American Committee for a United Europe in 1948 
which was run by CIA chiefs on their behalf. The documents show that ACUE 
financed the European Movement, the most important federalist organisation in 
the post-war years. In 1958, for example, it provided 53.5 per cent of the 
movement's funds. Furthermore,the European Youth Campaign, an arm of the 
European Movement, was wholly funded and controlled by Washington. The 
Belgian director, Baron Boel, received monthly payments into a special account. 
The leaders of the European Movement - Retinger, the visionary Robert Schuman 
and the former Belgian prime minister Paul-Henri Spaak - were all treated as 
hired hands by their American sponsors. 

A memo from the European section, dated June 11, 1965, advises the vice-president 
of the European Economic Community, Robert Marjolin, to pursue monetary union by 

28 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

It recommends suppressing debate until the point at which "adoption of such 
proposals would become virtually inescapable". 

What the Telegraph article didn't mention was that all of the OSS-CIA-ACUE 
principals involved in the "European federalist movement" - Donovan, Smith, and 
Dulles - were also Council on Foreign Relations members (27) 

More evidence of this nature was recently obtained from the secret archives of 
the Soviet Union. Prime Minister Yeltsin outlawed the Communist party in 1991 
but when he was challenged in the courts, he needed evidence of its criminal 
past. He turned to Vladimir Bukovsky for assistance in finding the evidence in the 
secret archives of the Politburo. In 1992, Mr Bukovsky was granted access to the 
archives for half a year, and copied as many documents as he could using a 
portable scanner and computer. Even the very small proportion of documents 
copied revealed much that was embarrassing to both Western and Soviet 
leaders. Consequently, these archives - including the documents which Mr 
Bukovsky still has on his computer- have been classified again! His 44 page 
booklet entitled E.U.S.S.R., published in December 2004, reveal some truly 
astonishing facts about the collapse of the Soviet Union. (28) 

By 1987, Gorbachev had decided that perestroika included the convergence 
of the U.S.S.R. and Europe into a "Common European Home". This idea was 
supported by Europe's social democrats whose political leaders went in secret to 
Moscow before the dissolution of the U.S.S.R. to confirm that the European 
Community would include most of the Soviet states. However, behind these 
political leaders were the financial elite, in particular the members of the 
Trilateral Commission. One of the Politburo documents records a meeting which 
took place on 18th January 1989 between Gorbachev and key members of the 
Trilateral Commission - Rockefeller, Kissinger, Nakasone and Giscard d'Estaing. 
They encouraged the Soviets to integrate into the world's economic and financial 
institutions (GATT, IMF) and also into the European Community. Giscard 
announced that there would be a European state within twenty years and asked 
Gorbachev which East European countries would be allowed to join. Kissinger 
then asked what the Soviets thought of the concept of 'Europe from the Atlantic 
to the Urals'. 

On 19 July 1990, Jacques Delors, President of The European Commission 
visited Moscow and confirmed in secret that he wanted the Soviet Union to be 
part of the future European state. However three months before, his close friend 
and European co-chairman of the Trilateral Commission, Georges Berthoin had 
met with Gorbachev's European advisor, Vadim Zagladin. Berthoin was the 
ambassador who set out Delors' views ahead of time. One of the possiblities 
Delors asked him to discuss was whether the USA and Japan should also be 
integrated with Europe and the Soviet Union. This idea reflected the inter- 
continental membership of the Trilateral Commission. 

As we near our final destination of one world government and the New World 
Order, it's very important to realize who planned the journey. Why have the 
richest and most powerful men in the world done everything possible to conceal 
what they have been doing? If we are on the road to Utopia, why the need for 

Chapter 3 End Notes 

29 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

1. Carroll Quigley, The Anglo American Establishment, GSC and Associates, 1981, en's 3- 
5. See also G Edward Griffin, The Future Is Calling (Part Two) p. 5 at 

2. Quigley op cit.,pp.5-7 and 190- 91; and Griffin, op cit., p. 7 

3. Quigley, op cit., p. 184. See also Spartacus Educational at 

4. The Council on Foreign Relations website. 
See http : //cfr.orq/a bout/board . ph p 

5. Griffin, op cit. 

6. Royal Institute of International Affairs website = 14 and CFR website 

7. The Trilateral Commission website 

8. Emma Jane Kirby, Elite Power Brokers Secret Meeting, BBC, London, 15 May 2003. See 

9. Official Bilderberg press release and participant list, Chantilly, Virginia, U.S.A., 30 May 
- 2 June 2002. See 2002.html 

10. The Banned Articles of C. Gordon Tether, Goodhead News Press - Bicester - 1977 
ISBN 905821 009. See http://www.bilderberg.Org/bilder.htm#banned 

11. Martin Wolf, A Partnership heading for a Destructive Separation, Financial Times, 
London, 21 May 2003. See http://www.bilderberq.Org/2003.htm#worse 

12. The Club of Rome website. 


13. Donella H. Meadows and Dennis L. Meadows, The Limits To Growth, 1972 Potomac 
Books, pp. 9-10 

14. The Ford Foundation website. 


15. The Rockefeller Foundation website. 


16. The Rockefeller Brothers Fund website. 

17. The Carnegie Endowment website. 

See home .asp 

18. The Hidden Agenda, An interview with Norman Dodd conducted by G Edward Griffin. 
30 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Transcript at 

19. Jamie Glazov, A Conversation With Vladimir Bukovsky,, 30 
May 2003. See 

20. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 
2002, pp. 109-110 

21. What is the International Monetary Fund ?, IMF. 

See http://www.imf.Org/external/pubs/ft/exrp/what.htm#where 

22. Griffin, op cit., pp. 89-95. 

23. G. Edward Griffin, The Future is Calling, part 3. 

24. Dr Matthias Rath, The Pharmaceutical Business with Disease, The Dr Rath Health 
Foundation. See 

PHARMACEUTICAL BUSINESS/health movement against codex/ 

health movement22.htm 

PHARMACEUTICAL BUSINESS/health movement against codex/ 

health movement21.htm 

25., an on-line encyclopedia. 

See http://www.lupinfo.eom/encyclopedia/K/Kohl-Hel.html 

26 Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, Euro- Federalists financed by U.S. Spy Chiefs, The Daily 
Telegraph, 19 Septemeber 2000. See 

27. William F. Jasper, Global Tyranny.. Bloc by Bloc, The New American, 9 April 2001 

28. Vladimir Bukovsky and Pavel Stroilov, EUSSR, Sovereignty Publications, December 
2004. ISBN 0-9540231-1-0 

31 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 4 


The bedrock of the New World Order is a global financial empire owned and 
controlled by Western bankers and industrialists. It has been laid down using a 
two pronged strategy. The first was to finance corrupt and socialist regimes in 
developing countries in order to stifle the growth of domestic free enterprise 
causing them to become dependent on Western industry and finance. The second 
was a form of international economic piracy, where the World Bank and IMF fired 
a broadside of debt at Third World economies, knocking out their engine of 
growth, and allowing the Western multinationals to climb aboard and plunder 
their national resources and natural industries. 

The success of the strategy can be judged on the one hand by looking at 
progress towards free-market economies and property rights around the world, 
and the other, the extent to which developing countries are beholden to Western 
corporations. To reach a moral conclusion about it, one might also consider the 
impact of the strategy on human rights, because the cartel has financed 
communist and fascist regimes alike, with absolutely no qualms about the human 

The emblem which best represents it is the skull and cross-bones motif of 
Yales' famous secret society, The Order of Skull and Bones. Many members of 
the cartel have belonged to it including generations of the Bush family. This 
emblem is the universal symbol of both and piracy and lethality, thereby 
representing the economic poison swallowed by most Third World nations. The 
Order was founded in 1832 by William Russell whose family fortune was built 
upon the global trade in opium, a substance almost as addictive and destructive 
as the drip-feed of Western currency. 


There is a staggering correlation between private property rights and political 
freedoms. GNP per capita in the U.S. is above $20,000 but in former Eastern Bloc 
countries it averages between $730 and $5000.(i)Whilst governments of lesser 
developed countries have had access to an unlimited supply of money from 
abroad, private enterprise has been stifled because the citizens of these 
countries have been denied access to capital by politicians. Hernando de Soto's 
highly acclaimed book The Mystery of Capita I {2) documents how much 'dead 
capital' exists in developing countries. This refers to private property which 
cannot be used as collateral to obtain loans or buy stock in another business 
because the owner has not been given adequate property rights by the state. De 
Soto concludes: 

They have houses but not titles; crops but not deeds; businesses but not 
statutes of incorporation. It is the unavailability of these essential 
representations that explains why people who have adapted every other 
Western invention, from the paper clip to the nuclear reactor, have not been 
able to produce sufficient capital to make their domestic capitalism work. (3) 

32 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

He estimates that nearly 5 billion people are legally and economically 
disenfranchised by their own governments. Very few property owners hold 
government-licenced titles outside of North America, Canada, Australia, Japan 
and Western Europe. The total value of this dead capital has been calculated to 
be 9.3 trillion dollars which is forty-six times as much as all the World Bank loans 
of the past three decades. 



The Nazis were financed by German industries such as Krupp and I.G. Farben 
and their owners and directors held key positions in Hitler's government. 
However, German industry was itself partly financed by British and American 
bankers. Much of the capital for the expansion of I.G. Farben came from Wall 
Street, primarily Rockefeller's National City Bank; Dillon Read & Company, also a 
Rockefeller firm; Morgan's Equitable Trust Company; Harris Forbes & Company; 
and even the predominantly Jewish firm of Kuhn Loeb & Company. In 1928, 
Henry Ford merged his German assets with those of I.G. Farben. (4) 40% of Ford 
Motor A.G. of Germany was transferred to I.G. Farben and Edsel Ford joined the 
board of American I.G.. A decade later, in August 1938, Henry Ford received the 
Grand Cross of the German Eagle, a Nazi decoration for distinguished foreigners. 
(5) During the Allied bombing raids over Germany, the factories and offices of I.G. 
Farben were spared on instructions from the U.S. War Department. 


Without the intervention of the German government, Round Table leaders and 
associated Wall Street financiers, the Bolshevik revolution would never have 
succeeded. The popular Kerensky revolution which over-threw the Tsar occurred 
in February 1917. It was relatively moderate in its policies and attempted to 
accommodate all revolutionary factions including the Bolsheviks who were the 
smallest minority. The second revolution in October 1917 was a coup d'etat by 
the Bolsheviks who had succeeded in recruiting sufficient military support with 
the financial backing of Round Table and Co. (6) 

Prominent American financiers included J. P. Morgan controlled Guaranty Trust 
Company and William Boyce Thompson, a director of the Federal Reserve Bank of 
New York and leader of the Red Cross mission to Russia during the revolution. (7) 
British funding came from banker and founding member of Round Table, Lord 

When private property was outlawed after the revolution, foreign money and 
corporations were needed to prevent the economy and the communist regime 
from collapsing. It has remained that way ever since: A symbiosis of the two 
powers whereby Western financial support for Russia's ailing economy has been 
channeled into the pockets of the international bankers via the companies they 
control. With domestic capitalism outlawed, revolutionary Russia was right from 
the start a 'captured market' for the Western bankers. This model has been used 
in country after country throughout the world. 

All the banks in Russia were nationalized after the revolution except the 
Petrograd branch of Rockefeller's National City Bank. In 1922 the first Soviet 

33 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

international bank, the Ruskombank, was created by a cartel of Tsarist, German, 
Swedish, American and British bankers. In exchange for Russian gold, a steady 
stream of large and lucrative (i.e. non-competitive) contracts were awarded to 
British and American businesses connected to Round Table. (9) 

Russia's gold reserves were soon depleted therefore game could only 
continue with the support of the Western taxpayer. With the end of the U.S. 
Government's Lend-Lease programme after WWII, which transfused $11 billion in 
military aid to the Soviets, the bankers reverted to the core mechanism it has 
used to build foreign dictatorships: Bank loans. Western (mostly American) 
taxpayers have bailed out the Soviets with hundreds of billions of dollars. Before 
the Revolution, the Ukraine was the bread basket of Europe. Afterwards Russia 
could not produce enough food to feed itself and has relied on millions of tons of 
subsidized food imports from the West. As Lenin recognized, the capitalists would 
have to make the rope with which the communists could hang them.(io) 

The Western military-industrial complex helped to build Eastern-Bloc heavy 
industry, from oil-drilling equipment to chemical processing plants, air-traffic 
radar systems, equipment to produce precision bearings, helicopter engines, 
laser technology, truck plants and nuclear power plants. The German company, 
Junkers Aircraft , literally created Soviet air power. Acknowledging this apparent 
contradiction between geo-politics and international business, Secretary of the 
Navy, John Lehman, addressed the graduating class at Annapolis in 1983: 

Within weeks, many of you will be looking across just hundreds of feet of 
water at some of the most modern technology ever invented in America. 
Unfortunately, it is on Soviet ships. (ii) 

These facts demonstrate that the Cold War and post-Cold War era concepts 
are invalid in terms of economics. The same financial system has always 
operated. The change of communists to 'social democrats' after the fall of the 
Berlin Wall was simply a name change aimed at persuading the Western public to 
believe that the world is becoming more liberal and democratic. In fact, the 
bankers now own everything of significance in communist and capitalist countries 
alike. It is no coincidence that the purported demise of the Soviet Union began at 
the end of the 1980s to coincide with the admission of the Soviet Union into the 
World Bank/IMF club. According to the World Bank's website: 

It was only after radical changes had been made in the country's policy 
in the late 1980s that the Soviet leadership began to show interest in 
establishing ties with the World Bank and the IMF. The meeting of the Group 
of Seven in London in 1991 resulted in the admission of the Soviet Union to 
these international organizations as an associate member. (12) 

Rather than a change of policy, this was actually putting the same old policy 
into high gear. Senior oligarchs in the communist party and the KGB simply stole 
the country's oil and gas industries during the economic chaos of the 1990s. 
More of Russia's assets are now open to foreign buyers. Witness BP's recent deal 
to merge its Russian oil assets with TNK, a big private oil company jointly owned 
by billionaires Mikhail Fridman and Viktor Vekselberg. The BP deal gives the 
combined company an enterprise value of around $18 billion. Russia now has one 
of the largest number of billionaires in the world and possibly the highest 
billionaire-to-GDP ratio in the world according to Forbes Magazine. (13) At the 
same time Royal Dutch / Shell announced a $15 billion investment in Russian gas 

34 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

production and a gas pipeline to northern Europe. (14) 

In his book Globalization and its Discontents former World Bank chief 
economist, Joseph Stiglitz, describes how the privatization programme in Russia 
led to a robber baron economy and a catastrophic decline in GDP. Surprisingly, 
Stiglitz views this as yet another sorry mistake by an ideologically motivated 
World Bank/IMF. By 1992 $50 billion in loans and aid from various western 
sources rained down on the former Soviet states only to disappear without trace. 
In 1998 a Group -of -Seven/ IMF meeting authorized a $22 billion bailout. In 
1999 it was discovered $20 billion had been stolen by Russian officials. (15) 

Amnesty International currently has a major campaign for basic human rights 
in Russia. Torture is still institutionalized, anyone, even a child, who is taken into 
police custody for questioning is at risk of torture and ill-treatment. Methods of 
police torture commonly reported include beatings, electric shocks, rape, the use 
of gas masks to induce near-suffocation, and tying detainees in painful positions. 
Up to a million men, women and children are in prisons and pre-trial detention 
centres in the Russian Federation, many are held in conditions that amount to 
cruel, inhuman and degrading treatment. Conditions are particularly harsh in the 
pre-trial detention centres owing to chronic overcrowding. Cells are filthy and 
pest-ridden, with poor lighting and ventilation, and contagious diseases are rife 
(over 100,000 inmates have tuberculosis). Tens of thousands of children in 
Russia are languishing behind bars. Children also suffer torture and ill treatment 
in pre-trial detention centres and prisons. Since coming to power, Vladamir Putin 
has recently strengthened the FSB, the old internal security arm of the KGB, 
inhibited free speech, pursued politically motivated persecution of businessmen 
and pursued a four year war of aggression in Chechnya involving substantial 
atrocities against civilians. (16) 


The communist revolution in China was also backed by Wall Street. In 1946, 
The American Government imposed an arms embargo on the Nationalist 
Government when it was on the verge of defeating the communists. Congress 
voted to send millions of dollars of arms to the Chinese government but the aid 
was deliberately delayed for months. When it did arrive, the rifles didn't have any 
bolts in them and were useless. (i7) 

China joined the World Bank/IMF in 1980. By 1996, it was the largest 
recipient of World Bank loans. With Western dollars, China has purchased power- 
generating equipment, oil-field exploration, fleets of jumbo jets, steel mills, 
satellite communications systems and huge amounts of high-tech military 
hardware. (is) Three years ago, Bill Clinton authorized Donald Rumsfeld's 
company ABB Inc. to sell two light water nuclear reactors to North Korea. (19) 
Starting in 1996, Russian and Chinese military units began to purchase U.S. 
made super-computers for nuclear weapons research. These super-computers 
can run American nuclear bomb design software and codes with little or no 
modification. They are identical to the computers at U.S. weapons labs right 
down to the vendor support. (20)(2i) 

Despite the fact that China has substantial trade with the West, evidenced by 
all the consumables in our shops which are made in China, Amnesty International 
details human rights abuses on a massive scale:(22)The continued use of the 
death penalty during the ongoing "strike hard" campaign resulting in high 
numbers of executions, often after unfair or summary trials; the continued use of 

35 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

'Re-education through Labour', a system which allows for the detention of 
millions of individuals every year without charge or trial in contravention of 
international human rights standards; the persistence of serious allegations of 
torture and ill-treatment within China's criminal justice system, including police 
stations; and increasing arrests and detentions of Internet users or so-called 
"cyber-dissidents" in violation of their fundamental rights to freedom of 
expression and information. Joseph Stiglitz states that China began its transition 
to a market economy in the late 1970s(23) but the one-child policy, first 
adumbrated by Deng Xiaoping in 1979, was in place nationwide by 1981. The 
'technical policy on family planning', still in force today, requires IUDs for women 
of childbearing age with one child, sterilization for couples with two children 
(usually performed on the woman), and abortions for women pregnant without 
authorization. By the mid-eighties, according to Chinese government statistics, 
birth control surgeries-abortions, sterilizations, and IUD insertions-were 
averaging more than thirty million a year. Many, if not most, of these procedures 
were performed on women who submitted only under duress. (24) 


The Western cartel has supported the bloodiest regimes in human history all in 
the cause of financial globalization and the New World Order. The next chapter 
shows that the same game has been played in developing countries throughout 
the world. 

Chapter 4 End Notes 

1. UC Atlas of Inequality. 1999 statistics of GNP per capita. 

2. Hernando De Soto, The Mystery of Capital, (New York: Basic Books, 2000). See 

see also the article by Dr Michael Coffman, Why Property Rights Matter on Discerning The 
Times website at 

3. De Soto, op cit., p. 6 

4. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 
2002, p. 295 

5. Anthony C. Sutton, Wall Street and the Rise of Hitler, GSG and Associates, 1976, p. 93 

6. Griffin, op cit., pp. 285-6 

7. Sutton, op cit., p. 170 

8. Griffin, op cit., p. 274 

9. Ibid p. 292 

10. Ibid pp. 296-299 

11. Ibid p. 303 

12. The World Bank Group in Russia, The World Bank Group. 

36 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


13. Paul Klebnikov, Out of Russia's ashes— treasure, Forbes Magazine, 17 March 2003. 

14. Royal Dutch/Shell and BP expand to Russia, Chemical Newsflash, sponsored by BASF 
AG, 24 June 2003, 

15. Griffin, op cit., pp. 129-130 

16. Amnesty International briefing on the human rights situation in the Russian 
Federation. See 

17. Dr. Stanley Monteith, The Brotherhood of Darkness, Hearthstone Publishing, 2000, 
p. 20 

18. Griffin, op cit., p. 301 

19. Randeep Ramesh,7/?e two faces of Rumsfeld, The Guardian, London, 9 May 2003. See, 2763, 952289, 00 .htm I 

20. Charles Smith, Brokering our own demise, WorldNetDaily, 30 Novemberl999. See ID= 20542 

21. Charles Smith, China and covert nuclear commerce, WorldNetDaily, 11 May 1999. 
See ID=20512 

22. Amnesty International, People's Republic of China: Continuing abuses under a new 
leadership - summary of human rights concerns, 1 October 2003. See 

23. Joeseph Stiglitz, Globalization and its Discontents, Penguin Books, 2002, pp. 117-118 

24. Steven W. Mosher, President Population Research Institute, China's One-Child Policy: 
Coercive from the Beginning. Testimony Submitted to the International Relations 
Committee of the U.S. House of Representatives for the Hearing on "Coercive Population 
Control in China: New Evidence of Forced Abortion and Forced Sterilization," 17 October 
2001. See http://www.pop.orq/main.cfm?EID=305 

37 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 5 




Mr Ian Smith, Prime Minister of Rhodesia 1964-1979, often said: "we were 
never beaten by our enemies - we were betrayed by our friends". The West 
essentially promised white leaders in South Africa that they would be allowed to 
continue practicing apartheid if they would stop arming Rhodesia in her war 
against communism. Between 1979 and 1980, Rhodesia fell into Marxist 
dictatorship under Mugabe and had its name changed to Zimbabwe. (i) The World 
Bank provided loans to Mugabe up until May 2000.(2) This is not an academic 
issue since millions face starvation because of Mugabe's Marxist policy of seizing 
the nation's farms. Ominously, Mugabe has turned to communist China to run 
farms in Zimbabwe. (3) 

In the 1980s the world saw starving children in Ethiopia, but what they did 
not realize was that this was a planned famine. The Marxist regime of Mengistu 
Haile Mariam undertook nationalization of agriculture and massive population 
resettlement program modeled on Stalin and Mao's starvation programmes in the 
1930s and 40s which killed millions. Meanwhile the World Bank continued to send 
Mengistu millions of dollars, much of it intended for the ministry of agriculture 
undertaking the resettlement programme. (4)(5) The Wall St. Journal recently 
reported on a study by the The Free Africa Foundation which concluded that, 

In country after country in Africa, there has been no accountability in the 
use of World Bank loans... Billions in World Bank loans have been embezzled 
in Africa and rarely anyone is held accountable and prosecuted. (6) 

It comes as no surprise then that by its own admission, the World Bank's 
purported policy of strengthening African free market economies by lending $50 
billion for 'Structural Adjustment programs' and other projects over the past 
thirty years has been an abject failure. That's because their real purpose was the 
exact opposite: The destruction of the property rights and the creation of 
socialist dictatorships. What else could possibly have happened after handing 
over $50 billion to undemocratic governments with no accountability? 

Given a political system that is based upon a patronage system and 
governments run by uniformed bandits, the commitment to reform is almost 
non-existent as genuine economic reform would be politically suicidal. The result 
is a 'reform charade,' where "reforming" governments take one step forward and 
three steps backward. (7) 

The Bank's own reports in the 1980s revealed that it played a major role in 
nationalizing the development process throughout the Third World. Regarding 
these so-called harsh conditionalities imposed by the structural adjustment loans, 
a 1985 confidential bank report by leading development experts concluded that 
'the SAL's seemingly hard and all-encompassing conditionality is largely illusory'. 

38 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

The bank and some proponents of foreign aid claim that a wave of privatization 
swept the Third World but actually 'privatization was almost all talk'. World Bank 
loans either go directly to the recipient government or must be guaranteed by 
the government. So, by inevitably increasing the politicization of Third World 
economies, World Bank aid was the economic tranquilizer dart which created a 
weaker domestic market for the foreign multinationals to feed on. (8) 


By 1982 almost every Third World government was running behind on its 
payments and Latin America was no exception. Over the next seven years, multi- 
billion dollar bailout packages failed to stem the economic decline. That's because 
they were used to build cumbersome nationalized industries at the expense of 
the private sector. For example, the western banks funded large government run 
companies such as Petroleo Brasilerio S.A. in Brazil and Petroleus Mexicanos in 
Mexico. By 1990 these companies were failing miserably and dragging the rest of 
the economy down with them. Brazil was unable to produce enough petrol and 
Mexico became a food importer. Brazil is now controlled by the military and 
government run companies consume 65% of all industrial investment. Exactly 
the same process brought Argentina's economy to its knees. It had an expanding 
middle class until its government became the recipient of massive loans from the 
World Bank and U.S. commercial banks during the 1980s. By 1989 inflation 
averaged 5000% and thousands of corporate bankruptcies followed. Government 
figures showed that in 2002, about 100,000 people dropped out of the middle 
class each week to become the new poor. A country that only 10 years earlier 
had Latin America's highest standard of living was now on a level with Jamaica; 
half of Argentina's 37 million people lived below the poverty level. The 
Government had subsidy programmes for about 2 million malnourished 
Argentines, but millions more got nothing. Some subsisted by scavenging 
through garbage. (io) (ii) 

Furthermore the West has supplied physical weapons for military 
governments to spend their free money on. Britain is the world's second largest 
arms exporter after the U.S. with 20% market share. (12) A U.S. military training 
school, the School of the Americas, has trained many of the worst human rights 
violators and dictators in various Latin American countries, including Roberto 
D'Aubisson from El Salvador and Manuel Noriega of Panama. (13) 


Joseph Stiglitz's discussion of the role of bankruptcy laws in the 1997 Asian 
financial crisis reveals how the IMF deliberately undermined domestic property 
rights. Here the bankers exploited the absence of the legal framework for 
implementing trusteeships when large numbers of firms were going bankrupt. 
The IMF encouraged the state to get involved in restructuring the companies, i.e. 
telling them how to run themselves instead of sorting out who really owns the 
firm. Countries such as Thailand followed their advice and languished whilst 
Korea and Malaysia ignored it and prospered. (14) 


39 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

By the end of the 1980s the banks had successfully empowered and 
corrupted Third World governments with billions in bank loans. Liberal democracy 
and the free market had been strangled. Now for the second play: The sell off. 
The directive for the sell off came from the World Bank and IMF at the end of the 
1980s as shown by World Bank documents signed by James Wolfensen and 
leaked to a BBC investigative journalist, Greg Palast. The World Bank flew in their 
teams who dictated their plans, an average of 111 conditions in a pre-written 
document, to each nation's finance minister. If he refused he would be denied 
any further loans and the life blood which had sustained his government would 
be cut. These conditions included selling off the natural resources and national 
industries to foreign multinationals. In the case of Argentina, they required the 
nation to give up its gas water and oil to Vivendi, Repsol, Enron and a few other 
multinationals. In 1988 Jeb Bush made a call to an Argentine senator asking him 
to sell a gas pipeline to Enron at one fifth of its market value. In return, a 
percentage of the discount would be deposited in the senator's Swiss bank 
account. The process has been called 'briberization' rather than privatisation.(is) 

The Water Barons report for the Center for Public Integrity deals in-depth 
with the sale of national water supplies. "Surgery without anesthesia," was how 
Menem described his policies in 1989 as he set out to make Argentina one of the 
world's leading models for privatisation . Faced with rampant inflation - caused 
by the banks and who were suddenly "reluctant" to make further loans - Menem 
won passage of the National Administrative Reform Law, which declared a state 
of economic emergency and gave him the power to privatize public utilities by 
decree. As a result World Bank money came flowing back to Argentina. On 18 
Dec. 1990, the World Bank approved a loan (a bribe) of $300 million for "The 
new adjustment projects in Argentina". None applauded louder than Santiago 
Soldati, a businessman and close Menem ally who would end up as the lead 
Argentine partner in the privatisation of water. Soldati later sold his interest in 
the water company, making a tidy $100 million in the process. In 1993, the 
Government granted a 30-year concession to run the water system to Aguas 
Argentinas a consortium controlled by two French corporate giants, Compagnie 
Generale des Eaux (now Vivendi )and Lyonnaise des Eaux (now Suez). Soon 
after, the World Bank declared the Buenos Aires privatisation an overwhelming 
success, and made it a model for privatisation s of water that followed in the 
Philippines, Indonesia, Australia and South Africa.(i6) 

The investigation showed that the enormous expansion of these water 
companies could not have been possible without the World Bank and other 
international financial institutions, such as the IMF, the Inter-American 
Development Bank, the Asian Development and the European Bank for 
Reconstruction. In countries such as South Africa, Argentina, Philippines and 
Indonesia, the World Bank has been advising the leaders to 'commercialize' their 
utilities as part of an overall bank policy of privatisation and 'free-market' 
economics. (17) 

The World Bank calculates that privatisation projects in developing countries 
in 2002 alone totaled (U.S) $24 billion .(is) Having become impatient with the 
sluggish pace of progress on this issue, the World Bank launched an internet 
toolkit for privatisation in developing countries, providing on-line advice on how 
to sell off highways, water, waste systems, ports, and telecoms industries!(i9) 


40 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

When making the case for such a grand conspiracy as this, it is helpful to call 
a whistleblower to the witness stand. Published in November 2004, the book 
entitled Confessions of an Economic Hit Man by John Perkins ( now a New York 
Times best seller) is a public confession by an insider about the real purpose of 
Western loans to developing countries. Working in a private consulting firm, 
Perkins was one of the 'economic hit men' who carried out the plan detailed in 
the World Bank documents. Perkins describes a classical conspiracy between 
government and big business. The U.S. National Security Agency recruited and 
trained the 'economic hit men' to carry out their duties through private consulting 
firms and other corporations. The beneficiaries of the conspiracy were the 
international bankers and shareholders in the multi-national corporations. Unable 
to repay the loans organized by the hit men, developing countries had to 
surrender their national resources to their Western creditors. 

What an extraordinary scam: Destroy a country's domestic capitalism and 
free-markets, get it into massive debt and then with financial gun to its head, 
shake it down for everything its got. It is even more extraordinary for the fact 
that, because this piracy is conducted in international waters, it isn't even illegal! 
One of the questions raised in the next chapter is whether or not these agents 
have been acting, to some degree, on Her Majesty's (secret) service. 

Chapter 5 End Notes 

1. Peter Hammond, Not Defeated -Betrayed, Frontline Fellowship. 

mission%20reports prayer/not%20defeated %20betrayed.htm 

2. The Wall Street Journal, Opinion, 5 August 2003 (Review & Outlook). 

3. Andrew Meldrum, Mugabe hires China to farm seized land, The Guardian, London, 13 
February 2003. See, 2763, 89442 1,00 .htm I 

4. James Bovard, The World Bank vs The World's Poor, Cato Policy Analysis 1987, pp. 4-6. 

5. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 
2002, p. 100 

6. The Wall Street Journal, op cit. 

7. The Failure of World Bank Programs in Africa, A Special Report by The Free Africa 
Foundation, March 2003. See summary at 

8. Bovard, op cit., 

10. Griffin, op cit., ch's 5-6 especially pp. 103-104 and 116 

11. Daniel Santoro, The 'Aguas' Tango: Cashing In On Buenos Aires' privatisation , The 
Water Barons. A report for The Center for Public Integrity, 2003. See id =ch&.rid = 50&a id = 50 

12. Brian Wheeler, How big is the UK arms trade? BBC, London, 9 September, 2003. See 

41 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

13. Anup Shah,, 30 October 2001. 


14. Joseph Stiglitz, Globalization and its Discontents, Penguin Books, 2002, pp. 117-118 

15. Greg Palast, The Best Democracy Money Can Buy. Also see Greg Palast's website for 
discussions of the book at 

http ://www.qreqpa il.cfm?artid = 12 5&row=l . 
http://www.qreqpa il.cfm?artid = 128&row=l = 198&row=l 

16. Daniel Santoro, op cit. 

17. Bill Marsden, Cholera and The Age of The Water Barons, The Water Barons, A report 
for The Center for Public Integrity. See id =ch&rid=44&a id =44 

18. Private Participatiion in Infrastructure Project Database, The World Bank Group. 

19. Toolkits, The World Bank Group. See 

42 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 6 



In Britain, privatisation started under Margaret Thatcher at the beginning of 
the 1980s, before the World Bank imposed the same policy on lesser developed 
countries. Even now, the privatisation process is far from complete, but a report 
in The Guardian newspaper summarized when the family silver was sold: 

Cable & Wireless: Oct 81, Amersham International: Feb 82, Britoil: Nov 82, 
Associated British Ports: Feb 83, Enterprise Oil: Feb 84, Jaguar: July 84, British 
Telecom: Nov 84, British Gas: Dec 86, British Airways: Feb 87, Rolls-Royce: May 
87, BAA: July 87, British Steel: Dec 88, Regional water companies: Dec 89, 
Electricity distribution companies: Dec 90.(1) 

At the same time, Margaret Thatcher introduced Compulsory Competitive 
Tendering (CCT) which started the sell off of national and local government. John 
Major renamed this Private Finance Initiative (PFI) in 1992, and the policy has 
continued unabated under Tony Blair. (2) The Public-Private Partnership (PPP) 
industry website boasts: 

564 PFI deals with a capital value of more than £35bn have been signed. 
(3). ..There has been wide coverage on the use of PPPs in health and education, 
but PPPs are being used in a diverse range of projects like helicopter simulators 
for the Ministry of Defence and the redevelopment of the main Treasury 
building... Chancellor Gordon Brown said in a recent speech that "there should 
be no principled objection to PFI expanding into new areas, such as the provision 
of employment and training services, the renovation of schools and colleges, 
major projects or urban regeneration and social housing. (4) 

The most ironic PPP initiative is the 'Strategic Transfer of the Estate to The 
Private Sector ' (STEPS) by the Inland Revenue (IRS equivalent). In March 2001, 
it signed a Private Finance Initiative deal, selling off its entire estate for £220 
million to Mapeley Steps Ltd. a company controlled by George Soros located in 
the off-shore tax haven of Bermuda. (5) 

Britain has led the field in PPPs, but almost every government in the world 
has been implementing the PPP model. (6) Having firmly established themselves in 
Europe, Africa, Latin America and Asia, the water companies are expanding into 
the far more lucrative market of the United States. The U.S. still has publicly 
owned water but that looks set to change as the French and German 
multinationals are winning the battle in Congress to allow them to take over 
America's aging water infrastructure.^) 


Although the World Bank introduced privatisation to developing countries with 
strong arm tactics at the end of the 1980s, it now has an army of policy forums 
giving intellectual credibility to it. The Water Barons investigation reveals that the 

43 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

water companies have joined forces with the World Bank and the United Nations 
to create an array of international think tanks, advisory commissions, and forums 
that have dominated the water debate and established privatisation as the 
dominant solution to the world's water problems. "What we have seen during the 
1990s has been the setting-up of a kind of global high command for water," 
wrote Ricardo Petrella, a leading researcher on the politics of water. The U.N. is 
now promoting PPP as a key component of the United Nations' programme for 
sustainable development. (8) 

At the same time as the World Bank/ IMF imposed its privatisation policy on 
the Third World, Prince Charles launched his Prince of Wales Business Leaders 
Forum. Since 1990, when he conducted his first city conference in Charleston, 
North Carolina, he has amassed over 5,000 multinational and national 
corporations whom he works with in setting up public-private partnerships. This 
is a key institution in the globalization machine, hence its members include 65 of 
the world's biggest companies. As noted in chapter two, the multi-trillion dollar 
shareholdings of the British, European and American elite are hidden behind false 
fronts, trusts and Bank of England nominee accounts. (9)(io) 

N. M. Rothschild & Sons has guided the privatisation process, especially in the 
U.K. Their website boasts: 

1985 saw N. M.Rothschild & Sons win the 'beauty contest' to advise the British 
Government on the sale of British Gas. This was the most significant piece of 
privatisation work to be undertaken by N. M. Rothschild & Sons, pioneers in such 
business from 1971. Further advisory roles were taken with regard to the 
privatisation of British Steel and British Coal as well as the regional electricity and 
water boards. It would lead to business in over 40 countries worldwide. 
... [ in 2000] the British Government appointed N M Rothschild & Sons as financial 
advisers for 3G mobile phone licensing. The bank adopted an innovative and 
highly successful auction process whereby telephone companies bid for the 
available licences, and was subsequently approached by other governments 
worldwide to undertake similar projects. (ii) 

Lord Wakeham was the Conservative Chief Whip from 1983 to 1987 and 
Secretary for Energy from 1989 to 1992. He authorized Enron to buy into the 
privatized water and electricity systems, and then, in 1994 when he resigned as 
leader of the House of Lords, he joined Enron as a non-executive director and sat 
on its audit committee. Lord Wakeham had also awarded a contract to N. M. 
Rothschild to advise the Government on coal privatisation. In 1995 he became a 
director of N. M. Rothschild. (12) 

In November 2003, Oliver Letwin resigned his directorship of N. M. 
Rothschild, which he had held since 1991, to become Shadow Chancellor of the 
Exchequer for the Conservative party. He is author of the book 'Privatising the 
World' and has worked as an adviser to foreign governments on privatisation. (13) 

Norman Lamont was the Tory Chancellor of the Exchequer from 1990-1993. 
After he graduated from university, he worked for N. M. Rothschild for eleven 
years and was a director of Rothschild Asset Management. After leaving 
government he became a director of N.M. Rothschild 1993-1995.(14) 

Eddie George was Governor of the Bank of England from 1993-2003. After 
retirement, he joined the Rothschild group and sits on the board of Rothschild 
Continuation Holdings A.G., the Bank for International Settlements, Switzerland, 
and N. M. Rothschild . (15) 

44 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


A Western money monopoly was well established by the beginning of the 
twentieth century but still remains hidden today. The money monopoly is 
dynastic and transcends national borders enabling the Anglo-European-American 
elite to transfer all the world's wealth into their hands and to create a global 
government under their control - a new Dark Age of global feudalism or global 
fascism. Since the late 1980s, the sale of the world's resources and industries to 
the international bankers has accelerated. Now all that remains is to strip 
Westerners of what remains of their property and the vision of John D. 
Rockefeller's General Education Board will be fulfilled: 

In our dreams we have limitless resources, and the people yield themselves 
with perfect docility to our molding hands... 
- Fred Gates, "Occasional Paper No. 1", 1904, General Education Board 

So, remembering the question put to Tony Blair of whether or not someone 
can become too rich, the second section of this book examines 'the art of killing 

Chapter 6 End Notes 

1. Larry Elliott and Jill Treanor, A whole world sold on sell-offs, The Guardian, London, 22 
Nov. 2000. See, 2763,401 129, OO.html 

2. Timeline: outsourcing and the public sector, The Guardian. 
outsourcing /story/0, 13230,933819, OO.html 

3. Chief Secretary to the Treasury, Rt Hon Paul Boateng MP, 11 June 2003, Completed 
Projects, PPP Forum website. See 

4. Frequently Asked Questions, Ibid.. 

5. Stefan Armbruster, Revenue sell-off to tax haven firm, BBC, London, 23 Sept. 2002. 

6. PPP websites: Canada 
Netherlands Ireland 

7. Erika Hobbs, Low Rates, Needed Repairs Lure 'Big Water' to Uncle Sam's Plumbing, 
The Water Barons, a report for The Center for Public Integrity. 

See http://www.icii.oro/water/report.aspx?sid=ch&.rid = 54&aid = 54 

8. Public Private Partnership, United Nations Economic Commission for Europe website, 
Introduction. See 

9. Joan M. Veon, synopsis of Prince Charles the Sustainable Prince. 

45 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

10. The International Business Leaders Forum website, members section. See 

11. N.M. Rothschild website, Timeline 

12. Andrew Clark and David Hencke, Master fixer who ended up in a fix, The Guardian, 

30 January 2002, 11337, 64 1545, 00 .htm I 

13. Oliver Letwin, Political Profile, BBC News Online people/newsid 1179000/11 79357 .stm 

14. Lord Lamont of Lerwick, Benador Associates 

15. Nestle, CorporateWatch supermarkets/nestle/nestle3.html 

46 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Part 2 

The Art of Killing Quietly 

47 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 7 



The standard of living of the average American has to decline... 
- Paul Volcker, Chairman of The Federal Reserve, New York Times, 18 October 
1979, p.l, Volcker Asserts U.S Must Trim Living Standard. 

'Money is power'. Well, to be precise, it's the gap between the rich and poor 
that counts. The objective of the elite is to maintain the capitalist structure as it 
is with one vital difference. There will be no middle class in the New World Order. 
Under public-private partnership, the middle class, free markets, and consumer 
choice will be replaced with a neo-feudal society in which the Money Trust 
dictates to an impoverished populace through a supranational technocracy. This 
is international socialism, run for the benefit of the financial elite who own the 
economy and control the emerging continental Politburos. The polite name for it 
is 'The Third Way', but less deferential commentators call it 'corporate fascism'. 
The corporations need government to restrict consumer choice in the market 
place, allowing the cartel to determine what we can buy, sell, or even do in our 
own homes. The 'Third Way' is the path to Utopia for our self-appointed 
philosopher kings, advocated by the likes of Bill Clinton, Tony Blair, and Gerhard 
Schroder - their senior political puppets. There is no difference between 
ostensibly right and left wing political parties about the eventual destination, 
even if they appear to be travelling at different speeds towards it. 

Real power, then, is achieved when the ruling class controls the material 
essentials of life, granting and withholding them as if they were privileges, as 
George Orwell reflected: 

From the moment when the machine first made its appearance it was clear to 
all thinking people that the need for human drudgery, and therefore to a great 
extent for human inequality, had disappeared. If the machine were used 
deliberately for that end, hunger, overwork, dirt, illiteracy, and disease could be 
eliminated within a few generations But it was also clear that an all-around 
increase in wealth threatened the destruction... of a hierarchical society. In a 
world in which everyone worked short hours, had enough to eat, lived in a house 
with a bathroom and a refrigerator, and possessed a motorcar or even an 
airplane, the most obvious and perhaps the most important form of inequality 
would already have disappeared. If it once became general, wealth would confer 
no distinction. Such a society could not long remain stable. For if leisure and 
security were enjoyed by all alike, the great mass of human beings who are 
normally stupefied by poverty would become literate and would learn to think for 
themselves; and when once they had done this, they would sooner or later 
realize that the privileged minority had no function, and they would sweep it 
away. In the long run, a hierarchical society was only possible on a basis of 
poverty and ignorance... It is deliberate policy to keep even the favoured groups 
somewhere near the brink of hardship because a general state of scarcity 
increases the importance of small privileges and thus magnifies the distinction 

48 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

between one group and another... The social atmosphere is that of a besieged 
city, where the possession of a lump of horseflesh makes the difference between 
wealth and poverty. 

The difference between riches and poverty is often the difference between 
pleasure and pain. Orwell concluded this idea in the torture episode at the end of 

How does one man assert his power over another, Winston?' By making him 
suffer. Obedience is not enough. Unless he is suffering, how can you be sure that 
he is obeying your will and not his own? Power is in inflicting pain and 
humiliation... Progress in our world will be progress towards more pain.(i) 

In The Creature from Jekyll Island, G. Edward Griffin discusses the 
relationship between 1984 and The Report From Iron Mountain: On the 
Possibility and Desirability of Peace by Leonard Lewin. It has never been 
established whether or not this report published in 1966 was written by a U.S. 
government think tank or if it was an elaborate political satire. On 26 
November, 1967, the report was reviewed in the book section of the Washington 
Post by Herschel McLandress, which was the pen name for Harvard professor 
John Kenneth Galbraith. Galbraith, who also had been a member of the Council 
on Foreign Relations, said that he knew firsthand of the report's authenticity 
because he had been invited to participate in it. Although he was unable to be 
part of the official group, he was consulted from time to time and had been 
asked to keep the project a secret. Furthermore, while he doubted the wisdom of 
letting the public know about the report, he agreed totally with its conclusions. 
For the purposes of Griffin's comparison, it makes no difference whether it is a 
satire. The report credits Orwell for many of its ideas and it is a blueprint for 
what has occurred since. Importantly, it agreed with Orwell's view that poverty is 
a prerequisite for a hierarchical society: 

The continuance of the war system must be assured, if for no other reason, 
among others, than to preserve whatever quality and degree of poverty a society 
requires as an incentive, as well as to maintain the stability of its internal 
organization of power. 

The economic destruction of the world's middle class is well advanced. 
Personal debt, bankruptcies, and unemployment are soaring while investments 
are destroyed in the stock-market and incomes decline. Like Manchurian 
Candidates, the Western middle class have played their essential part in creating 
the techno-bureaucracy of the new feudalism which will enslave them. This 
chapter describes seven significant methods being used to reduce living 
standards around the world. These are: 1. money supply and taxation; 2. free 
trade; 3. free movement of labour; 4. environmentalism; 5. wars; 6. the criminal 
justice system; and 7. disease. 


Stock cultivates land; stock employs labour. A tax which tended to drive 
away stock from any particular country, would so far tend to dry up every source 
of revenue, both to the sovereign and to the society. 

49 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

- Adam Smith, The Wealth of Nations 


In 1900 the combined national and local tax burden in the U.S. was a mere 
5.7% of income. By year 2000 it reached an all time high of 33%. (2) The U.K.'s 
tax burden has grown from 8.5 % of GDP in 1900 to 31% in 1963 and to a peak 
of 39% in 1982. It is now around 38%.(3)(4)The E.U.'s tax burden now averages 
40. 5%. (5) 

The burden of taxation on middle income bracket families has grown in line 
with the overall increase. In 1958 the median two-earner American family 
($68,605) paid 17.9% of its income in taxes. In 1998 that percentage was 37.6 
% in 1998. In year 2000, taxes claimed a greater share of the median two- 
income family's income (39.0 percent) than food (8.9 percent), clothing (3.9 
percent), housing (15.9 percent), and transportation (6.9 percent), combined. (6) 
The U.S now has the same household taxation levels as Britain reached at the 
end of the 1970s and where they remain today: between 35 and 40% of 
household income. (7) 


One of the most confounding economic trends in the United States during the 
past 20 years has been the relative stagnation of workers' real wages. One of the 
primary reasons for flat wages is that taxes and other government mandates on 
employers have been expanding steadily, crowding out worker take-home pay. 
Combined Federal Income taxes and payroll taxes increase the average cost of 
employing a manufacturing worker by 28%. (8) 

In Europe the situation is even worse, but due to the rigidity of the labour 
market it has caused high unemployment rather than driving wages down. In 
1970, the tax-to-GDP ratio of the E.U. was similar to America but then it grew by 
8 percentage points largely due to an expansion of the welfare state. The tax 
hike was largely imposed upon labour. The average effective tax rate on labour is 
about 10 percentage points higher in Europe than in the U.S. with the exception 
of the U.K, Ireland and Portugal whose rates are similar. The average effective 
tax rate imposed on labour in 1997 reached 38% compared to 24% in the U.S. 
This largely accounts for the high unemployment rate. (9) 


Inflation is another form of taxation. It is an indirect tax therefore it falls as 
heavily on the poor as it does on the rich. In the early stages of inflation, the 
business class actually benefits from the easy credit. The government causes 
inflation by going into debt therefore is one of the major collectors of this tax. As 
described at the beginning of this book, the central bank prints money for the 
government to borrow. As John Maynard Keynes explained: 

Lenin is said to have declared that the best way to destroy the capitalist 
system was to debauch the currency. By a continuing process of inflation, 
governments can confiscate, secretly and unobserved, an important part of the 
wealth of their citizens. By this method they not only confiscate, but they 
confiscate arbitrarily; and, while the process impoverishes many, it actually 
enriches some... The process engages all the hidden forces of economic law on 

50 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

the side of destruction, and does it in a manner which not one man in a million is 
able to diagnose. 
- John Maynard Keynes, The Economic Consequences of the Peace, 1919, Ch. 6 

Alan Greenspan elaborates: 

Stripped of its academic jargon, the welfare state is nothing more than a 
mechanism by which governments confiscate the wealth of the productive 
members of a society to support a wide variety of welfare schemes. A substantial 
part of the confiscation is effected by taxation. But the welfare statists were 
quick to recognize that if they wished to retain political power, the amount of 
taxation had to be limited and they had to resort to programs of massive deficit 
spending, i.e., they had to borrow money, by issuing government bonds, to 
finance welfare expenditures on a large scale... The abandonment of the gold 
standard made it possible for the welfare statists to use the banking system as a 
means to an unlimited expansion of credit.... As the supply of money (of claims) 
increases relative to the supply of tangible assets in the economy, prices must 
eventually rise. Thus the earnings saved by the productive members of the 
society lose value in terms of goods. When the economy's books are finally 
balanced, one finds that loss in value represents the goods purchased by the 
government for welfare or other purposes with the money proceeds of the 
government bonds financed by bank credit expansion. 
- Alan Greenspan, Gold and Economic Freedom, The Objectivist, July 1966 (10) 

This new money can be expanded up to ten times when it passes through 
commercial banks therefore their private borrowers are also tax collectors as 
Congressman Ron Paul suggests: 

An astute stock investor or home builder can make millions in the boom 
phase of the business cycle, while the poor and those dependent on fixed 
incomes can't keep up with the rising cost of living. (ii) 

The inflationary effect of lending is exacerbated when borrowers get into 
trouble and the debts are "rolled over", "re-scheduled" and eventually "bailed 
out". A non-performing loan causes inflation because the freshly printed money 
injected into the economy via the borrowing corporations and individuals has not 
been accompanied by a sufficient increase in production to keep up repayments. 
There have been some major corporate bailouts in the U.S. amounting to billions 
of dollars: Penn Central railroad and Lockheed in 1970, Commonwealth Bank of 
Detroit 1972, New York City 1975, Chrysler 1978, First Pennsylvania Bank of 
Philadelphia 1979 and Chicago's Continental Illinois in 1982. All of these were 
saved from bankruptcy by Congress acting as lender of last with the guarantee of 
freshly printed money from the Fed. This is inflationary not just in the final stage 
where money is sourced from the Fed but in the first, second and all the other 
intermediary stages on the way to default. (12) 

The main event in the bail-out Super Bowl has not been played at home. It's 
the game between Third World governments and the IMF/World Bank. All of 
these non-performing loans to foreign governments cause domestic inflation 
when the new money eventually returns to our shores in exchange for our 
products and services. Loans to most Third World governments started to fail by 
1982. By 1983 third world governments owed $300 billion to banks and $400 
billion to western governments. (13) 

In preparation for the bail-out phase of the international lending Super Bowl, 

51 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

the U.S. central bank was brought onto the field in 1980, when Congress passed 
the Monetary Control Act authorizing the Fed to print money for foreign 
governments. (14) Since then, the size of bailout packages has become mind- 

Mexico is just one example of the IMF/World Bank Third World bailout system. 
In 1982 it owed $85 billion to the banks, an inflationary loss to the American 
taxpayer which is being sustained to this day by central banks who initially made 
new loans and eventually underwrote almost the entire debt. In 1982 the IMF 
organized a $4.5 billion loan from Western central banks, and in 1989, a further 
$7.5 billion. This is the roll-over and reschedule play, whose purpose is to enable 
interest payments to continue on the original non-performing commercial loans 
and prevent them going into default and bankrupting the commercial banks. 
However the day of reckoning inevitably arrives: Mexico could no longer afford 
even the interest payments. On 31 January 1995, President Clinton, acting 
independently of Congress, authorized a $50 billion package of loan guarantees: 
$20 billion from the U.S Exchange Stabilization Fund, $17.8 billion from the IMF, 
$10 billion from the Bank of International Settlements and $3 billion from 
commercial banks. (15) 

Joseph Stiglitz declared one of the functions of the central bank / 
IMF/WorldBank to be a banker's welfare system. In relation to the $95 billion 
bailout package during the 1997 Asian crisis: 

The money served another function: it enabled the countries to provide 
dollars to the firms that had borrowed from western bankers to repay the loans. 
It was thus, in part, a bailout to the international banks as much as it was to the 
country. (16) 

Whilst the commercial banks profit from the interest rates, which are often 
vastly inflated for debtor governments, the Western taxpayer pays off the loans 
through inflation at home. This system is designed to go on forever, draining the 
West of its wealth in order to build socialist dictatorships abroad and enrich the 
banking elite. The total foreign debt of low and middle income countries rose 
from $1.4 trillion in 1990 to $2.3 trillion in 2001. (17) 

To summarize inflation : There are three bands of thieves who work as a 
cartel. The central banks acting as lender of last resort have enabled the 
commercial banks and the government to expand the money supply at our cost 
by increasing government deficit spending, sustaining non-performing loans and 
bailing out major corporate failures. Since 1971 when Nixon destroyed the last 
remnants of the Gold Standard, the U.S. national debt has increased from $408 
billion to $6.8 trillion, a 1600% increase. In 1971, M3 money supply was $776 
billion; today it stands at $8.9 trillion, a 1100% increase. During that time the 
dollar has lost almost 80% of its purchasing power. (18) In addition to all the other 
state and federal taxes, the hapless taxpayer has paid another 5% per year in 
inflation. (19) 

A 1999 UK Parliamentary report shows that inflation in Britain accelerated 
after WWII. The pre-war annual inflation rate was about 2.5% and the post -war 
rate averaged 6%. Over the whole century, the Pound lost 98.5% of its 
purchasing power. (20) It is no coincidence that during this period the gap between 
rich and poor and the size of government has grown significantly. 


52 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

In Globalization and its Discontents, Joseph Stiglitz describes how the 
contractionary policies of the IMF exacerbated the 1997 east Asia crisis. In any 
economic downturn, there is a standard government response: stimulate demand 
by either cutting taxes, increase expenditures, or loosen monetary policy. The 
IMF pushed exactly the opposite course. By continuing to advocate 
contractionary policies the IMF caused the contagion to spread from one country 
to the next as exports decreased. The IMF monetary remedy was to impose 
interest rate hikes of more than 25%, throwing fuel onto the fire.(2i) This had the 
effect of driving even more capital out of the country as it pushed companies 
towards bankruptcy. Furthermore it imposed restructuring in the banking sector 
which closed down any banks with significant non-performing loans. In 
Indonesia, sixteen private banks were closed which caused a run on the 
remaining private banks and a retreat of capital to the state run banks. The 
effect on the Indonesian banking system and the economy was disastrous. (22) 
Riots followed when welfare, especially food and fuel subsidies for the poor, were 
cut back. Businessmen and their families were targeted. This exacerbated the 
retreat of capital out of the country since riots do not restore business 

According to Greg palast's interviews with Stiglitz, "IMF riots" were virtually 
written into the 111 conditionalities formulated at the end of the 1980s. One of 
the IMF condionalities on Ecuador was to raise the price of cooking gas by 80% 
at the same time as they were cutting back pensions and laying off government 
workers. Poor Andean Indians came down from the hills and set fire to cars in the 
capital bringing troops onto the streets. (23) In Argentina, when the banks put 
their interest rates up to 21-70%, the government had to change the law against 
loan-sharking because the banks would have been in breach of it. 

Stiglitz laments that deepening a recession not only causes more pain today 
but also more pain tomorrow. An economy which has a deep recession may grow 
faster as it recovers, but it never makes up for lost time. The deeper today's 
recession, the lower income is likely to be twenty years from now. (24) 

The IMF was not the first to use fiscal tightening as a weapon of economic 
warfare. In 1920-21, America went through an agricultural depression. This was 
caused solely by the monetary policy of the Government and Federal Reserve. 
The farmers had borrowed large amounts of money to buy land at the instance of 
the government. They had become very prosperous. However, with an eye on 
closing down the smaller banks in the South West, the Wall St. controlled Fed 
decided to drastically cut credit in May 1920. Unable to keep up repayments, 
thousands of farmers were bankrupted and brought down their local banks with 
them. G. Edward Griffin describes this episode as "Country-Duck Dinner in New 
York. "(25) However, this was just the starter before the main course. At the 
behest of the Wall St. Money Trust, the Open Market Committee was formed in 
1922, to coordinate the purchase of Treasury bonds by the twelve regional 
Reserve banks. From 1923 onwards low interest rates caused new money to 
flood into the economy causing a massive speculative boom on the stock market. 
By 1929, half of retail transactions were on credit. (26) On 9 August 1929, the Fed 
started selling Treasury bonds in the open market and reversed its easy credit 
policy. It raised interest rates on loans to commercial banks to 6% and the 
money supply rapidly contracted; speculators who had borrowed money to 
purchase shares could no longer keep up repayments to their brokers. The pin 
had been inserted. On 29 October 1929, an avalanche of selling on Wall Street 

53 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

wiped out millions of investors. The bankers and their preferred clients had exited 
the market long before only to re-enter at rock bottom and devour stock like 
sharks in a feeding frenzy. Some of the greatest fortunes in America were made 
in this fashion. 

Today, consumers in the U.K. and U.S. hold record levels of debt. These 
extreme debt ratios make us very vulnerable to the manoeuvres used in the 
past. Figures from the U.K. Office for National Statistics showed that consumers 
now owed an average of £5,330 ( about $8500) in unsecured debt, which 
excludes mortgages. (27) 


Fiscal and monetary policy has been used by the bankers to redistribute 
wealth to themselves and the corporations they control as well as to national 
governments. Whilst taxation policy is overt, a hidden transfer of wealth is 
achieved by monetary policy- the public endure inflation whilst the debtor 
governments grow in size and the bankers grow rich collecting interest on the 
loans that cause it. The fleecing of the Western taxpayer accelerated during the 
post-War period, with the creation of the IMF/World bank. 



On 1 January 1995, The World Trade Organization replaced The Global 
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) which had regulated global trade tariffs 
since 1947.(28) Three months before, Sir James Goldsmith, a British 
billionaire,gave a speech to the U.S. senate in which he warned about the effect 
global free trade would have on Western employment and wage levels. (29) 
Goldsmith argued that GATT and the theories on which it is based were flawed. If 
implemented, it would impoverish and destabilize the industrialized world while at 
the same time cruelly ravaging the third world. The principle of global free trade 
is that anything can be manufactured anywhere in the world to be sold anywhere 
else. That means that these new entrants into the world economy are in direct 
competition with the workforces of developed countries. In most developed 
countries, the cost to an average manufacturing company of paying its workforce 
is an amount equal to between 25 percent and 30 per cent of sales. If such a 
company decides to maintain in its home country only its head office and sales 
force, while transferring its production to a low-cost area, it will save about 20 
percent of sales volume. For every French employee, a company could have 
recruited 47 Vietnamese. Many economists believe that the growth in service 
industries will compensate for lost jobs in manufacturing. However even service 
industries will be subjected to substantial transfers of employment to low-cost 

On the other hand, the real cost to consumers of cheaper goods will be that 
they will lose their jobs, get paid less for their work and have to face higher taxes 
to cover the social cost of increased unemployment. According to figures 
published by the U.S. Department of Labor, since 1973 real hourly and weekly 
earnings, in inflation-adjusted dollars, have already dropped respectively by 13.4 

54 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

per cent and 19.2 per cent, and that was before the 1995 GATT negotiations 
known as the Uruguay Round. If 4 billion people enter the same world market for 
labour and offer their work at a fraction of the price paid to people in the 
developed world, it is obvious that such a massive increase in supply will reduce 
the value of labour. Organized labour will lose practically all its negotiating power. 

Regional free trade zones should only be established between countries with 
similar levels of economic development. The 1957 Treaty of Rome between 
France, Germany, Italy, Belgium, the Netherlands and Luxembourg created the 
European Economic Community, the largest free market in the world. Within the 
EEC, there would be no tariffs, no barriers, and a free and competitive market. 
Trade with nations outside the EEC would be subject to a single tariff. This 
concept was known as community preference. In other words, priority would be 
given to European jobs and industry. About twenty years ago, quietly, the 
technocrats who run Europe started to alter this fundamental principle and move 
progressively towards international free trade. Ever since, unemployment in 
Europe has swollen despite growth in GNP. The 1992 Treaty of Maastricht 
enshrines this change and makes global free trade one of the fundamental 
principles on which the new Europe is to be built. 

Regarding the economic success of Hong Kong, South Korea and Taiwan, 
special economic concessions granted by the West combined with their cheap 
and skilled labour made them successful. Over the past thirty years the balance 
of trade between these countries and the West has resulted in a transfer of tens 
of billions of dollars to them. However, a balance of trade in monetary terms can 
disguise huge job losses because, as Mr Goldsmith noted, he could employ 47 
Vietnamese for the price of one Frenchman. 


The U.S. has lost millions of manufacturing jobs due to a growing trade deficit 
over the past three decades. This trend accelerated when The North Atlantic Free 
Trade Agreement (NAFTA) was signed by the U.S., Canada and Mexico, designed 
to remove tariff barriers over a fifteen year period. NAFTA eliminated 766,030 
actual and potential U.S. jobs between 1994 and 2000 because of the rapid 
growth in the net U.S. export deficit with Mexico and Canada. The majority of the 
job losses were in the manufacturing sector so workers who found jobs in the 
service sector are paid on average 23% less. Almost all new American jobs being 
created are in this sector and wages in the manufacturing sector are kept down 
due to the threat of job relocation overseas. The growth in U.S. trade and trade 
deficits has put downward pressure on the wages of "unskilled" (i.e., non- 
college-educated) workers in the U.S., especially those with no more than a high 
school degree. This group represents 72.7% of the total U.S. workforce and 
includes most middle and low wage workers. A large body of economic research 
has concluded that trade is responsible for at least 15-25% of the growth in 
wage inequality in the U.S. (U.S. Trade Deficit Review Commission 2000, 110- 
18).(30)(3i) In some areas of the U.S. the loss of manufacturing jobsto Mexico has 
caused disturbing levels of poverty. Since George Bush won Ohio in the 2000 
presidential elections, the state has lost one in six of its manufacturing jobs. A 
string of local factories have relocated to Mexico in the last two years. Two 
million of the state's 11 million population resorted to food charities in 2002, an 
increase of more than 18% from 2001.(32) 

55 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


A study by Forrester Research predicts that U.S. companies will transfer 3.3 
million service jobs overseas by 2015, compared with just 102,000 jobs shifted in 
2000. The job exports are predominantly in the areas of information technology 
(including software and product development), customer service, back-office 
accounting and sales. (33) On 10 August 2003, USA Today warned that white 
collar workers are going to experience the devastating job losses that occurred in 
manufacturing in the previous thirty years. Almost any professional job that can 
be done long distance is suddenly up for grabs. Jobs done by financial analysts, 
architectural drafters, telemarketers, accountants, claims adjusters, home loan 
processors and others at higher levels of the labour food chain are being farmed 
out to workers in other countries. "We're not just talking about call-center jobs, 
but all kinds of jobs," says Deloitte Consulting analyst Christopher Gentle. "It 
doesn't leave any part of the corporation untouched." Major U.S. companies, 
including such giants as IBM, Microsoft and Procter & Gamble, are leading the 
pack. Tens of thousands of jobs already have been shipped out, and analysts 
project that millions more will go -- just as the fragile economy attempts a 
rebound. "We see it as a threat to America's middle-class work force, in terms of 
wages and benefits," says Marcus Courtney, president of Washington Alliance of 
Technology Workers in Seattle. "The service sector is not immune to the forces of 
globalization. We're talking about highly skilled, best-paying jobs. It's raising the 
concern of workers. "(34) 

In the U.K., HSBC Bank just announced that it is shipping 4000 back office 
jobs from the U.K. to Asia. By 2006, that will have increased to 7000, 13% of its 
current U.K. workforce. (35) 


Whilst free-trade allows capital to travel to developing countries in search of 
cheap labour, lax immigration controls have allowed cheap labour to travel to the 
West in search of capital. 

The immigrant population in the United States has increased to 33 million, a 
five percent increase in the last two years. The new Census Bureau data show 
that immigrants account for 11.8 percent of the U.S. population. In California 
27% of the population are foreign born. The immigrant population in the U.S. is 
now larger than the entire population of Canada. (36) 9 million Mexicans make up 
30% of these foreign born residents. Over a third of them are illegals. (37) 


Throughout the economic boom of the 90s, when the unemployment rate got 
as low as 3.9 percent, economists marveled at the U.S. economy's ability to grow 
jobs without sparking wage-led inflation. Many speculated that the waves of low- 
paid immigrants had created a "safety valve," keeping average wages low 
enough for the economy to grow without an increase in prices. An article in the 
Labor Department's "Monthly Labor Review" has laid out just how important 
those foreign-born workers were for the U.S economy: foreign-born workers 
earned about 75.6 cents for every dollar earned by the native born in 2000.(38) 

56 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Economic theory suggests that immigration that is complementary to the native 
workforce can boost wages all round. The most extreme example is Middle East 
countries that have oil but no oil expertise, so importing oil industry workers from 
the West makes the locals rich. In contrast, substitute workers are likely to 
reduce the wages of those they compete with in the labour market while boosting 
the profits of the owners of capital. However, the lower cost of production 
associated with cheaper labour makes goods cheaper and keeps wage inflation 
down. George Borjas, professor of political economy at Harvard University, an 
authority on the economics of migration, is sceptical of claims that immigration 
boosts wages when it goes beyond meeting skills shortages. "I find very sizeable 
negative effects of immigration on wages," he says. "The numerical effect is 
strong and the statistical significance is strong. It will turn the economics of 
migration on its head. "(39) 

The National Academy of Sciences estimates that approximately 44 percent of 
wage depression among low-skilled Americans ( 70% of workforce) during 1980- 
1994 was due to immigration. Also an estimated 1,880,000 American workers 
are displaced from their jobs every year by immigration. (40)(4i) 

The American food and agriculture system has become dependent on foreign- 
born workers, a substantial number of whom are illegals. Until 15 or 20 years 
ago, meatpacking plants in the United States were staffed by highly paid, 
unionized employees who earned about $18 an hour, adjusted for inflation. 
Today, the processing and packing plants are largely staffed by low-paid non- 
union workers from Mexico and Guatemala. Many of them start at $6 an hour. A 
few years ago, the Immigration and Naturalization Service estimated that about 
25 percent of meatpacking workers in the Midwest were probably illegals. (42) A 
government study estimated that nearly 40 percent of farm labourers are illegals. 


Immigration has also suppressed wages of white collar workers because U.S 
immigration has granted huge numbers of working visas. More than 100,000 
American computer programmers are unemployed but when those who are 
underemployed or working in other jobs because they cannot find programming 
jobs, the total grows to about half a million. At the same time, more than 
450,000 H-1B visa workers are employed as programmers in the United States. 


IT. companies are subcontracting thousands of jobs to outsourcing 
companies such as Tata, Infosys Technologies, and Wipro Technologies, the 
three largest Indian software servicing companies, who can provide Indian 
employees who will work for a third of the wages. (44) Furthermore a 2001 
National Research Council report found that H-lBs have an adverse impact on 
overall wage levels. The Independent Computer Consultants Association reports 
that the use of cheaper foreign labour has forced down the hourly rates of U.S. 
consultants by as much as 10 to 40 percent. (45) 


None of this has come about by chance: Since 1986, Congress has passed 7 
amnesties for illegal aliens. The 1986 Immigration Reform and Control Act (IRCA) 
gave amnesty - legal forgiveness - to all illegal aliens who had successfully 

57 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

evaded justice for four years or more or were illegally working in agriculture. As a 
result, 2.8 million illegal aliens were admitted as legal immigrants to the United 
States. Amnesties to date total 3,356,021.(46) Cheered on by editorials in the The 
Wall St Journal, .(47) President of Mexico Vincente Fox, is currently negotiating a 
blanket amnesty of millions of Mexican workers. (48) Republicans and Democrats 
are proposing different pieces of legislation which, if all passed, would give 
amnesty to all 8-11 million illegals. This is one of many steps being taken to 
merge Mexico and the U.S. as a prelude to a Pan-American Union from Alaska to 
Chile. (49) 


Research indicates that, on current trends, we can now expect a net inflow of 
at least 2 million non E.U. citizens per decade. (50) Total net Immigration from 
outside the E.U. has more than trebled in the past five years and is still rising. 
Each year nearly a quarter of a million people come to live in Britain. (5i) 

However this is nothing compared to the problem looming from the newly 
enlarged E.U. The floodgates for cheap labour opened on 1st May 2004 when 10 
former Eastern Bloc countries join the E.U. making their 73 million citizens 
eligible to work anywhere within the EEA. Created in 1992 The European 
Economic Area (EEA) consists of the 15 member states of the European Union 
(EU) plus Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein. There is free movement of people, 
goods and services within the area. So long as nationals of the countries are 
exercising their freedoms under these the various treaties, they are not strictly 
subject to immigration control, and may work or set up in business without 
restriction. These rights extend also to members of the households of EEA 
nationals accompanying them to the U.K.. 13 countries have applied to become 
new members: 10 of these countries -Cyprus, the Czech Republic, Estonia, 
Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Malta, Poland, the Slovak Republic, and Slovenia 
joined on 1st May 2004. They are currently known by the term "acceding 
countries". Bulgaria and Romania hope to do so by 2007, and Turkey is currently 
negotiating its membership. (52) 

The E.U. estimates that around 335,000 people will migrate each year from 
Eastern Europe after the barriers to free movement come down, including 
100,000 workers. This may be a deliberate understatement of the tidal wave of 
cheap labour which is about to demolish wage levels in Western Europe. (53) 

Another revolution is quietly taking place in another aspect of immigration 
aimed directly at the middle class. The Government has been clamping down on 
illegal immigration but massively expanding legal migration for skilled workers, 
most noticeably through expanding the work permit scheme to about 200,000 
people this year. David Blunkett, the Home Secretary, has said he is proud to 
have produced the largest work permit programme of any country. These 
workers will be able to bring their families and, on past form, most will be 
accepted for settlement after 4-5 years if they so wish. This massive expansion 
of the work permit scheme therefore represents a major new avenue of 
immigration. The Government has also set up the Highly Skilled Migrant 
Programme, which has so far brought in 3,000 of the of the world's brightest and 
best. The scheme makes it easier for foreign students to carry on working in the 
U.K. after their course finishes. No doubt many will come from poor countries 
and will accept significantly lower salaries than native workers. (54)(55) 

The effect of immigration policy on the labour market is the same as in the 

58 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

U.S.. While the highly skilled in London enjoy wages up to 80 per cent higher 
than the national average, a recent report by Incomes Data Services showed that 
shelf-fillers in London suffer wages 10 per cent below the national average. 
Immigration has pushed unemployment 2 per cent higher than it would 
otherwise be. National unemployment has been at just over 5 per cent for two 
years now, and in London, where most immigrants live, unemployment is the 
second highest in the UK at 6.6 per cent. (56) Britain's top labour economist, 
Professor Richard Layard of London School of Economics, who helped to design 
Labour's welfare to work programme, stated in a letter to the Financial Times: 

There is a huge amount of evidence that any increase in the number of 
unskilled workers lowers unskilled wages and increases the unskilled 
unemployment rate. If we are concerned about fairness, we ought not to ignore 
these facts. Employers gain from unskilled immigration. But the unskilled do not. 



The elite have promoted free trade and open borders with full knowledge of 
their destructive consequences. Poor workers are glad to work for higher wages 
either by migrating to the West or by working in the new steel factory at home. 
This analysis has not addressed their plight, which is already well documented, 
but has shown the serious damage to employment and wage levels in the West. 



The purpose of the study was to analyze methods by which a government can 
perpetuate itself in power. The authors concluded that, in the past, war has been 
the only reliable means to achieve that goal. Under world government, however, 
war would be impossible so the challenge was to find other methods for 
controlling populations and keeping them loyal to their leaders. It concluded that 
a suitable substitute for war would require a new enemy which posed a frightful 
threat to survival. Neither the threat nor the enemy had to be real, they merely 
had to be believable. Several surrogates for war were considered, including a 
staged space-alien invasion, but the only one holding real promise was the 
environmental pollution model. This was viewed as the most likely to succeed 
because firstly, it could be related to observable conditions such as smog and 
water pollution - in other words, it would be based partly on fact and, therefore, 
believable. Secondly, predictions could be made showing end-of-earth scenarios 
just as horrible as atomic warfare. Accuracy in these predictions would not be 
important. Their purpose would be to frighten, not to inform. Not only does the 
environmental pollution model justify expansive and authoritarian government, it 
also requires citizens to impoverish themselves thereby widening the gap 
between leaders and followers. 

Matching the Iron Mountain brief, part of the environmental movement aims 
to reduce living standards in the West, especially in the U.S.. The questionable 
intellectual credibility for this plan was provided in the benchmark publication 
from Massachusetts Institute of Technology, The Limits To Growth, 
commissioned by The Club of Rome in 1972. The book introduced the concept 

59 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

that the environment would be irrevocably damaged if its "carrying capacity" was 
breached. On current trends it predicted total collapse of industrial civilization in 
the second half of the twenty-first century unless capital and population growth 
were severely limited. Whilst polices designed to reduce consumption under the 
rubric of 'sustainable development' are high on the political agenda, real 
environmental health and pollution issues are either being swept under the 
carpet or being created by the petrochemical- pharmaceutical cartel. The last 
chapter of this book proves that, actually, the elite regard human beings as 
Earth's primary contaminant. 


A few years after the Report from Iron Mountain was published in 1966, the 
environmental movement was hijacked by the banking cartel. Instead of staying 
focused on scientific study of conservation, it became a catch-all for a radical 
political agenda, now spearheaded by ex-KGB chief Mikhail Gorbachev and his 
Western banker colleague Stephen Rockefeller. (58) 

Dr Michael Coffman's fascinating article Why Property Rights Matter, details 
the high-level funding of environmentalism: 

In a dazzling display of raw power, foundations with interlocking directorates 
funded the Nature Conservancy in 1996 to the tune of $203,886,056, or 60 
percent of its annual revenue. Initially the foundations banded together under 
the name Environmental Grantmakers Affinity Group of the Council on 
Foundations. Under the umbrella of Rockefeller Family Fund 136 foundations 
formed the Environmental Grantmakers Association (EGA) in 1987 which has 
grown to over 200 by the end of the twentieth century. Congressman Richard 
Pombo (R-CA) claimed in 1999 that there are "3,400 full time employees, 
including leaders who often make $150,000 or more, as well as a small army of 
outside contractors such as scientists, lobbyists, lawyers, and public affairs 
specialists" in Washington DC. Citing a 1999 Boston Globe article, Congressman 
Pombo said: ..."foundations invest at least $400 million a year in environmental 
advocacy and research. The largest environmental grant-maker, Pew Charitable 

Trusts, gives more than $35 million annually to environmental groups " When 

the additional 2,300 foundations that donate to environmental activism are 
considered, plus the billion dollars or so contracted to environmental 
organizations by various agencies of the federal government, the Boston Globe 
[ newspaper] estimates the total funding for environmental activism to be 
around four billion dollars annually!". (59) 

Substantial financing and leadership of the United Nations came directly from 
the corporate elite as well as from national governments. In 1946 John D. 
Rockefeller Jr. brought the U.N. to America by gifting $8 million for the purchase 
of the land for the U.N. building in New York. Canadian multi-billionaire and 
Rockefeller associate, Maurice Strong, was the first Director of the U.N. 
Environmental Program (UNEP) created after The Stockholm Conference, ('Earth 
Summit 1') in 1972. Mr Strong was secretary general of all three Earth Summits 
1972, 1992, and 1997. He initiated The Earth Charter Project in 1994, the 'Ten 
Commandments' of sustainable development. Gorbachev was co-chair of The 
Earth Charter Commission and Stephen Rockefeller was Chair of the drafting 
committee. The ceremony to launch the Earth Charter initiative in May 2000, 
involved the presentation of the document to regular Bilderberg attendee, Her 
Majesty Queen Beatrix of The Netherlands. This illustrates how top-down the 

60 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

environmental movement is, despite its significant grass-roots support. (60) 
The Earth Charter developed an earlier Rockefeller initiative, the 1972 
Rockefeller Brothers Fund report entitled Use of Land: A Citizen's Policy Guide to 
Urban Growth. This was a bench-mark publication on subjecting property rights 
to government censure. (6i) Ted Turner is another multi-billionaire 
environmentalist. In September 1997 he set up The United Nations Foundation to 
distribute funds to U.N programmes with a gift of (U.S.) $1 billion. (62) Former 
Nazi SS officer and I.G. Farben employee, Prince Bernhard of The Netherlands 
was one of the founders of The World Wildlife Fund in 1961.(63) Britain's Prince 
Philip was the first President of the World Wildlife Fund UK (WWF) from its 
formation in 1961 to 1982, and International President of WWF (later the World 
Wide Fund for Nature) from 1981 to 1996. Since 1985, World Wildlife Fund has 
invested over 1.5 billion dollars in 11,000 projects in 130 countries. (64) Prince 
Philip also founded the Alliance of Religions and Conservation in 1995.(65) Prince 
Charles set up The Prince of Wales Business Leaders Forum in 1990 to promote 
environmental issues in the business world and it now has support from 65 major 
multinational corporations. (66) 


Less than 5 percent of the U.S. is urban, but urban areas comprise 77.2 
percent of the population. The population density in the U.S. is only 77.7 people 
per square mile, compared to the U.K. which is 629.4. The reason the 
environmental lobby has been so successful in the U.S. since the 1970's is that 
the courts have generally ruled in favour of the primacy of public use when 
judging property rights. In the spirit of Rousseau, the thrust of the 1972 Use of 
Land report supported the premise that development rights of private property 
owners should be censured by the government. Environmental protection areas 
would be protected "not by purchase but through the police power of the federal 
government." The Endangered Species Act was passed the following year, a key 
weapon for restricting property rights. 

The plundering of rural America has gotten so bad that a Wall Street Journal 
editorial on 26 July 2001, called it "rural cleansing". The WSJ cites the case in 
which the federal court forced the Bureau of Reclamation to cut off irrigation 
water in April 2001 that undeniably belonged to 1400 farmers in the Klamath 
Basin Irrigation Project, a watershed straddling the California and Oregon border. 
The action turned their once lush green farmland to swirling dust reminiscent of 
the Oklahoma dust bowl days of the 1930s Great Depression. The suit began in 
1988 when two sucker fish were listed as "endangered" under the Endangered 
Species Act of 1973. The coho salmon was later added as a threatened species. 
Citing the U.S. Endangered Species Act, Oregon District Judge Ann Aiken ruled in 
Federal Court on April 6, 2001, to give all the water to the endangered species. 
The decision was the result of a lawsuit brought by the Oregon Natural Resources 
Council (ONRC).(67) 

The WSJ claimed , "The goal of many environmental groups - from the Sierra 
Club to the...ONRC - is no longer to protect nature. It is to expunge humans from 
the countryside." Just as in the Klamath basin example, the WSJ determined 

The strategy of these environmental groups is almost always the same: to 
sue or lobby the government into declaring rural areas off-limits to people who 

61 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

live and work there. The tools for doing this are the Endangered Species Act and 
local preservation laws, most of which are so loosely crafted as to allow a wide 
leeway in their implementation. In some cases the owners loose their property 
outright. More often the environmentalists' goal is to have restrictions placed on 
the land that either render it unusable or persuade owners to leave of their own 

Congressman Richard Pombo laments this attack on America's natural 
resource- based industries: 

Federal policies implemented as a result of environmental advocacy financed 
by private foundations are trampling on property rights. They are shutting down 
the timber industry, the mining industry and the oil and gas industry. These 
policies are creating misery in rural areas dependent on resource production. 
Small communities and families in rural areas are reeling, while environmental 
groups are collecting rewards of six figure grants from rich, private foundations. 
Why is this sort of activity subsidized by the taxpayer? 

The land grab is also being directed by the federal government. President 
Clinton used the 1906 Antiquities Act to set aside tens of millions of acres of 
federal land as national monuments preventing any commercial use. In 1998 he 
initiated the Clean Water Action Plan which withdraws thousands of miles of 
federal roads and also imposes buffer zones of natural habitat on private land 
along millions of miles of streams and rivers. (68) Following the 1968 U.N. 
Conference on Man and the Biosphere, the U.S. government instituted their own 
program called The United States Man and the Biosphere Program-U.S. MAB. 
There are currently 47 biosphere reserves and 20 World Heritage Sites in 
America, as designated by the U.N.. The counties surrounding the biosphere 
reserves/World Heritage Sites are "buffer zones." At some point there will be no 
human activity in the biospheres and the buffer zones are to protect the 
biospheres where there will be limited human activity. (69) This plan first appeared 
as part of The Wildlands Project, a grandiose design to transform 50% of the 
U.S. into a biosphere cleansed of modern industry and private property and the 
rest into buffer zones. The U.S. Senate came close to endorsing this plan in 1994 
when considering ratifying the U.N. Biodiversity Treaty. At the eleventh hour it 
was pointed out that the study on which the Treaty was based, the 1994 Global 
Biodiversity Assessment, endorsed the Wildlands Project strategy.(70) The 
Biodiversity Treaty also proposes an unaccountable U.N. Trusteeship Council to 
regulate any human activity that presents potential harm to biological diversity. 

With 1.8 million acres Ted Turner, billionaire and radical environmentalist, is 
now the largest land owner in America. According to Forbes Magazine, 

Despite his reputation as a die-hard conservationist, the cable pioneer makes 
plenty of money off his land. He sells bison meat to restaurants (including his 
own). He opened some of his New Mexico holdings to gas and coal exploration. 
Timber is harvested and sold. Hunting and fishing fees generate $5 million a 
year. "I'm doing things as natural as I can and trying to make some money at 
the same time" (71) 


The key principles of The Use of Land were adopted at the 1976 U.N. 
Conference on Human Settlements (Habitat I) held in Vancouver: 

62 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Land... cannot be treated as an ordinary asset, controlled by individuals and 
subject to the pressures and inefficiencies of the market. Private land ownership 
is also a principal instrument of accumulation and concentration of wealth and 
therefore contributes to social injustice... Public control of land use is therefore 

"Smart growth" advocates seek to preserve land in a natural or agricultural 
state by encouraging individuals to live in denser communities that take up 
smaller tracts of land per housing unit. Such communities also encourage 
residents to rely more on walking or public transit than on cars for mobility, and 
they more closely mix retail and other commercial facilities with residential units 
to foster easy access to jobs and shopping. The density of the average U.S. 
suburban area is 1-3 housing units per acre. The Sierra Club's definition of urban 
efficiency is 100 units per acre. Reaching that goal, however, would require living 
arrangements that are 2.4 times as dense as all Manhattan, twice as dense as 
central Paris, and ten times that of San Francisco. At least nineteen states have 
state growth-management laws or task forces to protect farmland and open 
space. Dozens of cities and counties have adopted urban growth boundaries to 
contain development and prevent the spread of urbanization to outlying and rural 
areas. Portland Oregon is a model for smart growth and since the 1970s it has 
had the most stringent planning laws in the U.S.. (72) The Federal Department of 
Housing and Urban Development (HUD) partially funded a 2002 report called 
Growing Smart Legislative Guidebook: Model Statutes for Planning and the 
Management of Change by the American Planning Association (APA). This report 
not only applies the smart growth principle to future land use, but also to current 
land use by introducing the idea of "amortization of non-conforming uses. " This 
will require the local government to seize property without just compensation 
where property owners fail to adjust the use of their property to fit revised 
zoning ordinances or new plans for a particular geographical area in the 
community. (73) 


One of the key concepts of the sustainable development agenda is "Factor 
10". This theory proposes exponential decrease in resource use especially in 
OECD countries which are required to reduce material consumption by 90%. (74) 
The 1994 statement of the Factor Ten Club demands and end to private 

The process of dematerialization must involve a shift in thinking toward the 
'life-cycle' approach, meaning that improvements are in no way limited to 
products, but can and will have to incorporate changes in the way products are 
produced, packaged, transported, sold, used, reused, cascaded, recycled and 
disposed of... Use-sharing, renting, leasing and borrowing are just a few 
examples of concepts which result in reduced material flows. 

It also demands increasing the cost of capital (natural resources) in relation 
to labour using taxation. (75) 

Whereas the first U.N. Habitat Conference in 1974 dealt with land use issues, 
Habitat II in June 1996 dealt with consumption issues. The underlying theme was 
that people of the world would have to pay a tax for the usage or depletion of a 

63 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

resource in addition to the service provided. Therefore, if you pay $1.00 per 
thousand cubic feet for water consumed, they are then saying that they want you 
to pay another $1.00 for the depletion of the water used. What the World Bank 
and IMF are working on is to find a formula to measure how much a person 
produces at their job and at home. From that amount they would then subtract 
out how much of the Earth's resources they use such as water, energy, food, 
material, heat, etc.. If the net figure is a plus, the person is adding back to the 
Earth's resources. If it is a negative, he is taking away from the earth's resources 
and is therefore a bad global citizen. (76) 

The conference identified Public-Private Partnership as instrumental to this 
task. The Public-Private Partnerships for the Urban Environment initiated by the 
United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) became operational in 1996, 
the year of the Habitat II conference. (77) This is the key socio-economic 
component of the global feudal state. Whilst property is transferred into the 
hands of a private ruling elite, the use of that property by the masses will be 
regulated by a large body of laws restricting consumption and consumer choice. 

As described in chapter 6, Prince Charles' Prince of Wales Business Leaders 
Forum (PWBLF) was set up in 1990 to promote Public-Private Partnership. The 
official website of PWBLF makes specific reference to key role of PPP market 
regulation in the New World Order: 

The International Business Leaders Forum is an international educational 
charity set up in 1990 to promote responsible business practices internationally 
that benefit business and society, and which help to achieve social, economic 
and environmentally sustainable development, particularly in new and emerging 
market economies. From the outset, the Forum has pursued three pathways: 

in making the case that in the new world order,[emphasis added] well-led 
and competitive businesses have a positive role to play in development 
challenges, through responsible core business practices and engagement with 

in showing that - while partnership and collective action is difficult - in the 
networked society it is essential to combine business skills and resources with 
community support and public accountability 

in demonstrating that scale can only be achieved and economic exclusion 
addressed through "enabling environments' in which governments, international 
institutions and the media play a part. (78) 

This is preparation for the strait jacket of U.N. environmental and social 
legislation being fastened onto to the global economy, its main purpose is to 
reducing living standards, restrict consumer choice, and limit property rights in 
order to empower the ruling elite. 


Whilst there are many real and serious environmental problems, man-made 
global warming is a contrived political issue. The end of earth scenarios linked to 
global warming have been successful in mobilizing public opinion in favour of 
reducing industrial activity in order to cut C02 emissions. However, an 
independent petition organized by the Oregon Institute for Science and Medicine 
signed by 17,000 independent scientists states that increased C02 levels do not 
cause deleterious changes in climate or weather; indeed they lead to increased 
plant growth. (79) 

64 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Iron Mountain style propaganda has resulted in a raft of anti-car measures 
being introduced across the developed world. Private motoring has to rank as 
one of the highest achievements in personal freedom of the twentieth century. 
Now the elite are doing everything possible to curtail that freedom. A tax on 
carbon is now one of the major proposals of advocates of global taxation(so) and 
the U.K. government has already announced plans to impose satellite vehicle 
tracking and road tolls (see chapter 12). 


The blueprint for the economic destruction of the U.S through war is the 
policy paper entitled Rebuilding America's Defenses written by the neo- 
conservative think-tank Project for the New American Century in year 2000. (8i) 
It recognizes the need to pursue an indeterminate series of wars in order to 
protect American interests. The U.S. Government has also stated that the War on 
Terror may never end. 

In 1984 George Orwell outlined the real Machiavellian purpose of war: 

The primary aim of modem warfare... is to use up the products of the 
machine without raising the general standard of living... The essential act of war 
is destruction, not necessarily of human lives, but of the products of human 
labour. War is a way of shattering to pieces, or pouring into the stratosphere, or 
sinking into the depths of the sea, materials which might otherwise be used to 
make the masses too comfortable... 

The Report From Iron Mountain repeats Orwell's conclusion: 


The production of weapons of mass destruction has always been associated 
..ith economic "waste." The term is pejorative, since it implies a failure of 
function. But no human activity can properly be considered wasteful if it achieves 
its contextual objective... In the case of military "waste," there is indeed a larger 
social utility. In advanced modern democratic societies, the war system... has 
served as the last great safeguard against the elimination of necessary social 
classes... The continuance of the war system must be assured, if for no other 
reason, among others, than to preserve whatever quality and degree of poverty 
a society requires as an incentive, as well as to maintain the stability of its 
internal organization of power. 



U.S. expenditure on prisons is currently $ 46 billion a year. The overall cost of 
crime in terms of lost productivity is in excess of $1 trillion per year. (82) Put 
another way, total loss of productivity due to crime is 10% of GDP (10.4 trillion in 
2002). Including stolen assets the figure is $1.7 trillion. This has not come about 
by chance. Increasing the crime rate has been deliberate policy of the U.S. 
government over the last two decades and drug crime has been central to it. 


The total economic cost of drug abuse and drug crime in the U.S between 

65 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

1992 and 2000 is calculated at $1.1 trillion, increasing each year from $102 
billion in 1992 to $160 billion in 2000.(83) Lost productivity accounted for 69% 
and health costs 9%. Imprisonment is the single largest cause of lost 
productivity, accounting for 30% of the total. 


In March 1998, the CIA Inspector General testified that there had existed a 
secret agreement between the CIA and the Justice Department, wherein "during 
the years 1982 to 1995, the CIA did not have to report the drug trafficking by its 
assets to the Justice Department. "(84)(85) As Michael Levine commented, "..[to]a 
trained DEA agent this literally means that the CIA had been granted a license to 
obstruct justice in our so-called war on drugs; a license that lasted, so the CIA 
claims, from 1982 to 1995." That understanding remained in effect until August 
of 1995, when Attorney General Janet Reno rescinded the agreement. The CIA 
collusion with allied drug traffickers led to the formation of a protected narcotics 
pipeline, resulting an increase in supply and drop in price. Former DEA agents 
have repeatedly pointed out that 50%-70% of the cocaine entering the U.S. went 
via drug cartels that enjoyed CIA protection. (86) 

Despite the exponential growth in spending on the alleged "drug war", illicit 
drugs are cheaper and purer than they were two decades ago, and continue to 
be readily available. Between 1981 and 1998, the price of heroin and cocaine 
dropped sharply while their levels of purity rose. 


In 2001 the Federal Bureau of Investigation's Uniform Crime Reports (UCR) 
estimated that there were 1,586,900 State and local arrests for drug abuse 
violations in the U.S. an increase of 200% from the half million in arrests 1982 
when the War on Drugs began. This accounted for 11.5% of all arrests. (87) The 
War on Drugs has resulted in the arrest, prosecution and incarceration of tens of 
thousands of persons each year for crimes associated with the sale, possession 
and use of illegal drugs. 500,000 drug offenders are in prison, 25% of a two 
million prison population. (88) 

In 1986 and 1988 Congress enacted mandatory minimum sentencing laws, 
which forced judges to deliver fixed sentences to individuals convicted of a crime, 
regardless of culpability or other mitigating factors. The most common 
mandatory sentences are for 5 and 10 years, and are based on the weight of the 
drug or the presence of a firearm. Simple possession of any quantity of powder 
cocaine by first-time offenders is considered a misdemeanor, punishable by no 
more than one year in prison but simple possession of crack cocaine results in a 
five-year mandatory sentence. (89) The average sentence for a first time, non- 
violent drug offender is longer than the average sentence for rape, child 
molestation, bank robbery or manslaughter. (90) While the intent was to punish 
high-level drug offenders, the laws have had the opposite effect-jailing low-level 
drug offenders for unusually long sentences. Enforcement agencies focus their 
efforts on those minor actors in the trade who are the most easily arrested, 
prosecuted, and penalized, rather than on the middle and high-level criminals 
who are drug dealing's true masterminds and profiteers who are able to trade 

66 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

information in return for significantly reduced prison sentences. 

Before the sentencing guideline concept took root, however, state lawmakers 
began enacting mandatory minimum penalties for drugs. This began in 1973 with 
the passage of the notorious "Rockefeller drug laws" in New York (named after 
then Gov. Nelson Rockefeller) requiring mandatory 15-year prison sentences for 
sales of small amounts of narcotics. (9i) 


By increasing rates of crime and incarceration, the U.S. Government has not 
only reduced living standards but has laid the foundations for the new coercion 
economy. The warning from past and present events is that private corporations 
can meet a substantial portion of their labour requirements through slave labour. 
There's nothing wrong with putting prisoners to work providing they are genuine 
criminals and basic human rights are upheld. However, in both Nazi Germany and 
modern day China, slave labourers were not criminals, they were enemies of the 
state or targets of genocide; they were ruthlessly abused, tortured and 
murdered. Private corporations were glad to use labour under these conditions. 
For this reason, the exponential growth of the U.S. prison population 
accompanied by a deterioration of civil liberties is cause for serious concern. Also, 
when prison labour starts to become significant, as it now is in China, that has a 
negative effect on wage and employment levels. 

The number of inmates in state and federal prisons has increased more than 
six-fold from less than 200,000 in 1970 to 1,440,655 by the end 2002. An 
additional 665,475 are held in local jails. As of 30 June 2002, the nation's prison 
and jail population exceeded 2 million for the first time in history. At the end of 
2002, 1 of every 143 Americans was incarcerated, the highest incarceration rate 
in the world. The number of persons on probation and parole has been growing 
dramatically along with institutional populations. There are now 6.7 million 
Americans incarcerated or on probation or parole, an increase of more than 265 
percent since 1980.(92) 

In the U.K. the prison population was about 45,000 in 1990. By 2009 it could 
be as high as 107,000 according to home office predictions. (93) 

The 1979 U.S. Federal Prison Industries Enhancement Certification Program 
gave private industry the green light to put state and federal prison inmates to 
work. Major companies such as Texas Instruments, Honeywell, Hewlett-Packard, 
Siemens, Microsoft and Boeing sub-contract some low-end assembly work to 
prisons. They can pay the same or lower wages as they would in Mexico but can 
use the 'made in USA' label. (94) (95) In July 2003 Dell Computer Corp. was 
admonished by an environmental group for running a primitive recycling 
operation that exposed prisoners to toxic chemicals. (96) 


The use of slave labour by two major German industrial giants was scrutinized 
at the Nuremberg Trials. I.G. Farben had an estimated 83,000 slaves at its 
Auschwitz factory and Krupp industries use around 75,000 slaves. However the 
full scale of slave labour was brought to light in 1999 when The American Jewish 
Committee presented the results of their investigations. (97) Aware of this 
investigation, major companies employed their own historians to look for 
skeletons in their closets. Deutsche Bank's company historian discovered that it 

67 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

helped finance the construction of Auschwitz from which tens of thousands of 
slaves were taken. (98) 

In February 1999 thirteen major corporations who used slave labour came 
clean and agreed to set up a compensation fund for the victims to head off law 
suits: Allianz AG, BASF AG, Bayer AG, BMW AG, DaimlerChrysler AG, Deutsche 
Bank AG, Degussa-HLils AG, Dresdner Bank AG, Friedr. Krupp AG, Hoesch-Krupp, 
Hoechst AG, Siemens AG and Volkswagen AG. In December 1999, The American 
Jewish Committee produced a list of 257 companies that used slave labour. More 
than 50 companies on AJC's initial list of 257 firms, including multi-nationals Shell 
& DEA Oil GmbH, and Ford Motor Co, joined the general compensation fund. Ten 
days after the list was issued, negotiators agreed on a fund totaling $5.2 billion 
dollars. Professor Ulrich Herbert of, University of Freiburg, an expert on Nazi 
slave labour points out that the firms identified on the AJC list account for just a 
fraction of all German companies that used slave or forced labour. Indeed, 
virtually every industrial company of any size in Germany used slave or forced 
labour. The total number of slaves is estimated at 12 million. German historians 
estimate that of the thousands of companies that used forced and slave labour, 
more than 500 are still in operation. (99)(ioo) 

The compensation fund is now called The German Economy Foundation 
Initiative, whose stated purpose is, 

...guaranteeing that all German companies, including foreign affiliates and parent 
companies, will be protected against lawsuits relating to the Nazi era and that they 
will be able to work on international markets under conditions of comprehensive and 
lasting legal security. (ioi) 


The Laogai Research Foundation is a non-profit organization dedicated to 
collecting information about China's vast system of forced-labour camps. The 
foundation was started by Hongda Harry Wu, who has written three books on his 
experiences as a Chinese prisoner for over 19 years. Currently, there are 
estimated eight million prisoners in China's slave labour camp system known as 
'Laogai'. As a tool of political repression, the Laogai serves to silence all voices of 
political dissent throughout China. Once in the Laogai, inmates are forced to 
confess their "crimes," denounce any anti-Party beliefs and submit to a regime of 
reeducation and labour. Although Chinese law forbids torture and the use of 
torture to extract confessions, the practice remains widespread in the Laogai. 
Anyone in China can be held for up to three years in with no trial or sentencing 
procedure of any kind. All that is necessary is the directive of any official in 
China's Public Security Bureau. All prisoners in the Laogai are forced to labour. 
Labour conditions vary from region to region and camp to camp. There are many 
reports of prisoners working up to 16 to 18 hours a day to meet labour quotas 
that are enforced through withholding of food rations. Prisoners also often labour 
in highly unsafe conditions including work in mines and with toxic chemicals. 
Sometimes conditions are less arduous with more reasonable working hours and 
more humane treatment. Prisoners do not receive payment for their labour or 
any profit generated from the products they produce. According to documented 
evidence gathered by the Laogai Research Foundation and other human rights 
and media organizations, the practice of harvesting the organs of executed 
prisoners in China began sometime in the late 1970s. Organs harvested from 

68 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

prisoners are used in transplant operations for privileged Chinese and for 
foreigners. According to the statistics of Amnesty International, China executes 
more prisoners every year than the rest of the world combined. 

The deliberate application of forced labour by the Chinese government has 
spawned an entirely new field in China's economy: the economics of slavery. One 
theorist clearly defined this policy in the following statement: 

The fundamental task of our Laogai facilities is punishing and reforming 
criminals. To define their function concretely, they fulfill tasks in the following 
three ways: (1) Punishing criminals and putting them under surveillance; (2) 
Reforming criminals; (3) organizing criminals in labour and production, thus 
creating wealth for society. Our Laogai units are both facilities of dictatorship and 
special enterprises. 

- Criminal Reform Handbook, PRC Ministry of Justice, Laogai Bureau, Shaanxi 
People's Publishers, 1988 (102) 

Western companies are still using slave labour today on a huge scale by 
trading with China. The U.S. imports approximately $70 billion worth of Chinese 
goods. (103) The import of Chinese forced labour-made goods into the U.S. is 
illegal, according to section 1307 of the Tariff Act of 1930, which makes it is 
illegal to import any product that is produced in whole or in part by prison labour 
of any kind. In 1992, the need to directly confront the Chinese regarding this 
issue became apparent, leading to the signing of a document known as the 
"Memorandum of Understanding Between the United States of America and the 
People's Republic of China on Prohibiting Import and Export Trade in Prison Labor 
Products". In the most recent State Department Report on Human Rights from 
1999, U.S. authorities admit that the MOU has been "nearly impossible" to 
enforce and that Chinese authorities have been "uncooperative. When a product 
is labeled "Made in China," it may hide the fact that it was made in the Laogai by 
Chinese prisoners. Until China reveals the extent of their Laogai production, and 
U.S. companies are willing to release the location of all of their manufacturing 
facilities in China, there is no way for the Western consumer to be certain that 
s/he is not financially contributing to the Laogai system. 

Examples include Chrysler's joint venture in China to make Cherokees called 
Beijing Jeep Company and Volkswagen's joint venture in China to make the 
Santana model called Shanghai Volkswagen Automobile Company. The Laogai 
foundation investigation showed they were sourcing parts from prison labour. (104) 
The success of China's prison economy is evidenced by all the "made in China" 
toys in our shops. The China National Toy Association (CNTA) is actually a front 
for People's Armed Police (PAP) and the Chinese Army (PLA) Laogai system. (ios) 


Spending on health care in the U.S. is projected to rise from 14% of GDP 
(2000) ($1.42 trillion ), to 17% in 2011. (106) Total health care expenditure in the 
E.U. averages 8% of GDP. (107) The pharmaceutical companies are the major 
beneficiaries of disease as indicated by their market value. At the time of writing, 
Britain's GlaxoSmithKline was Britain's fourth largest company. Pfizer was 
America's fourth largest company and the fourth largest in the world. Novartis 
was Switzerland's largest company, 35% larger than second place Nestle. The 
world's top ten drug/healthcare companies had a total market value of $ 1.1 

69 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

trillion (see chapter 2). 

What we are witnessing is on the one hand is a form of indenture through 
illness, a pharmaceutical feudalism. As disease increases so does the tariff that 
society pays to the petrochemical sorcerers who provide symptomatic treatments 
and abuse their power over medical research to block any curative or 
preventative treatments. However the other Orwellian economic goal of public 
health policy is to make us poorer. Nothing illustrates this second point better 
than the emergence of extremely disabling new diseases during the 1980s which 
are described in the final chapter of this book. The economic consequences of 
Western public health policy are clear from the statistics of disability, 
unemployment and healthcare spending. The percentage of the population who 
are disabled is similar in Europe and the U.S.. In the E.U., disability is estimated 
to affect 10-20% of each country's population and the U.K. and U.S. both have 
15% disabled. (io8)(io9)So much for the medical 'breakthroughs' of the twentieth 
century. In the U.K. 3.8 million disabled people of working age are out of work, 
11% of the total 34 million of working age. In the U.S., 13 million disabled people 
of working age are out of work 8.5% of the total 159 million of working age. 
Incomes of households with at least one disabled person are 20-30% lower than 
the incomes of all households. For Federal Reserve Bank Chairman Paul Volcker 
and Co. who require a substantial decline in living standards in the West, these 
statistics represent success not failure of the healthcare system. 


The dream of prosperity for all is dying out around the world. Developing 
countries which had an expanding middle class in the early 1980s have been 
ransacked. Almost 5 billion people on the planet do not have basic property 
rights enjoyed in the West. At the same time, Westerners are getting poorer year 
by year. In the U.K., the enormous increase in house prices has made home 

ownership an impossibility for most young people. 

Chapter 7 End Notes 

1. George Orwell, 1984, part 3 chapter 2. Full text available on-line at c21.htm 

2. Special Report: America Celebrates Tax Freedom Day, The Tax Foundation, April 2003. 

3. Jane Hough, The Burden of Taxation, economic policy and statistics section, House of 
Commons library, 10 May 2001, ref. 01/51, appendix. 


4. Technical Appendix, Tax Freedom Day website. 


5. How The UK Compares, Tax Freedom Day website. 

6. New Study Profiles Total Tax Burden of Median American Family, The Tax Foundation, 
9 March 2000 

70 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

7. Jane Hough op cit., p. 21 Table 4 

8. Dean Stansel, The Hidden Burden Of Taxation: How the Government Reduces Take- 
Home Pay, Cato Policy Analysis No 302, 15 April 1998. See 

9. Isabelle Joumard, Tax systems in European Union Countries, OECD, economics 
department working papers No. 301, 29 June 2001, ref ECO/WKP(2001)27 pp. 10-16. See 

10. Alan Greenspan, Gold and Economic Freedom, The Objectivist,1966. See 

11. Ron Paul, Congressman, speech in the House, Money as a Moral Issue, Paper Money 
and Tyranny, 5 September 2003. See 

12. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 
2002, Ch. 3 

13. Ibid., pp.116 and 120 

14. Ibid., p. 115 

15. Ibid. ppll6-119 

16. Joseph Stiglitz, Globalization and its Discontents, Penguin Books, 2002, p. 95 

17. 2003 World Development Indicators, The World Bank, 4.16 External Debt, pp 246 
-249. See 

18. Today's Conditions, Ron Paul op cit. 

19. U.S. Inflation Rates, Simple and User Friendly Calculator-Database Applications, 
Russell Software Inc. See. 

20. Joe Hicks & Grahame Allen, A Century of Change .-Trends in UK Statistics since 1900, 
social and general statistics section, House of Commons library, ref. 99/111, 21 

Dec. 1999. 


21. Sliglitz, op cit., pl09 

22. Ibid., pp. 116-117 

23. World Bank Secret Documents Consumes Argentina: Alex Jones Interviews Greg 
Pa last, 

4 March 2002. Transcript at Greg Palast's website. See = 125&row=l 

24. Stiglitz, op cit., p. 122 

25. Griffin, op cit., Ch 23 

71 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

26. Ibid., p. 487 

27. Rate rise forecast prompts debt warning, BBC, London, 6 November 2003. See 

28. W.T.O. website. 

See e/gattmem e.htm 

29. Sir James Goldsmith, The New Utopia: G ATT and Global Free Trade, Federal 
Document Clearing House Congressional Testimony, 

Senate Commerce GATT Implementation, 5 October 1994. See 

30. Robert E. Scott, NAFTA's Hidden Costs: Trade agreement results in job losses, 
growing inequality, and wage suppression for the United States, Economic Policy 
Institute, April 2001. 

See naftaOl us 

31. Dean Baker and Mark Weisbrot, Will new trade gains make us rich? An assessment of 
the prospective gains from new trade agreements, Center for Economic Policy and Policy 

3 October 2001. 

See new trade gains make us ric.htm 

32. Long queue at drive-in soup kitchen, A Special Report, The Guardian, London, 3 
November 2003. See, 139 18, 1076608, OO.html 

33. Philipp Harper, Will your job move to India?, MSNBC Money Central, 30 Sept 2003. 

34. Michelle Kessler and Stephanie Armour, Increasing export of white-collar jobs is 
cause for concern, USA Today, 10 August 2003. See copy on the website of The Salt Lake 

35. Anger as HSBC cuts 4,000 UK jobs, BBC, London, 17 October 2003. See 

36. Immigrant Population Climbs to 33 Million, Federation for American Immigration 
reform website, October 2003. See 

http://www.fai .cfm?ID= 2 186&c= 54 

37. Immigration's Impact on the U.S, op cit. . 

See http: //www .fa rch/Research.cfm?ID= 2 174&c= 2 

38. John McAuley, Immigrants Keep U.S. Economy Supple, Minnesota Star Tribune, 4 
Sept. 2002. See copy on Numbers USA website 

39. Anthony Browne, Cost of the migration revolution, The Times, London, 
01 March 2003. 

See,, 630-59 5093, 00 .htm I 

40. Lower Wages for American Workers, Federation for American Immigration Reform 
(F. A.I. R.), October 2002. 


72 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

41. National Academy of Sciences Immigration Study, F.A.I.R., October 1997. 

42. David Barboza, 'Meatpackers' Profile Hinges on Pool of Immigrant Labor' 
New York Times, 21 December 2001. 

See copy on Numbers USA website 

43. High-tech worker visas, Numbers USA website, 2003 

44. Brian Grow with Manjeet Kripalani, A Visa Loophole as Big as a Mainframe, 
BusinessWeek, 10 March 2003. See 

content/03 10/b3823111 mz021.htm 

45. Deleting American Workers: Abuse of the Temporary Foreign Worker System in the 
High Tech Industry. Federation for American Immigration reform website, 2003. See 
http ://www.fai .cfm?ID= 16 14&c= 5 5 

46. Why Amnesty Isn't the Solution, F.A.I.R. See 

47. Robert L. Bartley, Open Nafta Borders? Why Not?, The Wall St Journal Editorial Page, 
2 July 2001. See http://www.opin =95000738 

48. Dane Schiller and Guillermo X. Garcia, Fox feels buoyed by U.S. visit, San Antonio 
Express-News , 7 November 2003. See 
story.cfm?xla=saen&xlb=1808odc= 1080723 

49. Dan Stein, Why Legalization Programs for Illegal Aliens Won't Solve the Problem, 17 
October 2003, F.A.I.R. See http://www.fairus.oro/Media/Media.cfm?ID=2253&c=35 

50. Who Are We? Migration Watch UK website. 

51. Ibid., Key Points: Is there a problem? 
default.asp?menu = isthereaprob&paoe=istherea problem .asp 

52. EU enlargement, E.U. website. 


53. Steve Schifferes, Who gains from immigration? BBC, London, 17 June 2002. See 

54. An overview of UK migration, Migration Watch UK. See 

55. Anthony Browne, op cit., 

73 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

56. Ibid. 

57. Sir Andrew Green, Government grasping at straws to justify immigration policy, The 
Daily Telegraph, London, 22 September 2003. See copy on the website of Migration 
Watch UK 

http://www.migrationwatchuk.Org/p Telegraph 22Sept 2003.asp 

58. Green Cross International, founded by Mikhail Gorbachev. See 

59. Dr Michael Coffman, Why Property Rights Matter, pp. 13-14 
Short Version 
See also 

60. Earth Charter Initiative, Newsflash, July 2000. See activity =445&actua 1=0 and page=93 menu =38 

61. Coffman, op cit., 

62. The Turner Foundation. See 

63. encyclopedia. See 

64. About WWF, WWF website. See 

65. Interview with Prince Philip, Alliance of Religions and Conservations website. See 

66. Who are we and what do we stand for? International Business Leaders Forum 


67. Coffman op cit., p8 

68 Dr Michael Coffman, Globalizing Mining in America, Mining Voice Magazine Volume 6 
(2):26-35. See america.htm 

69. Joan M Veon, Tyranny by Another Name - Protecting the Environment. See 

70. Coffman op cit., 

71. Monte Burke and William P. Barrett, This Land Is My Land, Forbes Magazine, 6 
October 2003. See forbes/2003/1006/050.html 

72. Dr Michael Coffman, The Smart Growth Fraud,, 15 July 
2003. See 

73. Wendell Cox, Forfeiting the American Dream: The HUD-Funded Smart Growth 
Guidebook's Attack on Homeownership, Backgrounder #1565, The Heritage Foundation, 2 
July 2002. See 

74 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

74. Concepts, Instruments for Change, International Institute for Sustainable 
Development, Canada. See 

75. 1994 Declaration of The Factor Ten Club. See 

76. Joan Veon, op cit. 

77. Public Private Partnership for the Urban Environment, UN Department of Social and 
Economic Affairs, Division for Sustainable Development. See 

78. Mission, Strategy and distinguishing characteristics, International Business Leaders 
Forum. See 

79. Global Warming Petition, Oregon Institute for Science and Medicine. See 

80. James A. Paul and Katarina Wahlberg, Global Taxes for Global Priorities, Global Policy 
Forum and the Heinrich Boll Foundation, March 2002. See 

81. Rebuilding America's Defenses, Project For the New American Century, 2000. See 

82. David Anderson, The Aggregate Burden of Crime, Journal of Law and Economics, 
January 1999. See http://papers.ssrn. com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id = 147911 and 
synopsis at David A Anderson blog/archive/000260.php 

83. The Economic Costs of Drug Abuse in The United States 1992-1998, Executive Office 
of the President, Office of National Drug Control Policy, Washington, D.C. 20503, 
September 2001. See 

http://virlib.nci .asp?category= 5 l&.subcategory= 129 and costs98.pdf 

84. Lisa Ronthal, CIA admits drug trafficking, cover-up,, 27 Oct. 1998. 
See ID= 20384 

85. Allegations of connections between CIA and the Contras in cocaine trafficking 
to the United States: Report by The CIA Inspector General. (96-0143-lG). See 

86. The CIA and drugs, See http://ciadrugs.homestead.eom/files/outline.html#intro 

87. Drugs and Crime Facts, U.S. Dept. of Justice, Bureau of Justice Statistics. See 

88. Economic Consequences of the War on Drugs, The Drug Policy Alliance. See economic.cfm 

89. Crack Vs Powder Cocaine Sentencing, Families against Mandatory Minimums. crack powder sentencinq.htm 

90. Mandatory Sentencing, The Drug Policy Alliance. See 
factsheets/mandatorysentance factsheet library.cfm 

75 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

91. History of Mandatory Sentences, Families against Mandatory Minimums. See history of mandatory.htm 

92. Drug Policy and The Criminal Justice System, 2001, The Sentencing Project, 
Washington D.C. See 

93. Rachel Councell and John Simes, Projections of long term trends in the prison 
population to 2009 England and Wales, Home Office, 9 Dec. 2002. See 

94. Jennifer Sullivan, Made on the Inside for Use on the Outside, Wired News, 02 Dec. 

1997. See http://www.wired.eom/news/business/Q, 1367, 8867, 00 .htm I 

95. Slavery With a New Name, Prison Activist Resource Center, California. See 

96. David Koenig, Dell drops recycling company that used prison labor, San Francisco 
Chronicle, 03 July 1997 bin/a rticle.cqi?file=/ 

97. American Jewish Committee. See 

98. Thane Peterson and Joan W arner Holocaust Reparations: German CEOs Unlock Their 
Vaults, Business Week Online, 22 Feb 1999. See 08/b3617 102.htm 

99. Carol J. Williams, Corporate Profit: Fortune 500 Companies Profit from Nazi Slave 

Los Angeles Times, 8 December 1999. 

See copy at 


101. Members, German Economy Foundation Initiative Steering Group. 
See Members 

102. FAQ's, The Laogai Research Foundation 

103. Congressman Sherrod Brown, Brown wins house approval of measure enforcing ban 

goods made with slave labor, Press Release, 13 July 2000. 

104. Immoral and Illegal, The Laogai Research Foundation, Case #2: Shanxi Province 
Number 3 Prison (also known as Shanxi Linfen Automobile Manufacturing Plant). See 

105. Charles Smith, GI Joe and the Chinese slave trade,, 8 Sept 

1998. See ID= 20477 

106. Marc Leduc, Healing 


107. Bringing mental health issues into the mainstream of a health-conscious society, 

76 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Health and Consumer Protection Directorate-General, EU Commission Press Release, 
Brussels, 6 April 2001. 
comm/dqs/health consumer/library/press/pressl29 en.html 

108. Disability: Some Facts, Employer's Forum on Disability. See 
uploadstore/cms/docs/CSRE Disability statistics.pdf 

109. Andrew Houtenville, Disability & Employment in the USA: National Overview based 
on 2000 Census, Disability World. See 02/employment/overview.shtml 

77 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 8 



The socio-economic structure of the New World Order is a world of 'have 
mores' and 'have nothings', with virtually no middle class beyond the few useful 
but expendable hatchet men. The descent into neo-feudalism also necessitates 
political disenfranchisement and legal alienation, i.e. the rewinding of a thousand 
years of historical progress towards freedom and democracy. 

Is there really a plan for world government of this nature or is this just 
conspiracy theory? Vladimir Bukovsky's classified Politburo documents reveal 
that, in the years leading up to the collapse of the Soviet Union, Gorbachev was 
meeting with European socialist leaders and the international financial elite, 
discussing the convergence of Soviet states with the new European state. 
Speaking in private with Argentine President Carlos Menem on 25th October 
1990, Gorbachev said: 

One of my aides has written sometime ago that we need to create a world 
government. People were laughing at him at that time. But now? 

C. Menem. Some 40 years ago, Peron was speaking of continentalism which would 
enable us to go for a world government. 

M. Gorbachev. I believe we should think about enhancing the UN role. It could not 
realise its potential for 40 years and only now did it get such an opportunity. Here is a 
proto-type of the world government for you. 

Mr Bukovsky's experience of socialism leads him to believe that there is no 
limit to the expansionist plans of the E.U.. Romano Prodi has already drawn up a 
map of the sphere of E.U. interests which includes the whole of the Middle East, 
North Africa and Turkey. The dreams of the financial elite and the Socialist 
International are one and the same, because, as Bukovsky reflects, 'no Utopia 
has ever worked in a limited space, be it a village, a town, a continent or a 

Of course none of this could be done openly, which is why the Russians quickly 
sealed the Politburo archives again. It is being accomplished using the socialist 
tactic of incrementalism. The U.N., with its gentle light blue emblem, is presented 
to the public as an institution of peace and social justice, serving as the sheep's 
clothing for the pack of wolves who sponsor it. Whilst the U.N. is still largely a fig 
leaf for one-world government, real political power blocs are being constructed 
on the basis of this cosy 'big idea'. Americans would be well advised to look at 
the E.U. to appreciate just how cosy this big idea isn't.TUe differences between 
the Anglo-American political tradition and the principles underpinning the 

78 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

European Union were recently summarized by Ashley Mote, Member of the 
European Parliament and author of Vigilance: A Defence of British Liberty. 

• Traditionally, in the U.K. and the U.S., the state draws its power from, and 
is answerable to the people. In the E.U., the state exists in its own right and 
the people answer to it. A significant example of this shift of philosophy can 
be seem in the announcement of a new mission statement for Britain's 
gigantic tax collection and welfare agency, the Inland Revenue, proudly 
displayed on the homepage at 

The Inland Revenue is here to ensure that everyone understands and receives what 
they are entitled to and understands and pays what they owe, so that everyone 
contributes to the UK's needs. 

'so that everyone contributes to the UK's needs'? Are they suggesting that 
British citizens exist to serve the state? What happens if one chooses not to 
'contribute' to the U.K.'s needs and who defines how one should 'contribute'? 

• In the U.K. and U.S., our rights and freedoms are our birth right. In the E.U., 
there are no rights or freedoms , only privileges that can be withdrawn. 

• In the U.K. and U.S., no man is above the law. In the E.U., the bureaucrats 
have given themselves immunity from prosecution. 

• In the U.K. and U.S., the Government can be replaced by the people every 
few years. In the E.U., the governing Commission is not elected by the people 
or the European Parliament, it is appointed by the heads of member states. 

• In the U.K. and U.S., everything is allowed unless specifically forbidden. In 
the E.U. everything is implicitly forbidden unless the E.U. decides to allow it. 

These principles are firmly embedded in the political organization of the 
European Union. Although there is notionally a separation of powers between the 
Executive and Legislature, in reality power is firmly in the hands of the Executive. 
The 25 Commissioners who constitute the government of the E.U. are not 
Members of the European Parliament (MEPs) but are appointed every five years 
by a qualified majority of the heads of each member state in the European 
Council. Although the Parliament has to approve the appointment of the 
Commission, and it can by two-thirds majority vote to sack it, it cannot approve 
or reject the appointment of individual Commissioners or sack them individually. 
A 'motion of censure' has never achieved the necessary majority, and if it ever 
did, the Parliament would not have the power to appoint a new Commission. In 
1999, Neil Kinnock was a member of the Santer Commission which was forced to 
resign because of serious financial corruption. Mr Kinnock was appointed to the 
replacement Commission as Commissioner in charge of tackling E.U. fraud! 

Jeffrey Titford, MEP for the Eastern Region and member of the U.K. 
Independence Party (UKIP), was one of many MEPs dismayed by certain 
appointments to the new Commission in January 2005: 

When my colleague Nigel Farage MEP recently rose to his feet in the European 
79 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Parliament and denounced the new European Commission, he was vilified and 
threatened with legal action. Mr Farage had asked fellow MEPs whether they would 
'buy a used car from this man', when he revealed that M. Jacques Barrot, had 
received an 8 month suspended sentence and was barred from elected office in 
France for 2 years, after being convicted in 2000 of embezzling FFR 25m (US$ 3.8m) 
from government funds by diverting it into the coffers of his party. 

Britain has an equally impressive representative in the person of Peter 
Mandelson, selected by Tony Blair and duly appointed in January 2005 as 
Commissioner for Trade. He was forced to resign not once, but twice from Blair's 
Government due to allegations of corruption. In December 1998, it was revealed 
that Mandelson had bought a home in Notting Hill in 1996 with the assistance of 
an interest-free indefinite loan of £373,000 from Geoffrey Robinson, a millionaire 
Labour MP who was also in the Government but was subject to an inquiry into his 
business dealings by the Department of Trade and Industry which Mandelson 
headed. Out of office for only ten months, he was re-appointed Secretary of 
State for Northern Ireland, in Octoberl999. On 21 January 2001, Mr Mandelson 
resigned again after it was discovered that, whilst he was managing the 
Millenium Dome Project, he had phoned the Home Office on behalf of Srichanda 
Hinduja, an Indian businessman who was seeking British citizenship. Mr Hinduja 
had offered £1 million to the failing Dome project. With a track record like this, 
Mandelson was destined for a top job in Brussels. 

Under the 1957 Treaty of Rome, the E.U. Commission has the exclusive right 
to draft legislation meaning that the Parliament cannot initiate legislation or 
repeal it. The Commission also has the right to 'its own power of decision' as the 
'guardian of the Treaties' allowing it to issue its own Regulations as, for 
example, to enforce the Common Agricultural and Fisheries Policies. Unlike 
Directives, Regulations immediately become law as soon as they have gone 
through the European Parliament and do not have to be ratified by the national 
parliaments of member states. 

However, under the consultation procedure there are major areas of E.U. 
legislation over which the European Parliament has no power at all. The only 
legal requirement is that Parliament states its opinion on proposed legislation. 
The E.U.'s fact sheet entitled 'Decision Making in the European Union' describes 
this in more depth. (See 

There are three main procedures for enacting new EU laws: 

• codecision; 

• consultation; 

• assent. 

The main difference between them is the way Parliament interacts with the Council 
[of Ministers]. Under the consultation procedure, Parliament merely gives its 
opinion [emphasis added]; under the codecision procedure, Parliament genuinely 
shares power with the Council. The European Commission, when proposing a new 
law, must choose which procedure to follow. The choice will, in principle, depend on 
the "legal basis" of the proposal.... 

80 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

The areas covered by the consultation procedure are: 

Police and judicial cooperation in criminal matters 

Revision of the Treaties 

Discrimination on grounds of sex, race or ethnic origin, religion or political 

conviction, disability, age or sexual orientation 

EU citizenship 


Visas, asylum, immigration and other policies associated with the free 

movement of persons 

Transport (where it is likely to have a significant impact on certain regions) 

Competition rules 

Tax arrangements 

Economic policy 

"Enhanced co-operation" - i.e. the arrangement allowing a group of member 

states to work together in a particular field even if the others do not wish to 

join in yet. 

Even where the Commission sends legislation to both the Council of Ministers 
and the Parliament under 'codecision' procedure, the volume of Directives and 
Regulations coming down from the Commission is so large that MEPs do not even 
have time to read much of the legislation. Because they often haven't got a clue 
what they are voting on, MEPs rely on civil servants to tell them how to vote. 
Current British MEP Nigel Farage stated that on one occasion, MEPs were 
required to vote on Directives 450 times in one 80-minute session. He freely 
admitted that it was a farce and he voted as he was told.i Again, in a BBC 
interview he said: 

For example, I'm told that on 21 July - the second day of this particular 
session - that I'm going to be asked to vote on up to 500 motions in a morning 
with my electronic voting pad. It seems to me that that's just impossible. 2 

The Lord's prayer contains 70 words, the Ten Commandments 297, the 
American Declaration of Independence 300 and the Common Market Directive on 
the export of duck eggs 26,911. Over 23,000 EU legal acts are in force and 
around one third of British law now originates in Brussels .3 

Finally, the European Parliament cannot even be called a talking shop. MEPs 
in the smaller political groups are very lucky if they are given two 90 second slots 
a week to speak in a debate. Informed, in-depth discussion, therefore, does not 
exist within the European Parliament.4ln Britain, detailed transcripts are recorded 
of Parliamentary matters and published for all to see (Hansard). In the E.U., few 
of the proceedings are generally recorded or even made available for public 
scrutiny. A search for the word 'minutes' on the useful E.U. dictionary, revealed that, unlike other central banks,The European Central 
Bank refuses to publish the minutes of its meetings. The dictionary also 
introduces a new world 'comitology' to describe the work and study of the many 
committees and working groups in the E.U. A Swedish scientist has found 
approximately 1350 active working groups in the Commission most of which 
operate without the full oversight of MEPs who cannot even get the lists of names 
of the participants. 

81 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

The corruption in the Brussels bureaucracy is discussed in more depth in 
chapter 11, 'the legal apparatus of totalitarianism'. 


Recent events in the U.S. demonstrate why electronic voting is the modus 
operandi of the European Parliament and the future of democracy under global 
feudalism: its designed for fraud. Electronic touch screen voting is being rolled 
out across the U.S. using software that does not permit any physical auditing or 
vote counting, permits casting of multiple votes and can be remotely accessed in 
order to change the election result. How could the public be persuaded to accept 
this? Remember the 2000 election: After the debacle in Florida (and actually in 
plenty of other locations around the U.S.), with its hanging chads and pregnant 
chads and other punch-card problems, Congress passed the Help America Vote 
Act in 2002. One of the functions of the new law was to provide $4 billion for 
states to use in updating their often antiquated voting equipment. With federal 
money available, and the cautionary story of Florida as a warning, states began 
turning in droves to electronic voting machines. This is the classical 'problem- 
reaction-solution' tactics of the wolf in sheep's clothing. 5 

The company at the centre of the controversy is Diebold Election Systems 
Inc. of Ohio who have sold 33,000 touch screen voting machines in the United 
States. Diebold donated at least $195,000 to the Republican Party between 2000 
and 2002, and its CEO Walden O'Dell once pledged to "deliver" Ohio's electoral 
votes for President Bush. 6 

In Georgia during the 2002 elections, some voters using Diebold machines 
tried to vote for one candidate, but the machine would instead register a vote for 
the opponent. There were six electoral upsets in that election, including one in 
which the incumbent senator, who was far ahead in the polls, lost by 11 points. 
Diebold had changed the software used by the voting machines seven or eight 
times, without anyone examining it, and then after the election the company 
immediately overwrote the flash memory of all the cards used by those 
machines, so it is now impossible to know what the vote counts really were.7 

Researchers at Johns Hopkins University and Rice University said they had 
uncovered bugs in a Diebold Inc. voting system that could allow voters and poll 
workers to cast multiple ballots, switch others' votes, or shut down an election 
early. Encryption of sensitive data is absent: Diebold doesn't encrypt vote totals 
before they are transferred to the Board of Elections over the Internet allowing 
outsiders to reach into the system and change election tallies. A lack of oversight 
in the development process could allow programmers to create secret "back 
doors" for tampering as well. Diebold's source code is kept secret. Voters do not 
get a paper receipt of their vote. 8,9,10 

This information only came to public attention because in March 2003, 
someone hacked into a web-server used by Diebold and copied thousands of 
messages posted to an online discussion board used internally by Diebold 
employees to discuss its voting machines, as well as actual code used in the 
voting machines. In August 2003, the documents were sent to journalists and 
the story became mainstream. 11 Diebold responded by threatening legal action 
for copyright infringement demanding that the offending material be removed 
from internet sites. Computer programmers, ISPs and students at 20 
universities, including the University of California at Berkeley and the 
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, received cease and decist letters. 

82 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Unfortunately for Diebold, the files are now on servers all over the world. 
Congressman Dennis Kucinich and Democratic Presidential candidate has taken 
up the campaign against Diebold, posting the documents on his website. 12 

In response to these revelations, in August, the Governor of Maryland 
ordered a third-party audit of the software of Diebold's touch-screen voting 
machines. Maryland was the first state to adopt a unified electronic voting 
system statewide. Just days before the university report came out, Maryland 
awarded Diebold a $55.6 million contract to provide and service 11,000 
additional Diebold machines to be used throughout the state for the 2004 
presidential primary. i3The State of California is investigating claims that Diebold 
illegally inserted software in to the machines in the San Francisco Bay area after 
they had been publicly certified. 14 

In the wake of concerns raised about security flaws in electronic voting 
systems, a lobbying group is mounting a public relations and lobbying campaign 
to help voting companies "repair short-term damage done by negative reports 
and media coverage" instead of addressing the problem, further indicating that 
the problem is by design not by accident. 15 

The British Government is planning to introduce electronic voting in the UK. 
The initiative has come from the Office of The Deputy Prime Minister, the same 
department responsible for breaking up the country up into regions, as discussed 
below. 16 


Don't be surprised when in 2005 you read on the front page of the 
newspaper, 'It's Official: Britain is Illegal '. Human Rights legislation is designed 
to outlaw opposition to world government. Any statement or action which 
opposes world government and supports the nation state will be a crime of 
"racism" or " xenophobia". If the E.U. Framework decision on combating racism 
and xenophobia becomes law or even more disastrously the U.N.'s Model 
National Legislation for the Guidance of Governments in the Enactment of 
Further Legislation Against Racial Discrimination, we will not legally be able to 
oppose the dismantling of nation states and creation of world government. 


The 1986 Public Order Act, made it a criminal offence to actively stir up racial 
hatred. The definition of race includes national origins. 


E.U. laws against the nation state began with article 14 of the 1950 European 
Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms. The 
latest amendment to the convention, Protocol No 12, 4th November 2000 reads: 

Article 1 - General prohibition of discrimination 

■ 1 The enjoyment of any right set forth by law shall be secured without 
discrimination on any ground such as sex, race, colour, language, religion, 
political or other opinion, national or social origin, association with a national 
minority, property, birth or other status. 

■ 2 No one shall be discriminated against by any public authority on any ground 

83 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

such as those mentioned in paragraph 1.17 [emphasis added] 

The law is now administered by the European Commission against Racism and 
Intolerance (ECRI) set up by a Council of Europe summit held in Vienna in 
October 1993. It was strengthened by a second summit held in Strasbourg in 
October 1997. ECRI's task is to combat racism, xenophobia, antisemitism and 
intolerance. is In 1997, the European Monitoring Centre on Racism and 
Xenophobia (EUMC) was established to serve as the watchdog and think-tank for 
the ECRI. 19 

Religious hatred, xenophobia and racism are not yet crimes under British 
law. 20 However, the E.U. Additional Protocol to the Convention on Cybercrime, 
concerning the criminalization of acts of a racist and xenophobic nature 
committed through computer systems, ratified by 11 countries in November 
2002, requires nation states to criminalize dissemination of racist and xenophobic 
on the internet. As discussed in chapter 11, the new European Arrest Warrant 
makes Xenophobia and Racism two of 32 offences for which British citizens can 
be extradited to E.U. countries in which they are crimes. This prevents UK 
citizens expressing anti-globalist views on the internet because can they can be 
read in a country which outlaws "hate speech. "21,22,23 

Worse still, the pending Framework decision on combating racism and 
xenophobia aims to make xenophobia and racism criminal offences in Britain and 
all other European countries. The crimes include: 

public dissemination or distribution of tracts, pictures or other material 
containing expressions of racism and xenophobia; directing of a racist or 
xenophobic group (by "group" is meant a structured organization consisting of at 
least two persons established for a specific period).... 5. Instigating, aiding, 
abetting or attempting to commit the above offences will also be 

punishable 10. Member States will take the necessary measures to implement 

this framework decision by 30 June 2004.24 


The Organization of American States was founded in 1948, and now includes all 
35 independent countries of the Americas. Its purpose is the same as the E.U., a 
federal super-state, though politicians will never admit to that. 25 Like the E.U. it 
is not a popular idea, at least in the Northern hemisphere which has most to lose, 
therefore opposition to it is being made illegal under the guise of protecting 
human rights. 

Article 1 of The American Convention on Human Rights 1969, reads: 

The States Parties to this Convention undertake to respect the rights and 
freedoms recognized herein and to ensure to all persons subject to their 
jurisdiction the free and full exercise of those rights and freedoms, without any 
discrimination for reasons of race, color, sex, language, religion, political or other 
opinion, national or social origin, economic status, birth, or any other social 
condition. 26[emphasis added] 

The 1988 San Salvador Protocol reads: 

The State Parties to this Protocol undertake to guarantee the exercise of the 
rights set forth herein without discrimination of any kind for reasons related to 
race, color, sex, language, religion, political or other opinions, national or social 

84 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

origin, economic status, birth or any other social condition. 

The rights guaranteed under the Protocol include the right to work, healthcare, 
social security and education. 27 


The policy documents of the U.N.'s Office of The High Commissioner for Human 
Rights, Committee for the Elimination of Racism, Xenophobia and Related 
Intolerance, make it absolutely clear that criticism of world government public 
and private, will be illegal. The Model National Legislation for the Guidance of 
Governments in the Enactment of Further Legislation Against Racial 
Discrimination actually changes the meaning of the word racism to include 
xenophobia in true Orwellian Newspeak. Xenophobia, patriotism or nationalism 
are the same as racism according to the U.N. 28 

2. In this Act, racial discrimination shall mean any distinction, exclusion, 
restriction, preference or omission based on race, colour, descent, nationality 

or ethnic origin which has the purpose or effect of nullifying or impairing, directly 
or indirectly, the recognition, equal enjoyment or exercise of human rights and 
fundamental freedoms recognized in international law. 


. Under this Act and in accordance with international law, the freedom of 
opinion and expression and the freedom of peaceful assembly and association 
shall be subject to the following restrictions: 23. It shall be an offence to 
threaten, insult, ridicule or otherwise abuse a person or group of persons by 
words or behaviour which cause or may reasonably be interpreted as an attempt 
to cause racial discrimination or racial hatred, or to incite a person or group of 
persons to do so. 


26. It is an offence to disseminate or cause to be disseminated, in a 
publication, broadcast, exhibition or by any other means of social 
communication, any material that expresses or implies ideas or theories with the 
objective of incitement to racial discrimination. 


27. The actions referred to in paragraphs 23 to 25 of this Section are deemed 
to constitute an offence irrespective of whether they were committed in public or 
in private. 

28. An action which occurs inside a private dwelling and is witnessed only by 
one or more persons present in that dwelling shall not constitute an offence. 


30. Any organization which undertakes to promote, incite, propagate or 

85 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

organize racial discrimination against an individual or group of individuals shall 
be declared illegal and prohibited. Under section 8 (c), punishment of offenders 
includes suspension of the right to be elected to a public office. 

It's worth interjecting at this point that the E.U.'s constitutional affairs 
committee have been chewing over a draft "Statute of European Political Parties". 
The establishment of state-funded pan-European parties is something that 
federalists desperately want. If a majority of MEPs were to decide that a party 
was not abiding by their definition of human rights and democratic values, it 
would be debarred. This was precisely the ruse used across the Warsaw Pact. 
Parties were initially proscribed on grounds of being fascist, and, before long, this 
definition came to apply to everyone except the communists and their Peasant 
Party allies. 29 


36. It is an offence for any official or other servant of the State, or of a public 
establishment, national enterprise or a legal entity receiving financial assistance 
from the public authorities, to deny an individual or group of individuals access 
to a right, privilege or benefit on racial grounds. 37. It is an offence, on racial 
grounds: (a) To refuse to employ or refrain from employing an individual or 
group of individuals for a vacant post for which the persons concerned are 

According to The Daily Telegraph, the first judicial ruling equating xenophobia 
with opposition to world government has already been made: 

Is Euro-sceptic dissent xenophobic? I ask the question only half in jest, 
because the EU institutions have a habit of outdoing parody. The Advocate 
General of the European Court of Justice issued an opinion on October 19 - Case 
C-274/99 P - arguing that political criticism of the E.U. can be akin to 
blasphemy, and can therefore be restricted. He denies it. Read the case for 
yourself- in Spanish or French; English is not provided. He misuses a blasphemy 
case, Wingrove v United Kingdom, as a building block in arguing for repressive 
powers to limit free speech. 30 

The thought police are already active in Britain. In January 2003, Robin Page, 
former presenter of TV's One Man and his Dog and Daily Telegraph columnist, 
was questioned by police after saying country dwellers should enjoy the same 
rights as blacks, Muslims and homosexuals. Mr Page, was arrested on suspicion 
of stirring up racial hatred after making a speech at a pro-hunting rally in 
November which began: "If there is a black, vegetarian, Muslim, asylum-seeking, 
one-legged, lesbian lorry driver present... I want the same rights as you. "31 


The political structure of the U.N global government will be built through 
regionalism, also known as federalism. Nation states will be broken down into 
smaller regions and subsumed by larger international power blocs, just as the 
world was divided into Oceania, Eurasia and Eastasia in Orwell's 1984, and into 
ten regions in Huxley's Brave New World. The E.U. super-state is almost 
complete and it is the model for the Organization of American States. The 

86 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

purpose of regionalism is to circumvent national government and to centralize 
power under the U.N. 

Within the E.U. there are, at present, 111 separate regions. In many of the 
continental countries a form of regional government has been common for 
decades, especially in France, Germany, Spain, and Italy. Article 198 a of The 
Maastricht Treaty 1992 32 set up The Committee Of The Regions and since then, 
the U.K. government has followed this agenda to break down the political 
structure of the U.K. so the smaller pieces can be made accountable to Brussels 
rather than Westminster. Northern Ireland, Scotland and Wales now have their 
own regional assemblies and soon England will be broken up into nine regions, 
making twelve U.K. regions in total. Already, in all twelve regions, Government 
Offices, Regional Development Agencies and Regional Assemblies have been set 
up with non-elected members, appointed to sit.33,34Referendums to set up 
elected assemblies in England will be held in Autumn 2004.35 It is clear that 
British sovereignty is to be completely surrendered to the E.U. 


The following predictions are based on current trends as they unfold and on 
an understanding of the policy objectives of the elite. These predictions are 
widely shared by students of the New World Order. 

National borders are ultimately defined by military competence. All of the U.N. 
edicts and conventions mean nothing unless they can be enforced militarily upon 
recalcitrant nations. The E.U. super-state will acquire its necessary army through 
incrementalism, sometimes referred to as the "ratchet" system since their is no 
mechanism for repealing E.U. laws. However the massive geo-political 
restructuring needed to get all nations under a world army will require something 
quite spectacular. Think-tanks, university grants and bribes are not enough to 
bring about global government. The league of Nations and the United Nations 
were forged from the heat of the first and second world wars. Global government 
will be the fall-out from World War III. There is a three pronged strategy being 
played out, masquerading as the Global War on Terror. Firstly, America's super- 
power status will be destroyed. This will partly be achieved in carrying out the 
second tactic which is to bring uncooperative nations, especially those in the 
Middle East, under U.N. control. America's military might will be exhausted by 
invading Third World nations and setting up U.N. protectorates. Thirdly, 
threatened or actual conflict between nuclear powers will persuade all nations to 
surrender their military power to the U.N. thereby permanently relinquishing 
their sovereignty. This is why the West has given nuclear technology to North 
Korea and China. At this point, before hundreds of cities are annihilated ,there 
will be an emergency U.N. conference. The agreement reached will be to 
surrender control all weapons of mass destruction to a U.N. agency. The 
submission of all conventional armed forces to U.N command will follow. 
Eventually all military forces will be U.N. 'Peace Keeping' forces, whose purpose 
is to enforce the U.N. hegemony over rogue states. 

If this sounds a little fantastic, consider this: NATO exercises for enforcing 
U.N. embargoes on breakaway states have already begun. The first exercise of 
NATO'S Response Force took place between 11th and 26th September 2003 in 
Galloway, Scotland. This was a 'crisis response' operation called 'Exercise 
Northern Lights' in which the mission was enforcing a U.N. arms embargo on a 
recently formed country. 36 

87 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

A second exercise took place in Turkey on 20th November 2003. According to 
the NATO website, "the forces rescued and evacuated the U.N. staff and civilians, 
established an embargo, engaged in counter-terrorist operations and a show of 
force". 37 

Like American and European politicians, the Russians and Chinese oligarchs 
are happy to play their part in this farce because they also dream of international 
governance. Former party bosses are happy to assume the new role of 'World 
Controllers' in the eastern regions of the Brave New World. The neo-conservative 
government in the Whitehouse, like almost all previous administrations, is 100% 
committed to the globalist plan to destroy the independence of the U.S.. Once 
completed, the Donald Rumsfeld-initiated NATO Response Force will put the boot 
behind the imperial decrees the Death Star wishes to impose on rebel colonies. 

The policy of weakening the U.S. military really began in earnest under Bush 
Sr. during the first Gulf War. 300,000 of the 700,000 troops deployed in Gulf War 
are now seriously ill with Gulf War Illness. 38 They are being denied cheap and 
effective medical care for no apparent reason. Former Consultant to the Defense 
Department, Dr Garth Nicolson, estimates that at least 25,000 have died since 
the war ended. The others face permanent disability and destitution. Major Doug 
Rokke was the U.S. Army's depleted uranium project director in 1994-95 who 
has since campaigned tirelessly to expose the devastating health effects of DU 
munitions. The report he has obtained from the U.S. Veterans Administration 
states that, by August 2004, it had awarded permanent disability compensation 
to almost 280,000 U.S. troops who served in the Gulf region between August 
1990 and May 2004. 39 Meanwhile, the Veterans Administration refuses to 
acknowledge that there is a Gulf War Illness, preferring to diagnose post- 
traumatic stress disorder. 40 The cause of Gulf War Illness is multi-faceted, 
invariably linked to depleted uranium munitions, experimental vaccinations and 
exposure to chemical and biological weapons. All of these factors lead back to the 
Western military-industrial complex controlled by the elite, whose ultimate goal is 
to destroy America militarily and economically. The troops who served in the first 
Gulf War have almost all been cycled out of the military, so the poor new recruits 
currently serving in Iraq and Afghanistan know little or nothing of their appalling 
fate. The policy seems to be to give troops a limited operational lifespan, after 
which they are killed or incapacitated to make way for the next round of cannon 
fodder. Meanwhile hundreds of billions of dollars are being bled from U.S. 
taxpayers to finance this destruction. As George Orwell concluded in 1984, 

War is a way of shattering to pieces, or pouring into the stratosphere, or sinking 
into the depths of the sea, materials which might otherwise be used to make the 
masses too comfortable... 

In the next chapter, we'll find out who really benefits from the The War on 
Terror, and conjecture who the terrorists really are. 

Chapter 8 End Notes 

1. Sam Burcher, European Directive Against Vitamins & Minerals, Institute of Science in 


2. Matthew Grant, What next for the UKIP?, BBC, London, 13 July 1999. 

88 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

See politics/3921 50 .stm 

3. Dr Keith Strelling, E.M.U and the Growth of Economic and Political Power in the E.U. 

4. Understanding the E.U., transcript of a video by The Silent Majority group. 

5. Scott Granneman, Electronic Voting Debacle, The Register,18 Nov. 2003. 

6. Paul Festa, California voting machine called into question, CNET, 4 Nov. 

See .com/2 100-1028-5102254.html?taq = n I 

7. Scott Granneman op cit. 

8. Ibid. 

9. Kim Zetter, E-Vote Machines Face Audit, Wired News, 12 Aug. 2003. See 
http://www.wired.eom/news/technoloqy/Q, 1282, 59976, 00 .htm I 

10. Analysis of an Electronic Voting System, Johns Hopkins Information Security Institute 
Technical Report, ref. TR-2003-19, 23 July 2003. See 

Also see these websites for indepth investigations into electronic voting fraud. 

11. Scott Grannemann, op cit. 

12. Dennis J. Kucinich, Congressman for the 10th District of Ohio, Voting Rights. 

13. Kim Zetter, op cit. 

14. Paul Festa, op cit. 

15. Kim Zetter, E-Vote Firms Seek Voter Approval, Wired News, 20 Oct. 2003. See 
http://www.wired.eom/news/business/Q, 1367, 60864, 00 .htm I 

16. Implementing electronic voting in the UK, Office Of the Deputy Prime Minister, 2003. 
See localgov/ 
documents/page/odpm locgov 605189-01.hcsp#P50 3102 

17. Treaties, Council of Europe website. 


18. European Commission against Racism and Intolerance website. See rights/Ecri/1-ECRI/ 

19. About Us, European Monitoring Centre on Racism and Xenophobia (EUMC) website. 
fuseaction=content.dsp cat content&catid = 2 

20. House of Lords session 2002-03 32nd report, Select Committee on the European 

The proposed Framework Decision on Racism and Xenophobia- an update, 1 July 2003. 

89 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 



21. The Council of Europe Against Racism website 

22. Philip Johnston, Britons face extradition for 'thought crime' on net, The Daily 
Telegraph, London, 18 Feb. 2003, See 

23. House of Lords, op cit. 

24. Framework decision on combating racism and xenophobia, European Council website. 
See ( summary of the resolution) 

vqbwr4k8ocw2/f=/vqd mi7kxeqzq.pdf (the actual legislation) 

25. Organisation of American States website 

26. Article 1 of The American Convention on Human Rights 1969, Inter-American 
Commission on Human Rights, Organization of American States website. See 

27. Additional Protocol to the American Convention on Human Rights in the Area of 
Economic, Social and Cultural Rights ("Protocol of San Salvador"), November 1988, 
Inter-American Commission on Human Rights, Organization of American States website. 

28. Model National Legislation for the Guidance of Governments in the Enactment of 
Further Legislation Against Racial Discrimination, Office of The High Commissioner for 
Human Rights website. 


29. Daniel Hannan, Back in the USSR for the EU's latest members, The Daily Telegraph, 
London, 1 June 2003. See 

30. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, Opinion: If this isn't a superstate in the making, then what 
is? The Daily Telegraph, London, 15th November 2000. 
%2F2000%2Fll%2F15%2Fdo01.xml&secureRefresh=true& requestid = 102136 

31. Sally Pook, Race claim against Telegraph man dropped, The Daily Telegraph, London, 
21 January 2003. See http://www.teleqraph in .i htm l?xm I = %2Fnews% 
2F2003%2F01%2F21%2Fnpaqe21.xml&secureRefresh=true& requestid=88226 

32. The Consolidated Treaty Establishing The European Community, 

Title II, The Treaty Establishing The European Community, Part Five, Title I, Provisions 

Governing The Institutions, Chapter 4, The Committee Of The Regions: 

Article 263 (ex Article 198 a). 


Also see: Major Steps Towards a Europe of The Regions and Cities in an Integrated 

Continent, a flowchart published by The EU Committee of The Regions at 

90 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) cdr.pdf 

33. Government Offices for the English Regions, Office of The Deputy Prime Minister 
website. See 

34. What are Regional Chambers ? Office of The Deputy Prime Minister website. See regions/ 
documents/paqe/odpm regions 607885.hcsp 

35. Regional Governance,Ib\d. , 

odpm reqions/documents/paqe/odpm regions 023393.hcsp 

36. Ukrainian marines stop drivers. BBC, London, 23 September 2003. 

and Scottish coast to host war games, BBC, London, 11 September 2003. 

37. Response Force demonstrates capability in first exercise, NATO website. See 

38. Ellen Tomson, Gulf War Illnesses Affect 300,000 Vets, PioneerPlanet / St. Paul 
(Minnesota) Pioneer Press, 19 September 2000. See 

39. Major Doug Rokke, interviewed on Radio Liberty, 12 January 2005. Click here to 

40. Garth Nicolson Phd, Chief Scientific Officer, What's New? The Institute of Molecular 
Medicine, 4 November 2001. See 

91 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 9 


In some ways ...[Julia]... was far more acute than Winston, and far 
less susceptible to Party propaganda. Once when he happened in 
some connexion to mention the war against Eurasia, she startled him 
by saying casually that in her opinion the war was not happening. The 
rocket bombs which fell daily on London were probably fired by the 
Government of Oceania itself, 'just to keep people frightened'. This 
was an idea that had literally never occurred to him. She also stirred a 
sort of envy in him by telling him that during the Two Minutes Hate 
her great difficulty was to avoid bursting out laughing. 
- George Orwell, 1984 

Some of the most comprehensive sources on government sponsored 
terrorism are Paul J. Watson's book, Order Out of Chaos: Elite Sponsored 
Terrorism and the New World Order, and Alex Jones' book, 9-11 Descent into 
Tyranny. Most of the citations can be checked at , and . This chapter does little 
more than to summarize these works. There are also some useful websites 
specifically on 9/11, such as,,,, and 


When a government wants to do something unpopular, such as taking all our 
rights away, it secretly creates a more immediate problem, such as demolishing 
skyscrapers in Manhattan. To satisfy public demand that no more skyscrapers be 
demolished in Manhattan, the government... takes all our rights away. The 
people give thanks to Big Brother for his protection and look back with nostalgia 
on their love affair with civil rights. This is 'problem-reaction-solution' where the 
sponsors of an undesirable measure pose it as a solution to another problem they 
secretly created. 

This crude device was described by Orwell in 1984. The Party sponsored 
Emmanuel Goldstein's terrorist network, 'The Brotherhood' and pretended that 
Oceania was engaged in continual wars against Eurasia and Eastasia. The 
external threat justified the totalitarian system; anybody who opposed it was an 
enemy of the state. In the same way today, anybody who supports freedom and 
opposes war must be a member of Al-Qaeda. 

It is worth noting a few passages in 1984 to compare with the current 'War 
on Terror'. Emmanuel Goldstein was once high up in the Party before before 
becoming a counter-revolutionary: 

92 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

He was the primal traitor, the earliest defiler of the Party's purity. All 
subsequent crimes against the Party, all treacheries, acts of sabotage, heresies, 
deviations, sprang directly out of his teaching... He was the commander of a vast 
shadowy army, an underground network of conspirators dedicated to the 
overthrow of the State. 

Goldstein was often seen on the telescreen mouthing his specious claptrap: 

He was abusing Big Brother, he was denouncing the dictatorship of the Party, 
he was demanding the immediate conclusion of peace with Eurasia, he was 
advocating freedom of speech, freedom of the Press, freedom of assembly, 
freedom of thought, he was crying hysterically that the revolution had been 

Despite the daily arrests of members of The Brotherhood, Goldstein himself was 
never caught: 

... although Goldstein was hated and despised by everybody, although every 
day and a thousand times a day, on platforms, on the telescreen, in newspapers, 
in books, his theories were refuted, smashed, ridiculed, held up to the general 
gaze for the pitiful rubbish that they were in spite of all this, his influence never 
seemed to grow less.... Somewhere or other he was still alive and hatching his 
conspiracies: perhaps somewhere beyond the sea, under the protection of his 
foreign paymasters, perhaps even — so it was occasionally rumoured -- in some 
hiding-place in Oceania itself. 

It is marvellous to behold the the brazen attempt by Western governments to 
pose Osama Bin Laden as a real-life Goldstein in order to justify the watchful eye 
of Big Brother and to take the world to the brink of a third world war. 

There are many historical examples of governments using problem-reaction- 
solution, either committing atrocities and blaming it on their enemies or actually 
creating enemies for political purposes. Emperor Nero burned Rome and blamed 
it on the Christians. Hitler burned the Reichstag and blamed it on the 
communists. Both used this as an excuse to persecute their political enemies. In 
March 1962, U.S. Army General Lyman L. Lemnitzer presented a plan to the 
Defense Secretary Robert McNamara for the invasion of Cuba. The Joint Chiefs of 
Staff had agreed to stage terrorist outrages to be blamed on Fidel Castro, 
including hijacking aircraft, sinking an American ship and violent terrorist attacks 
on U.S. cities. Fake casualty lists in U.S. newspapers would cause a 'helpful wave 
of indignation'. The official documents on Operation Northwoods were de- 
classified in 2002 and are now available to read.(i) 

Islamic terrorism is a corner-stone of the elite's long range planning for a 
New World Order. The hand of the globalists can be seen grooming Islamic jihad 
in the Islamic heartlands of the Middle East and central Asia. According to a 
recent United Press International report: 

Israel and Hamas may currently be locked in deadly combat, but, according 
to several current and former U.S. intelligence officials, beginning in the late 
1970s, Tel Aviv gave direct and indirect financial aid to Hamas over a period of 
years... The thinking on the part of some of the right-wing Israeli establishment 
was that Hamas and the others, if they gained control, would refuse to have any 

93 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

part of the peace process and would torpedo any agreements put in place. 

Ariel Sharon and his Likud party decided that it could discredit the PLO, whose 
aims were moderate, and respond with even greater violence against the 
Palestinians if they could link it to terrorist outrages. (2) 

Similarly the U.S. government played a key role in nurturing its nemesis, Al- 
Qaeda. By the 1970s the Bushes and the Bin Ladens were owning airports and oil 
companies together. The majority owners of the world's largest military 
investment company, the (U.S)$18 billion Carlyle Group, are the Bushes - and 
until October 2001- the Bin Laden family. Former British Prime Minister John 
Major is also on its board. The Carlyle Group has been one of the main 
beneficiaries of the war in Iraq. (3) 

The policy of recruiting Muslim mercenaries to oppose the Soviets in 
Afghanistan began under President Carter in 1979. Bush Sr. was CIA Director 
1975-1979 and U.S. Vice President 1981-1989. The Mujahdeen received 
American arms and military training care of the CIA's ally, Pakistan Intelligence 
(ISI) throughout the 1980s. However the same policy continued after the Soviets 
withdrew from Afghanistan in 1989 and the Cold War came to an end. Pakistani 
support for the Taleban during the Afghan civil war resulted in financial and 
military assistance going to the Bosnian Muslim Army in the early 1990s and later 
to the KLA in Kosovo. From 1992 onwards the ethnically driven disintegration of 
Yugoslavia was a key juncture for the role of the U.N. as international policeman. 



Paul J. Watson's avid attention to the daily news reaped its reward on 7 
October 2002 when he saved stories posted on the websites of several British 
newspapers. A Ministry of Defence D-notice gagging order was issued to stop the 
press covering the trial of former MI5 agent David Shayler who was charged with 
breaking the Official Secrets Act. The gagging order came on the same day that 
the press reported that the government had pressured the judge in Shayler's 
trial to accept public interest immunity (PII) certificates requiring the press and 
the public to leave the court if sensitive security and intelligence issues were 

raised. By the evening of 7 October, the D-notice had forced the London 
Guardian to erase an article which originally stated: 

Government officials and lawyers persuaded two cabinet ministers to sign the 
PII certificates after they learned that Mr Shayler intended to defend himself at 
the trial. (6) 

However the Evening Standards' article containing some of Shayler's 
allegations still remains on its website: 

Shayler will be defending himself during the trial. He is expected to claim 
that British Secret Service agents paid up to £100,000 to Osama Bin Laden for 
an assassination attempt on Colonel Gadaffy in 1996.(7) 

The CIA-Pakistan-Bin Laden connection with 9-11 is strongly indicated by the 
transfer of $100,000 to the lead hijacker Mohammad Atta by Director of Pakistani 
ISI General Mahmoud Ahmad a few months before the attack. The same Director 
was in Washington D.C. the week of the attack meeting with Colin Powell and the 
CIA Director George Tenet. (8)(9) 

94 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

J_l_ l_l_ 

Le Figaro newspaper reported that between 4 and 14 July 2001, Osama 
Bin Laden was treated for kidney infection at the the American hospital Dubai. He 
met with CIA station chief Larry Mitchell and gave him precise information 
regarding an imminent attack on the U.S. Although the CIA refuted the 
allegation, Le Figaro refused to retract it stating the French Secret Service were a 
reliable source for this story. (io) 

Direct evidence of U.S. Government protection of Al-Qaeda is the document 
1991 WF213589 leaked to the BBC by FBI agents. Bush signed this national 
security order instructing the FBI not to arrest members of Al -Qaeda.(ii) 
Lawsuits have now been filed by FBI agents against the Government in 
connection with this matter. (12) 

Michael Meacher was the former Environment Minister in Tony Blair's 
Government. He wrote an article in for the Guardian newspaper in September 
2003 suggesting that the U.S. Government had prior knowledge of the 9-11 
attack and allowed it to go ahead to justify their plan drawn up a year earlier to 
occupy the Middle East. Mr Meacher detected a strong smell of 'problem- 
reaction-solution' in the air: 

First, it is clear the US authorities did little or nothing to pre-empt the events 
of 9/11. It is known that at least 11 countries provided advance warning to the 
US of the 9/11 attacks. Two senior Mossad experts were sent to Washington in 
August 2001 to alert the CIA and FBI to a cell of 200 terrorists said to be 
preparing a big operation (Daily Telegraph, September 16 2001). The list they 
provided included the names of four of the 9/11 hijackers, none of whom was 

He, like many others, asked the question why when the first hijacking was 
suspected at 8.20am not a single fighter plane was scrambled to investigate 
from the US Andrews airforce base, just 10 miles from Washington DC, until after 
the third plane had hit the Pentagon at 9.38 am. There were standard FAA 
intercept procedures for hijacked aircraft. Between September 2000 and June 
2001 the U.S. military launched fighter aircraft on 67 occasions to chase 
suspicious aircraft. It is a U.S. legal requirement that once an aircraft has moved 
significantly off its flight plan, fighter planes are sent up to investigate. It appears 
that U.S. air defence was deliberately stood down on the morning of 9/11. (13) 

Mr Meacher concluded his article by pointing out the shortage of hydrocarbon 
fuel in the coming decades and the need to take preemptive action to secure new 
supplies. Whilst the loss of the World Trade Center was measured in billions the 
oil and gas reserves of Kazakhstan, Uzbekistan and Turkmenistan are estimated 
to be more than $3 trillion. Iraq has the second largest oil reserves in the world 
after Saudi Arabia. In 1997, the Taleban were meeting with representatives of 
Unocal to negotiate a pipeline deal for central Asia. However by February 1998, 
Unocal was petitioning Congress for a stable secular Afghan government due to 
the failure of these negotiations. (14) Pakistan, Afghanistan and Turkmenistan 
signed an agreement for a $3.2 billion pipeline deal on 28 Decemeber 2002. (15) 

The BBC reported that Niaz Niak, a former Pakistan foreign secretary, was 
told by senior American officials at a meeting in Berlin in July 2001, that military 
action against Afghanistan would go ahead by the middle of October. It also 
reported that before 9/11, U.S. Special Forces were massing on the border with 
Tajikistan preparing for full scale invasion. (16) 

But how did the military-industrial complex pull off the events of 9/11? There 

95 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

is some confusion over who the hijackers actually were. Four of the five named 
hijackers supposedly on flight 11 which hit the north tower have since turned up 
alive and well denying they had anything to do with the attack.(i7) Northrop 
Grumman's RQ-4A Global Hawk is a remote control reconnaissance aircraft 
developed for the U.S Airforce. The U.S. Airforce Technology website reads: 

In April 2001, Global Hawk made aviation history when it completed the first 
non-stop flight across the Pacific Ocean by an unmanned, powered aircraft, flying 
from Edwards AFB, California, to the Royal Australian Air Force Base, Edinburgh, 
South Australia. (18) 

The military technology for flying planes into buildings by remote control 
existed on 9/11. Original mainstream media footage and witness testimony 
supporting this possibility can be be found at and 


As suggested in the previous chapter, the War on Terror is designed to take 
the world to the brink of World War III, as the necessary crisis (problem) to 
precipitate the dawn of global government (reaction-solution). This is why the 
elite have been proliferating weapons of mass destruction since the 1980s. 

The U.S. supported Saddam in the Iran/Iraq war between 1980 andl988. 
However, turning Saddam Hussein into a credible threat to the West required a 
helping hand from Uncle Sam. Donald Rumsfeld the U.S. Defense Secretary met 
Saddam in 1983 to ease the way for U.S. companies to sell Baghdad biological 
and chemical weapons components. (i9) 

In 1994, the Clinton administration initiated the 'Agreed Framework' with 
North Korea, committing millions of dollars in aid for its nuclear programme, 
allegedly for electricity generation. In year 2000, Clinton authorized Donald 
Rumsfeld's company ABB Inc. to build two lightwater nuclear reactors in North 
Korea. In January 2003, George Bush sought $3.5 million of taxpayers money for 
the same nuclear programme. (20) The U.S. Government claims that lightwater 
reactors cannot be used for nuclear weapons production, even though the 
Congressional North Korea Advisory Group concluded in 1999 that, 

If the 1994 Agreed Framework is implemented and two LWRs are eventually 
built and operated in North Korea, the reactors could produce close to 500 
kilograms of plutonium in spent reactor fuel each year; enough for nearly 100 
bombs annually if North Korea decides to break its obligations and reprocess the 
material. (21) 

Given that Kim Jong-II is a brutal dictator who has starved millions of his own 
people to death, the U.S. Government is building the best enemy money can 
buy. The result will be an escalation of the 'War on Terror'. 

In 1996, President Clinton changed the law and allowed advanced U.S. 
computer technology to be sold to foreign military users. The super-computers 
sold to China and Russia were designed for nuclear bomb development, 
advanced aircraft design, anti-submarine warfare sensor development, and radar 
applications. These super-computers can run American nuclear bomb design 
software and codes with little or no modification. They are identical to the 

96 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

computers at U.S. weapons labs right down to the vendor support. (22x23) 

We can only prevent further massive terror attacks and a global conflagration 
by exposing the cartel behind the curtain that is behind it all. Senator Gary Hart 
said at a Council on Foreign Relations conference held the day after 9/11: 

There is a chance for the President of the United States to use this disaster to carry 
out what his father - a phrase his father used I think only once, and it hasn't been 
used since - and that is a new world order.(24) 

Chapter 9 End Notes 

1. David Ruppe, Friendly Fire, Book: U.S. Military Drafted Plans to Terrorize U.S. Cities to 
Provoke War With Cuba,, 7 Nov. 2001. 


us military drafted plans to terrorize us cities 

and knowledqe# north woods 

2. Richard Sale, Analysis: Hamas history tied to Israel, United Press International, 
18 Jun. 2002. 


3. Judicial Watch, Bush Sr. in Business with Bin Laden Family Conglomerate through 

Carlyle Group, 28 Sept. 2001. 

See senior in business with bin laden.html 

4. Michel Chossudovsky, Professor of Economics, University of Ottawa, Who Is Osama Bin 
Laden?. See 

5. CIA worked in tandem with Pakistan to create Taliban, Times of India, 7 March 2001. 
See tandem create taliban.html 

6. Patrick McGowan, Calls for secret Shayler trial, Evening Standard, London, 7 Oct. 
2002. See 

7. Richard Norton-Taylor, Ministers Issue Gag Orders for MI5 Trial, The Guardian, London, 
7 Oct. 2002. See issue gag orders for mI5 trial.htm 

8. Michel Chossudovsky, Professor of Economics, University of Ottawa, The Role of 
Pakistan's Military Intelligence (ISI) in the September 11 Attacks, 2 Nov. 2001. See 

9. Manoj Joshi, India helped FBI trace ISI-terrorist links, The Times of India, Delhi, 9 Oct. 

articleshow.asp?catkey=-2128936835&art id = 1454238160&sType=11 

10. Toby Rose, CIA agent 'met Bin Laden in July' , Evening Standard, London, 31 Oct. 
2001. See agent met bin laden in iuly.html 

11. Greg Palast and David Pallister, FBI claims Bin Laden inquiry was frustrated 
Officials told to 'back off on Saudis before September 11, The Guardian, London, 
Nov. 2001. See,4273,4293682,00.htrnl 

97 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

12. Judicial Watch, Active FBI Special Agent files Complaint Concerning Obstructed FBI 
Anti-Terrorist Investigations, 14 Nov. 2001. See 

13. Michael Meacher, This war on terrorism is bogus, The Guardian, London, 6 Sept. 2003 
See http: //politics .guardian .co. uk/comment/story/0,9 11 5, 1036688,00 .htm I 

14. Julio Godoy, US policy on Taliban influenced by oil, Asia Times, 20 Nov. 2001. 

15. Agreement On US 3.2 Billion Gas Pipeline Project Signed,, 28 Dec. 

See 02/12.30A.afqh .pipe. htm 

16. U.S. 'Planned Attack on Taliban', BBC, 18 Sept. 2001. See asia/1550366.stm 

17. Paul J. Watson, Order Out of Chaos: Elite Sponsored Terrorism and the New World 
Order, Alex Jones Productions, 2003, p. 160 

18. Global hawk high endurance unmanned reconnaissance aircraft, USA, Airforce 
Technology, Website for the Defense Industry. 


19. Tim Reid, How US helped Iraq build deadly arsenal, The Times, London, 31 Dec. 2002. 
See,, 3-528574, 00 .htm I 

20. Bush Seeks $3.5 Million for Group Building N. Korean Reactors, Bloomberg, 17 Jan. 
2003. See 

H.CIinton Deal Gave N. Korea 100-Nuke-Per-Year Capacity, Newsmax, 19 Oct. 2002. See 

22. Charles Smith, Brokering our own demise, WorldNetDaily, 30 Nov. 1999. See ID= 20542 

23. Charles Smith, China and covert nuclear commerce, WorldNetDaily, 11 May 1999. 
See ID=20512 

24. Alex Jones Show Interview of Greg Palast,, 5 April 2002. See = 144&row=l 

98 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 10 


From recent pronouncements and legislative developments it appears both 
the U.S. and U.K. governments may suspend Parliamentary democracy after the 
next major terror attack. With the War on Terror expected to go on forever, we 
may soon find ourselves under a form of indefinite martial law. What is likely to 
be the purpose of this scenario for the police state planners? The populace will be 
required to surrender rights to life, liberty and property for short term 
expediency. This will be the window of opportunity the planners need to purge 
dissident groups and exploit the popular panic to introduce permanent legal or 
constitutional changes. 

The former objective is uppermost in the minds of the American police state 
planners. Unlike their British counterparts, they have a large gun-owning New 
World Order savvy population to contend with. This is not merely the Michigan 
Militia, but the hundreds of thousands, possibly millions of ordinary Americans 
who log on to free-thinking websites and listen to uncensored talk radio. Some of 
these folk, especially the Christians, are targets of the regime and could be dealt 
with in the manner of the Waco and Ruby Ridge atrocities. 

In the U.K. the planners are principally troubled by the eurosceptics who are 
creating serious popular discontent about the European project. Their approach 
to the problem may not be quite as 'hands on' as the bully boys in the U.S., but 
times of crisis offer great opportunity for restricting communication, dirty tricks, 
deception and propaganda. 



After burning down the Reichstag building (home to the German 
parliament) on 27th February 1933, the Nazis blamed it on the communists and 
persuaded President Hindenberg to issue a decree invoking article 48 of the 
Weimar constitution. This placed draconian restrictions on civil liberties which 
enabled the Nazis to persecute their political opponents in the run up to the 
elections on 5 March. However the elections failed to deliver Hitler the two-thirds 
majority necessary to dismantle the constitution. Therefore he continued to use 
the police state powers of article 48 to intimidate his political opponents. On 23rd 
March the newly elected Reichstag convened and passed the Enabling Act 

99 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

allowing Hitler to exercise dictatorial rule for four years. In 1937 the act was 
renewed and remained in force until the collapse of the regime in 1945. 


When the Draft Civil Contingencies Bill was published in 2003, it created a 
furore among civil liberties groups and Members of Parliament. One committee 
member, former Tory whip, Lord Lucas of Crudwell, raised the prospect that 
"once a state of emergency is declared [the government] can effectively tear up 
the rest of the constitution and any bits of this bill [they do not like] and create a 
republic...". Ms Chakrabati spokesman for Liberty agreed that the most "colourful 
scenario" could see a secretary of state with "absolute legislative power", 
theoretically mounting a threat to the whole U.K. constitution. (l) Justified as a 
"modernization" of the existing 1920 Emergency Powers Act, the Bill proposed to 
give the police power to run the Internet, Utilities including the phones, 
transport, local government, and the postal service. (2) If the new measures were 
introduced, the Government would be able to prohibit any assembly or activity it 
believed threatened national security. The laws would allow ministers to declare a 
state of emergency by consulting Her Majesty The Queen but not Parliament. 

The Draft Civil Contingencies Bill also allowed police to enforce "emergency 
cordons" in major British cities in the event of a terrorist attack. The new laws 
would allow police to stop the spread of infection by throwing "health cordons" 
around areas hit by biological or chemical attacks, according to the Sunday 
Times newspaper. It said that people would be prevented from escaping from the 
affected area. Specially trained armed police and military units would be sent in 
to enforce the cordons and control any outbreak of disorder including looting. The 
Ministry of Defence told the newspaper that a new civil contingency reaction 
force would have the option of using live ammunition. The 7,000-strong force is 
to be deployed to 14 regions in 2004.(3) 

Plans have been drawn up by the Government for a mass evacuation of 
London in the event of a terrorist attack, reported The Sunday Times in Sept. 
2003. Leaked documents detail how residents could be herded into "rest and 
reception areas" in the Home Counties. Disturbingly it talks about long term 
rehousing if an attack made an area uninhabitable, raising the possibility of 
internment and massive government orchestrated confiscation of valuable real 
estate in the capital. (4) 

These new executive powers should also be seen in the context of a drive for 
a national police force. The war against terrorism is set to be masterminded by a 
new U.K. police force dubbed "Blunkett's Stormtroopers", Scotland on Sunday 
revealed. (5) 

The Civil Contingencies Act was passed into law on 18 November 2004. I 
wrote two letters to my M.P. expressing my own concerns about the Act and was 
delighted to receive detailed replies from Ruth Kelly, Minister for the Cabinet 
Office on both occasions. She would not accept my reasoning that the important 
difference between the old and new legislation is that, whereas under the old Act, 
emergency powers were explicitly restricted to protecting public interests, the 
new Act makes no such stipulation, allowing them to be used to protect 
government or financial interests with the associated abuses of power that could 
entail. The exchange of letters is reproduced on 

100 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


General Tommy Franks, former leader of the coalition forces in Iraq says that 
if the United States is hit with a weapon of mass destruction that inflicts large 
casualties, the Constitution will likely be discarded in favor of a military form of 
government. The General issued the warning in the December 2003 issue of 
men's magazine Cigar Afficionado. If that happens, Franks said, "... the Western 
world, the free world, loses what it cherishes most, and that is freedom and 
liberty we've seen for a couple of hundred years in this grand experiment that we 
call democracy. "(6) 


The legislation for a massive internment operation in the U.S. was created 
when President Ronald Reagan was considering invading Nicaragua. He issued a 
series of executive orders that provided the Federal Emergency Management 
Agency (FEMA) with broad powers in the event of a "crisis" such as "violent and 
widespread internal dissent or national opposition against a U.S. military invasion 
abroad". From 1982-84 Colonel Oliver North assisted FEMA in drafting its civil 
defence preparations. Details of these plans emerged during the 1987 Iran- 
Contra scandal. They included executive orders providing for suspension of the 
constitution, the imposition of martial law, internment camps for over 21 million 
Americans, and the turning over of government to the president and FEMA. 
Disturbingly, the full facts and final contents of Mr Reagan's national plan remain 
uncertain. This is in part because President Bush took the unusual step of sealing 
the Reagan presidential papers in November 2002. (7) Recent photographs of 
several gigantic holding areas with guard towers and razor wire are available to 
view at http://www.apfn. org/apfn/camps.htm(7 

Some of the emergency measures made public by FEMA strongly indicate that 
martial law provisions drawn up by Col. Oliver North under Reagan will be fully 
operational. On 14 February 2003 the Washington Post reported that Washington 
DC area schools were planning to prevent parents from picking up their own 
children in the event of a terrorist attack. (8) In Bolton, Massachusetts, Nashoba 
regional school district told parents that they would not be allowed to pick up 
their children during a red alert. Not only will they deny parents their right to pick 
up their children, they will bus the children to a "secret location". (9) 

On 16 March 2003 a Ganett News Service headline read: 

Red Alert? Stay Home, Await Word. 
If the nation escalates to "red alert," which is the highest in the color-coded 
readiness against terror, you will be assumed by authorities to be the enemy if 
you so much as venture outside your home." (10) 

Furthermore the Justice Dept. under Tom Ridge has indicated that the 
military will be used by FEMA to police an emergency after they have revised the 
Posse Comitatus law. "Posse Comitatus will constantly be under review as we 
mature this command, as we do our exercises, as we interact with FEMA, F.B.I., 
and those lead federal agencies out there," said Pentagon spokesman General 
Eberhart in July 2002. (ii) 

The Posse Comitatus Act that restricts the use of the military in domestic law 
enforcement operations was enacted after the Civil War in response to the 

101 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

perceived misuse of federal troops who were charged with keeping order in the 
South. (12) However, documentary film-maker Alex Jones reveals that Posse 
Comitatus is already dead. In Texas, U.S. Army soldiers have been performing 
civilian law enforcement duties off base. According to a U.S. Army SWAT Entry 
Team Leader with the 38th MP unit at Fort Hood, the City of Killeen has been 
using the Fort Hood SWAT Team to serve warrants and arrest civilians for at least 
the past two years. (13) 


Under The Model State Emergency Health Powers Act drawn up for the 
Centers for Disease Control (CDC) in November 2001, in the event of a bio- 
terrorist attack, public health officials want to be able to close roads and airports, 
herd people into stadiums and, if necessary, quarantine entire infected cities. The 
"Mandatory Medical Examinations" section (602) of the law, persons refusing to 
submit to medical examinations and/or testings are liable for misdemeanors and 
forced isolation. If public health authorities suspect individuals may have been 
exposed to broadly defined infectious diseases, or otherwise pose a risk to public 
health, officials may issue detainment orders. In the case of an urban attack, or 
even one suspected, thousands of people could possibly be marshalled into 
isolation camps, according to the law. In this case, physicians, assisted by police, 
will be required to perform state medical examinations and tests. Under the law, 
"infectious diseases" are very broadly defined. An infectious disease may, or may 
not, be transmissible from person to person, animal to person, or insect to 
person. Isolation regulations in the law provide the State with power to 
commandeer private properties wherein individuals deemed infected, or exposed, 
might be housed under quarantine. Section 604 of the Act details vaccination and 
treatment protocols. Following these mandates, public health authorities may 
compel people to be inoculated and/or drugged by the State. Individuals refusing 
to be vaccinated or treated would be liable for a misdemeanor, subject to police 
arrest, isolation or quarantine. The "model legislation" exempts the State, its 
political subdivisions, including the Governor, public health authorities, the police, 
or other State officials, from liabilities associated with the death or injury to 
persons, or damage to property, as a result of complying with, or attempting to 
comply with, the Act. Furthermore, "Section 807" repeals existing state laws that 
are in conflict with the Act. Under this part, for instance, previous laws granting 
medical, religious, or philosophical exemptions to vaccination would be repealed. 


Because the all States did not pass this draft legislation unamended, on 13 
November 2002, the Homeland Security Act HR57 10, which created the 
Department of Homeland Security, contained a provision giving the Secretary of 
Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) power to order the forcible 
innoculation of all Americans with the Smallpox vaccine. He would only have to 
declare the "potential" of a bio-terror attack to invoke such power. (i6)(i7) 


Alex Jones videoed a major urban warfare training exercise in Oakland 
California in 1999. This is corroborated by the U.S. Defense Dept.'s own website 
on Operation Urban Warrior at . Troops from Britain, 

102 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Australia, and The Netherlands trained with U.S. military and police in direct 
violation of the Posse Comitatus law forbidding the military from assuming civilian 
police powers. Alex Jones commentates: 

During Operation Urban Warrior, actors posed as American citizens who 
were unconstitutionally seized from their homes by the military and police. These 
Americans were rounded up and confined behind barbed-wire. The actors were 
told to demand to be let free and state that they had rights. They were also told 
to demand food and water. The troops in turn were taught to ignore them and to 
order them to behave in an orderly fashion. "Civil disobedience will not be 
tolerated", was one of the many disturbing statements heard to emanate from 
the military's loud speakers. (18) 

The Defense Dept. states that part of the task was to "conduct a mid- 
intensity combat operation in an urban environment against a backdrop of civil 
unrest, and restore order. "(19) Urban Warfare training has taken place in 
numerous cities over the 1990's including San Antonio, Chicago, Kingsville 
(Texas), and Pittsburgh. 

It is now becoming clear exactly who is going to do the real dirty work against 
opponents of the New World Order. The proposal for a NATO " rapid reaction 
force " came from Trojan Horse Donald Rumsfeld in September 2002. (20) 
Theagreement to Rumsfeld's plan was achieved in Prague in November 2002. At 
the same time Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Bulgaria, Romania, Slovakia and 
Slovenia were invited to join NATO in 2004. (2i) Another three countries - 
Croatia, Albania, and Macedonia - hope to join the organization in the next few 
years. Who better to put Americans in detention camps than their old communist 
enemies? On 22nd September 2003, a NATO exercise in Galloway, Scotland saw 
Ukrainian troops pulling unsuspecting motorists out of their cars in a mock hunt 
for suspected terrorists. This formed part of a much larger NATO "crisis 
response" operation called Exercise Northern Lights, a training run for the new 
NATO Response Force, as it is now called, expected to be partially operational by 
October 2004 and fully operational by 2006.(22) The Galloway operation and a 
second operation in Turkey on 20 November 2003. According to the NATO 
website, "The forces rescued and evacuated the U.N. staff and civilians, 
established an embargo, engaged in counter-terrorist operations and a show of 
force". Interestingly, it occurred on the same day as terrorists bombed the British 
Embassy and HSBC bank in Istanbul, killing 27 people. (23) 

In order to justify bringing in foreign troops to combat domestic "terrorism", 
the U.S. Government will send the National Guard abroad to fight. In 2003, 
174,000 of the 350,000 reserves and national guard were on active duty .(24) 
Since the 1991 Gulf War, the U.S. Government has increased the number of 
National Guard and reserves in foreign operations. During the Vietnam War, only 
8,700 were deployed but over 75,000 Army and Air Guardsmen were called upon 
to help bring a swift end to Desert Storm in 1991. Since that time, the National 
Guard has seen the nature of its Federal mission change, with more frequent call 
ups in response to crises in Haiti, Bosnia, Kosovo, and the skies over Iraq. (25) 


Firearms: Everyone should have one and know how to use and clean it - it may 
just save your life. But more importantly there's nothing that demoralizes an invading 

103 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

enemy more than being shot at. - George Orwell, advice to the Home Guard, 1939. 
Source: BBC documentary, George Orwell: A Life In Pictures, 14 June 2003 

Whether guns cause or prevent crime and need to be controlled for this 
reason is a controversial issue for many people. However, it is clear from history 
that civilian ownership of firearms is a major deterant to tyrannical governments. 
This is why the current move towards gun control in the U.S., supported by the 
U.N. campaign against small arms, should be viewed with grave suspicion. 
Unarmed or disarmed citizens are far more likely to be murdered by 
governments than by common criminals or to die in wars. Gun control laws are 
often imposed by governments with murderous intent. 

Writing in The Arizona Journal of International & Comparative Law No. 3, 
483-535 (2000) Stephen Halbrook argues that German Jews and other German 
opponents of Hitler were not destined to be helpless and passive victims. The 
1928 Weimar Law on Firearms and Ammunition required the registration of most 
lawfully owned firearms, as do the laws of some American states. The Weimar 
registration programme provided the information which the Nazis needed to 
disarm the Jews and others considered untrustworthy. In November 1938, the 
Nazis passed their own Weapons Law which banned Jews from the firearms 
business and required surrender of all firearms and edged weapons. In the same 
month came The Night of the Broken Glass (Kristallnacht)--the infamous Nazi 
rampage against Germany's Jews. Aside from the Jews there was almost no 
resistance in Germany itself, because the Nazis had enjoyed years in which they 
could enforce the gun laws to ensure that no potential opponent of the regime 
had the means to resist. Under the Weimar Law, the German police were granted 
complete discretion to deny licenses to criminals or individuals the police deemed 
untrustworthy. The Nazi disarmament campaign began as soon as Hitler 
assumed power in 1933. Other European countries also had laws requiring police 
records to be kept on persons who possessed firearms. When the Nazis took over 
Czechoslovakia and Poland in 1939, it was a simple matter to identify gun 
owners. Many of them disappeared in the middle of the night along with political 
opponents. The invasion of Belgium, Holland and France in May 1940 was 
accompanied by a law called Regulations on Arms Possession in the Occupied 
Zone which ordered the surrender of all firearms and munitions on pain of death. 
Switzerland was the only country in Europe, indeed in the world, where every 
man had a military rifle in his home. Nazi invasion plans acknowledged the 
dissuasive nature of this armed populace. (26) 

In a review by David B. Kopel of the book entitled Lethal Laws, published by 
Jews for the Preservation of Firearms, Kopel gives a stark warning to advocates 
of gun control. All of the major tyrannical regimes of the twentieth century 
imposed restrictive gun laws on the populations before they murdered and 
terrorized them en masse. The countries examined were Ottoman Turkey, USSR, 
Nazi Germany, China, Guatemala, Uganda, and Cambodia. The same thing 
happened in Rwanda and the former Yugoslavia at the time the book was 

R.J. Rummel, the world's foremost scholar of the mass murders of the 20th 
century and finalist for 1996 Nobel Peace Prize, gives statistical dimension to 
state sponsored murder. Statistics of Democide, 1997, and Death by 
Government,1994, provide data on mass murder by governments throughout the 
20th century. In chapter 2 of Death by Government he defines the murder of 
civilians and POW's by governments - in contrast to soldiers dying in combat and 

104 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

civilians who are killed unintentionally during war - as " democide ": 

Democide's necessary and sufficient meaning is that of the intentional 
government killing of an unarmed or disarmed person or people, [emphasis 
added] (27) 

What is the track record of governments of undemocratic countries murdering 
unarmed citizens? According to table 1.6 in Death By Government, the average 
estimate of the total number of victims of government sponsored mass murder 
over the twentieth century was 169,202, 000. If the military and civilian deaths 
caused by war for the whole twentieth century are added, the death total only 
rises to an estimated 203,000,000.(28) 

The more alarming fact about Rummers statistics is that the ratio of 
governments murdering their own citizens to foreign citizens is approximately 3 
to 1. Rummel says that of the 169,202,000 democide deaths, 129,908,000 were 
domestic killings. The biggest murder of citizens by their own governments took 
place in Russia and China under Stalin and Mao. The Nazis killed mostly 
foreigners (estimate 20 million) and only about a million of their own. According 
to Rummel, the People's Republic of China killed a statistically insignificant 
number of foreigners but a median estimate of 35 million of their own between 
1945 and 1987. The USSR killed about 54 million of their own but only 7 million 
foreigners 1917-1987.(29) 

Equally important to our current predicament is Rummell's observation in 
Power Kills that democide is highly and inversely related to democracy and that 
democracies never make war on each other: 

There is one solution to each and the solution in each case is the same. It 
is to foster democratic freedom and to democratize coercive power and force. 
That is, mass killing and mass murder carried out by government is a result of 
indiscriminate, irresponsible power at the center. Or in terms of the title of this 
book, power kills. (30) 

The most powerful person and the driving force behind the New World Order 
in the U.S. for the last few decades has been David Rockefeller. In an article in 
the New York Times, 10 August 1973, he was quoted: 

Whatever the price of the Chinese Revolution, it has obviously succeeded 
not only in producing more efficient and dedicated administration, but also in 
fostering high morale and community of purpose. The social experiment in China 
under Chairman Mao's leadership is one of the most important and successful in 
human history. 

David Rockefeller still heads the CFR and Bilderberg group which are working 
to relinquish American national sovereignty to the United Nations. Stephen 
Rockefeller works with ex- KGB chief Mikhael Gorbachev to formulate and 
promote the radical U.N. environmental laws. Since 9/11, Western countries 
become less and less democratic every day at an alarming pace; this process is 
being coordinated internationally. Of the seven genocidal governments studied in 
Lethal Laws, not one announced its intention to its victims. All of the victims were 
told that they were being temporarily relocated or another lie in order to induce 
them not to resist. And one of the reasons that the lies were believed by so many 
people is that there are many governments throughout world history which have 
sent people on forced marches or other forms of forced relocation and not killed 

105 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

them. Currently, the Bush Administration is contemplating a draft of civilian 
professionals into the U.S. Army to be sent over to the Middle East. These are 
America's middle class - engineers, doctors, etc. It has consistently lied to its 
regular troops about the length of time they will stay in Iraq. At this time, it 
appears they will be there for years to come. Over three hundred thousand U.S. 
troops who have served in the Gulf Region since 1990 are now seriously ill with 
Gulf War Illness and tens of thousands more have died from it. 

Chapter 10 End Notes 

1. Terror laws are 'needless totalitarianism', BBC, London, 17 Sept. 2003. See politics/31 14552 .stm 

and Terror threat sparks new powers, 26 Nov. 2003. See politics/3236844.stm 

2. David Leppard, Police will run internet after terrorist attack, The Times Online, London, 

15 June 2003. See 
police will run internet after terrorist attack.htm 

3. 'Terror cordon' plan for UK cities, BBC, London, 2 Dec. 2002. See politics/26 123 19 .stm 

4. Peter Fray, London could be evacuated if attacked, The Sydney Morning Herald, 8 
Sept. 2003. See 

5. Ian Johnston, 'Blunkett's Stormtroopers' to open new front in war against terrorism, 
Scotland on Sunday, 10 Aug. 2003. See =873642003 

6. Martial Law Will Replace Constitution After Next Terror Attack, Newsmax, 21 Nov. 
2003. See martial.htm 

7. Ritt Goldstein, Foundations are in place for martial law in the US, Sydne Morning 
Herald, 27 July 2002 

8. David Cho, Schools Boost Preparations for Attack, Many Anti-Terror Plans Would Stop 
Parents From Picking Up Children, Washington Post, 14 February 2003. 

wp-dyn?paqename=article&.node=&contentId = 

9. Document sent by a parent to Alex Jones, radio talk show host in Austin TX. See sovietschoolspql.htm sovietschoolspq2.htm sovietschoolspq3.htm 

10. Tom Baldwin, Red Alert? Stay home await word, Gannett News Service, Trenton NJ, 

16 March 2003. See alert stay home await word 

11. Northern Command General Endorses Posse Comitatus Review, Newsmax, 22 July 
2002. See http://www.newsmax.eom/archives/articles/2002/7/22/01218.shtml 

12. Gene Healy, Misguided Mission for Military, The Cato Institute, 31 July 2002. See 

106 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

13. Martial Law Has Begun, Alex Jones. 


14. CDC Advances Totalitarian Legislation Under Guise of "Public Health", Tetrahedron, 
LLC, Health Science Communications, 9 Nov. 2001. See 

15. The Model State Emergency Health Powers Act, Draft Legislation as of December 
2001, The Center for Law and The Public's Health. See 

16. Congressman Ron Paul, U.S. House of Representatives, Oppose The New Homeland 
Security Bureaucracy, 13 Nov. 2002. See 

17. Section 304, Homeland Security Act, 2002. 


18. Alex Jones, Operation Urban Warrior, 

19. Gar Smith, One nation under guard, The San Francisco Bay Guardian, 10 March 1999. 

20. Rumsfeld Plans to Propose NATO Rapid Reaction Force, Defense Secretary Interview 
with CNN, 21 Sept. 2002. 

See copy on US Dept of State website 

21. Quick Guide: Nato, BBC, 19 Nov. 2003. 

See profiles/ 1 549072 .stm 

22. Ukrainian marines stop drivers. BBC, London, 23 Sept. 2003. 

and Scottish coast to host war games, BBC, London, 11 Sept. 2003. 

23. Response Force demonstrates capability in first exercise, NATO website. See 

24. Iraq effect shakes National Guard, Christian Science Monitor, 18 Sept. 2003. See 

25. National Guard Fact Sheet, National Guard website. See sheets/a rng .asp 

26. Stephen Halbrook, Nazi Firearms and the Disarming of the German Jews. 

See Stephen Halbrook's website for article at 


also reviewed by David Kopel and Richard Griffiths, Hitler's Control, The lessons of Nazi 

history. National Review Online 22 May 2003 

Halbrook's article is also a chapter in a book published by Jews for the Preservation of 

Firearms called Death By Gun Control. Halbrook cites a review by David Kopel of an 

earlier JPFA publication called Lethal Laws by Jay Simkin, Aaron Zelman, & Alan M. Rice. 

107 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

See and . 

27. published on-line at 

28. RJ. Rummel, Death By Government, New Brunswick, NJ.:Transaction Publishers, 

Table 1.6. See http://www.hawaii.edU/powerkills/DBG.TABl.6.GIF 

29. RJ. Rummel, Statistics of Democide: Genocide and Mass Murder Since 1900, 
Charlottesville, Virginia: Center for National Security Law, School of Law, University of 
Virginia, 1997; and Transaction Publishers, Rutgers University, Table 16A. Summary 
Democide Totals. See http://www.hawaii.edU/powerkills/SOD.TAB16A.l.GIF 

30. RJ. Rummel, Power Kills, Democracy as a Method of Nonviolence, New Brunswick, 

Transaction Publishers, 1997. See 

108 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 11 


war hysteria is continuous and universal in all countries, and such 
acts as raping, looting, the slaughter of children, the reduction of 
whole populations to slavery, and reprisals against prisoners which 
extend even to boiling and burying alive, are looked upon as normal, 
and, when they are committed by one's own side and not by the 
enemy, meritorious. 

- George Orwell, 1984, part 2, chapter 9 

The War on Terror is the chosen pretext for the global integration of police, 
intelligence and military functions. Since 9/11, there has been a global attack on 
civil liberties and a race to set up the international technological infrastructure for 
a high-tech feudal society. Governments across the world are promoting the idea 
that society must militarize itself in order to be free from terror, i.e. abandon 
moral convictions, sweep aside distinctions between foreign and domestic 
threats, and even the distinction between terrorism and ordinary crime. When a 
country is at war, their is no atrocity it will not justify in the name of victory. 
Once the legal and technological apparatus of totalitarianism is established, there 
exists the very real prospect of a permanent planetary dictatorship where human 
existence is micro-managed from cloud cuckoo land by a tiny ruling elite who are 
themselves above the law. 


The European globalists seized upon the Madrid train bombing of 11 March 
2004 to push forward key areas of E.U. judicial and security integration. Brussels 
responded with a 'counter-terrorism summit' which drafted 57 proposals on 
criminal justice, security, and terrorism. Britain had hitherto been reluctant to 
surrender judicial powers to Brussels, but following the summit, Whitehall 
signaled that the Government was preparing to drop its veto over important 
areas of judicial cooperation. (i) These included many proposals which were 

109 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

already on the table in Brussels: The establishment of an E.U. intelligence agency 
and E.U. security coordinator; an E.U. database of forensic material; the logging 
of all telecommunications; tracking all air travel in and out and within the E.U. 
(effectively an E.U. version of the U.S.'s controversial PNR, CAPPS II and US- 
VISIT plans); the fingerprinting of nearly everyone in the E.U. by the introduction 
of biometric passports and ID cards for citizens and the same for resident third 
country nationals; the development of the Schengen Information System (SIS) 
and Visa Information Systems (VIS) to store the new identification and visa data; 
and simplification of procedures for exchange of information - including personal 
information such as DNA, fingerprints and visa data - between intelligence and 
law enforcement agencies. (2) 

An analysis by StateWatch of London, concluded that 27 of the 57 proposals 

had little or nothing to do with tackling terrorism. 


The U.K. Government is moving to expand the use of mental health laws to 
control the wider population. The draft Mental health Bill published in June 2002, 
included plans to force mentally ill people living in the community to take their 
medication and proposals to detain dangerous people with severe personality 
disorders even if they have not committed a crime. (3) 'Seriouspersonality 
disorder' has no medical diagnosis. The Joint House of Commons and House of 
Lords Committee on Human Rights have serious reservations about some aspects 
of the draft: l)The compulsory detention of people for the protection of others 
when the people detained have never been charged with any criminal offence; 2) 
the breadth of circumstances in which a patient could be subjected to 
compulsory, non consensual treatment; 3) that part of current laws which 
prevents detention 'by reason of promiscuity or other immoral conduct, sexual 
deviancy or dependence on drugs or alcohol' has been omitted from the Bill. The 
committee warned that Nazi Germany and the U.S.S.R. were probably not the 
only countries in which socially or politically unacceptable behaviour was 
regarded as a manifestation of a 'disorder of the mind'. (4) 

In the U.S., Missouri dentist Charles Sell has waited in a federal prison for 
more than four years for trial on charges of Medicaid fraud. The delay is 
attributed to the Government's persistent argument that Sell is not mentally 
competent to stand trial unless he is forcibly drugged. He is, they say, suffering 
from delusions because he thought there was a Government effort to cover up 
his personal knowledge of the its culpability in the 1993 deaths at the Branch 
Davidian land near Waco, Texas. The state has diagnosed Sell as having what it 
calls a 'delusional disorder'. As an Army Reservist called up to serve as an expert 
in forensic dentistry, Dr. Sell was on the scene the day of the tragic fire. Other 
issues include accusations of Dr. Sell using politically incorrect swear words. The 
Government wants to make him competent by forcefully giving him powerful 
medicine. Dr. Sell doesn't want to be medicated since he's had bad reactions to 
similar drugs in the past. Also, one of the medicines that the Government might 
want to use on him is an experimental medicine that could kill him.(5)(6) 

The twentieth century's most tyrannical regimes pioneered the use of 
psychiatric 'treatment' against political dissidents. Vladimir Bukovsky spent 12 
years in Soviet prisons and psychiatric hospitals due to his outspoken opposition 
to communism. (7) Wherevermanifestations of dissidence couldn't be explained 

110 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

away as a legacy of the past, they were viewed as mental illness. One leading 
psychiatrist had incarcerated thousands of sane men in lunatic asylums on orders 
from the KGB. Drugs were administered as punishment for anti-social behaviour. 
These are not only painful but can have lasting side effects. Bukovsky said that a 
few of the doctors called the psychiatric hospital in which he was interned, 'our 
little Auschwitz. '(8) 



The 2003 Criminal Justice Act contains three areas of serious concern: 1) 
Removal of the right to trial by jury in complex fraud cases or where the judge 
and prosecution believe their is a risk of jury tampering 2) abolishing the double 
jeopardy makes all acquittals conditional; 3) the admissibility of previous 
convictions, acquittals and hearsay evidence. (9)(io)This is moving British justice 
towards a European style inquisitorial system, away from the traditional 
adversarial system. These measures are designed to harmonize the U.K. with the 
E.U. Corpus Juris proposal put forward in April 1997. CJ will set up a European 
Public Prosecutor on the continental inquisitorial model, who will have over-riding 
jurisdiction throughout Europe to instruct national judges to issue arrest warrants 
against suspects and have them held in custody for nine months pending 
investigation (or transported to other countries in Europe) with no obligation to 
produce prosecution evidence and no right to a public hearing during this time. 
The cases are then to be tried by special courts, consisting of professional judges 
and excluding simple jurors and lay magistrates. The E.U. public prosecutor is 
responsible for both investigation and prosecution of the crimes. Our rights of 
habeas corpus established in 1679 and trial by jury established by Magna Carta 
in 1215 are to be nullified. Furthermore, the European Arrest Warrant removes 
the need for any formal extradition procedures for 32 crimes, some of which are 
not even crimes in U.K. law. These include xenophobia and racism which 
encompass criticism of the E.U.. The Corpus Juris manual itself, (Sous la direction 
de Mireille Delmas-Marty, ISBN 2-7178-3344-7, p40, para 3), informs us that: 
"[Corpus Juris is] designed to ensure, in a largely unified European legal area, a 
fairer, simpler and more efficient system of repression. "(H)(i2)(i3)(i4)(i5) 

Under the Anti-Terrorism, Crime and Security Act 2001, the Home Secretary 
could order that a foreign national be detained indefinitely on suspicion that he 
was either a terrorist or a threat to national security. However, in December 
2004, the law lords ruled that these powers contravened the European 
Convention on Human Rights and ordered the release of twelve foreign nationals 
who could otherwise have been detained in prison indefinitely. In response, the 
Government introduced the Prevention of Terrorism Bill, which gives the Home 
Secretary power to impose 'control orders' on both British and foreign terror 
suspects. Instead of holding suspects in prison, the control orders could: Impose 
house arrest or other restrictions on movements, including electronic tagging; 
restrict association and communication with specified people; restrict use of 
telephones and the internet. This overturns 800 years of British legal history by 
taking away both habeus corpus and trial by jury, and giving judicial powers to 
the Home Secretary! Unsurprisingly it faces a stormy passage through both 
Houses of Parliament. (16) 
On 31 March 2003, Home Secretary David Blunkett, signed an extradition 

111 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

treaty on behalf of the U.K. with his U.S. counterpart, Attorney General John 
Ashcroft. This ostensibly brings the U.S. into line with procedures between 
European countries. Parliament was not consulted at all and the text was not 
available until the end of May. Like the European Arrest Warrant, it removes the 
requirement on the U.S. to provide prima facie evidence when requesting the 
extradition of people from the U.K., although that requirement remains when the 
U.K. makes the request of the U.S..(i7) 


Section 412 of the U.S.A. Patriot Act allows for the indefinite detention of non- 
citizens. The Attorney General has unprecedented new power to order their 
detention based on a certification that he has reasonable grounds to believe a 
non-citizen endangers national security. Worse still, if no other country will 
accept them, they can be detained indefinitely in the U.S. without trial. In 
January 2003, a decision by the 4th U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals in Richmond, 
Va. on the case of Yaser Esam Hamdi, affirmed the Government's authority to 
detain indefinitely American citizens captured in foreign battles or those who 
participate in terrorist attacks against U.S. interests abroad. (i8)The court did not 
address questions about U.S. citizens arrested as enemy combatants in the U.S. 
Furthermore, in June 2003, a U.S Federal Court ruled that the Government can 
keep secret the names of the hundreds of foreigners detained since 9/ll.(i9)The 
Government has classified as an 'enemy combatant', Jose Padilla of Chicago, who 
was arrested at O'Hare Airport on suspicion of plotting domestic terrorism after 
returning from Pakistan. This unconstitutional detention still awaits judicial review 


Judicial Review of Padilla's case will be void if Ashcroft's 'Patriot Act II' is 
passed because it gives him power to designate U.S. citizens 'enemy combatants' 
for terrorist activity carried out in the U.S.. Section 501 (Expatriation of 
Terrorists) expands the 'enemy combatant' definition to all American citizens who 
'may' have violated any provision of section 802 of the first Patriot Act. Section 
101 will also designate individual American terrorists as 'foreign powers' and 
again strip them of all rights under the 'enemy combatant' designation. Under 
section 802 of Patriot Act I, the term v domestic terrorism' means activities that, 
' (A) involve acts dangerous to human life that are a violation of the criminal laws 
of the United States or of any State; v (B) appear to be intended, ' (i) to 
intimidate or coerce a civilian population; N (ii) to influence the policy of a 
government by intimidation or coercion; or v (iii) to affect the conduct of a 
government by mass destruction, assassination, or kidnapping; and '(C) occur 
primarily within the territorial jurisdiction of the United States. (2i) Not only has 
the Justice Department stated they can infer from conduct that someone is not a 
U.S. citizen but also under section 201 of 'Patriot Act II', it is a criminal act for 
any member of the Government or any citizen to release any information 
concerning the incarceration or whereabouts of detainees. It also states that law 
enforcement does not even have to tell the press who they have arrested and 
they never have to release their names. Therefore section 501 of 'Patriot Act IF 
means that a U.S. citizen engaging in lawful activities can be grabbed off the 
street and thrown into a van never to be seen with absolutely no right of appeal! 


Section 322 of ' Patriot Act II' removes Congress from the extradition process 
and allows officers of the Homeland Security complex to extradite American 

112 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

citizens anywhere they wish. It also allows Homeland Security to secretly take 
individuals out of foreign countries. 

A draft of the bill was leaked to Washington D.C. watchdog, The Center For 
Public Integrity, in January 2003. It caused such a furore that the bill was 
immediately shelved. However there are three ways the Government might use 
to get it passed: 1) After the next major terror attack, it will be rushed into law 
by panicked legislators in the same way Patriot Act I was passed in the 
immediate aftermath of 9/11; 2) the Government will declare martial law and 
impose the legislation without authority from Congress; 3) the bill will be broken 
down into pieces and tacked onto other legislation. 

On 12 June 2003 the The Guardian newspaper reported that U.S. military 
officials are making preparations for the trial and possible execution of captives 
held in Guantanamo Bay, including the construction of a death chamber. A 
building at the detention camp in Cuba for suspected Al-Qaida members is being 
renovated to serve as a courtroom for military tribunals, signaling that the U.S. is 
moving towards bringing charges against some of the prisoners. (24) According to 
The Mail on Sunday: 

American law professor Jonathan Turley, who has led U.S. civil rights group 
protests against the military tribunals planned to hear cases at Guantanamo Bay, 
said: "It is not surprising the authorities are building a death row because they 
have said they plan to try capital cases before these tribunals. "This camp was 
created to execute people. The administration has no interest in long-term prison 
sentences for people it regards as hard-core terrorists. "(25) 

In June 2004, The Washington Post published on its web site an internal White 
House memo from 1st August 2002, signed by then Assistant Attorney General 
Jay S. Bybee, which argued darkly that torturing al-Qaida captives "may be 
justified" and that international laws against torture may be unconstitutional if 
applied to interrogations" conducted under President Bush. The memo then 
continued for 50 pages to make the case for the use of torture. The Bybee memo 
was clearly the basis for the working-group report on detainee interrogations 
presented to Defense Secretary Donald H. Rumsfeld a year later. (26)(27) 

The torture techniques being practiced on teenage goat-herders from 
Afghanistan(28) are a first step towards using torture on U.S. citizens who are 
deemed 'enemy combatants' i.e. anybody at all. Pictures of prisoners shackled, 
bound and with bags over their heads, serves to de-sensitize the public, police 
and military to the most disgusting but necessary instrument of dictatorship. The 
notion that torture is acceptable is also being heavily promoted in the 
mainstream American media. 


The purpose of creating crimes of 'domestic terrorism', is to abolish civil rights 
and to dramatically increase the power of government. This this was forseen in a 
report published by the U.S. Army War College in July 1994, entitled Revolution 
in Military Affairs and Conflicts Short of War: 

American leaders popularized a new, more inclusive concept of national security. 
No distinction—legal or otherwise—was drawn between internal and external threats. 
In the interdependent 21st century world, such a differentiation was dangerously 

113 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

nostalgic. The new concept of security also included ecological, public health, 
electronic, psychological, and economic threats. Illegal immigrants carrying resistant 
strains of disease were considered every bit as dangerous as enemy soldiers. Actions 
which damaged the global ecology, even if they occurred outside the nominal borders 
of the United States, were seen as security threats which should be stopped by force 
if necessary. Computer hackers were enemies.(29) 


The U.K. 2000 Terrorism Act expands the definition of terrorism to include 
serious damage to property or computer systems, designed to intimidate a 
section of the public, and which is carried out for political, religious or ideological 
reasons. This could include animal rights activism, tree protesters and even some 
kinds of industrial action. The Home Secretary is afforded powers to designate 
and proscribe 'terrorist' organizations. This is a very significant power because of 
the severe penalties imposed for anyone involved or associated with these 
groups. Amnesty International have pointed out the potential for repressive 
foreign governments to press for their political enemies to be so designated. 
Membership of a proscribed organization carries a ten year prison sentence. 
Organizing or addressing a meeting which includes members of a proscribed 
group is an offence under section 12. This even criminalizes independent third 
parties such as journalists who arrange private meetings which include a member 
of proscribed group. Section 56 criminalizes any level of activity within a 
proscribed group even if it has nothing to do with terrorism. It carries a 
maximum sentence of life imprisonment. Section 57 imposes ten years 
imprisonment for possessing something which could be construed as being 
intended for use in terrorist activities. 

Section 44 of the Terrorism Act allows police limited power to stop and 
search people for articles 'of a kind which could be used in connection with 
terrorism'. The important issues are that the police do not have to demonstrate 
any grounds for reasonable suspicion whereas The Police and Criminal Evidence 
Act (PACE) allows a constable stop and search authority if they are acting on 
reasonable grounds. Secondly if the constable does find the items in question, 
and if there is reasonable suspicion that they will be used for terrorist purposes, 
they may be seized and retained. (30) Section 44 notices have been used by police 
to stop and search protesters at RAF Fairford during the Iraq war and more 
recently against protesters at an international arms fair in London. (3i) 


Article 1 of the Framework Decision on Combating Terrorism December 2001 

[offences] which are intentionally committed by an individual or a group against 
one or more countries, their institutions or people with the aim of intimidating them 
and seriously altering or destroying the political, economic or social structures of 
those countries will be punishable as terrorist offences. 

Article 4 extends the definition to include 'instigating, aiding, abetting or 
attempting to commit a terrorist offence' and Article 5m., 'Promoting of, 
supporting of or participation in a terrorist group.' Explanatory notes state that 

114 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Article 3., defining terrorist offences 'could include, for instance, urban violence'. 
The inclusion in Article 3f. of the 'unlawful seizure of or damage to state or 
government facilities, means of public transport, infrastructure facilities, places of 
public use, and property' (property covers public and private) could embrace a 
wide range of demonstration and protests, ranging from the non-violent 
Greenham Common protests against a U.S. cruise missile base in the U.K., to the 
anti-globalization protests in Genoa. The phrase in Article 3h., 'endangering 
people, property, animals or the environment', could refer, for example, to 
animal right protests. (32) 

Under Article 5. the prison sentences imposed are long: 51., Directing a 
terrorist group 15 years; and 5m., promoting of, supporting of or participation in 
a terrorist group, 7 years. Terrorists will also lose their right to vote. 

The E.U. anti-terrorism laws are being directed against protesters at E.U. 
summits and other international conferences. Following the arrest and shooting 
of protesters at the E.U. summit in Gothenberg 14-16 June 2001, a Police 
Cooperation Working Party met in Brussels on 4 July. This was quickly followed 
by a series of meetings by the E.U. Council's Justice and Home Affairs committee 
who requested that member states participate in i) surveillance of protest groups 
ii) the plan to create a new database on the Schengen Information System (SIS) 
on protestors; iii) the plan agreed to bring together para-military police units 
(eg: carabineri, CRS, Tactical Support Groups for EU Summits and international 
meetings. (33) 


Under section 802. of the Patriot Act , the term 'domestic terrorism' means 
activities that, v (A) involve acts dangerous to human life that are a violation of 
the criminal laws of the United States or of any State; ' (B) appear to be 
intended/ (i) to intimidate or coerce a civilian population; ' (ii) to influence the 
policy of a government by intimidation or coercion; or ' (iii) to affect the conduct 
of a government by mass destruction, assassination, or kidnapping; and '(C) 
occur primarily within the territorial jurisdiction of the United States.' 

Also under section 802, the U.S. Government can bankrupt political 
organizations it asserts are involved in domestic terrorism. The government can 
seize and/or freeze the assets on the mere assertion that there is probable cause 
to believe that the assets were involved in domestic terrorism. The assets are 
seized before a person is given a hearing, and often without notice. In order to 
permanently forfeit the assets, the Government must go before a court, but at a 
civil hearing, and it is only required to prove that the assets were involved in 
terrorism by a preponderance of the evidence. Section 806 is so broadly defined 
that it could include anyone who supported a terrorist group in any way .(34) 

Section 301-306 of 'Patriot Act II' (Terrorist Identification Database) 
authorizes a national database of suspected terrorists and radically expands the 
database to include anyone associated with suspected terrorist groups and 
anyone involved in crimes or having supported any group designated as terrorist. 
These sections also set up a national DNA database for anyone on probation or 
who has been on probation for any crime, and orders State governments to 
collect the DNA for the Federal government. (28) Section 402 is titled "Providing 
Material Support to Terrorism." The section reads that there is no requirement to 
show that the individual even had the intent to aid terrorists. Section 411 
expands crimes that are punishable by death. Again, they point to Section 802 of 

115 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

the first Patriot Act and state that any terrorist act or support of terrorist act can 
result in the death penalty. Section 421 increases penalties for terrorist financing. 
This section states that any type of financial activity connected to terrorism will 
result to time in prison and $10-50,000 fines per violation. (35)(36) 

A flyer created by the Phoenix FBI suggests that police officers contact the 
Joint Terrorism Task Force if they encounter any of the following persons (a 
partial list): 

• Right Wing Extremists: Defenders of U.S. Constitution against federal 
government and the U.N. (Super Patriots), 

• Left Wing Terrorism: Political motivation is usually Marxist/Leninist 

• Common Law Movement Proponents: make numerous references to the 
U.S. constitution, attempt to police the police. 

• Single Issue Terrorist: Animal Rights, Eco-terrorism, Lone individuals, 
Cyber penetration, violent anti-abortion extremism 

• Hate Groups: Black separatists, Christian Identity. (37) 

This is not an isolated incident. Alex Jones' film 911:The Road To Tyranny, 
shows Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) teaching a class of police 
officers that terrorists include the Founding Fathers of America, gun owners, 
Christians and home schoolers. (38) 

The New York Times announced on 17 September 2003 that there is to be a 
database of 100,000 suspected terrorists. It will be run jointly by the CIA, FBI, 
State Dept. and Dept. Homeland Security. Justice Dept. officials said they 
expected the centre to be operating by December. It will track not only 
suspected foreign terrorists but also Americans tied to domestic events like 
violence at abortion clinics. (39) 



The 2001 Anti-Terrorism, Crime and Security Act enables the police and 
security services to go through personal information held by 'public authorities', 
e.g. medical records, bank statements, school records, Inland Revenue files, 
even though no crime (let alone terrorist offence) has been committed or even 
suspected. No judicial oversight is required and indeed the information can be 
volunteered by the public bodies on a spontaneous basis. (40) 'Public authority ' is 
defined by the 1998 Human Rights Act (6)(3) as (a) a court or tribunal, and (b) 
any person whose functions are of a public nature. (4i) 

Section 19 of the 2000 Terrorism Act makes it a criminal offence punishable 
by up to five years in prison, not to disclose to the police information that creates 
suspicion of terrorist activity when discovered in the course of one's ' trade, 
profession, business or employment'. (42) 

On 24 November 2004, the Government introduced the Serious Organised 
Crime and Police Bill, which sets up a an FBI-style Serious Organized Crimes 
Agency (SOCA). This Bill is still being debated, but the Fourth Report of the Joint 
Committee on Human Rights raises serious concerns over surveillance powers 
granted to the Agency. It confers broad powers to SOCA to gather, store and 
analyse information relating to crime generally not just serious crime. It also 

116 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

confers broad powers over the kinds of information SOCA gathers, and the 
disclosure of that information both to the Agency, and by the Agency to other 
Government departments. 

These laws reflects a shift in philosophy towards the E.U. Corpus Juris model, 
in which one is presumed guilty until proven innocent and therefore deserving of 
continuous surveillance. (43) 


Section 358 of the Patriot Act requires that, in addition to law enforcement, 
intelligence agencies such as the CIA also receive suspicious activity reports from 
financial institutions. These reports are usually about wholly domestic 
transactions of people in the United States, and do not relate to foreign 
intelligence information. In addition, Section 358 allows law enforcement and 
intelligence agencies to get easy access to individual credit reports in secret. 
There is to be no judicial review and no notice to the person to whom the records 
relate. (44) 

Section 215 allows the FBI to force anyone at all - including doctors, libraries, 
bookstores, universities, and internet service providers - to turn over records on 
their clients or customers. The FBI does not even have to show a reasonable 
suspicion to a judge that the records are related to criminal activity, much less 
the requirement for 'probable cause' that is listed in the Fourth Amendment to 
the Constitution. Judicial oversight of these new powers is essentially non- 
existent. All the Government needs to do is make the broad assertion that the 
request is related to an ongoing terrorism or foreign intelligence investigation. A 
person or organization forced to turn over records is prohibited from disclosing 
the search to anyone. As a result of this gag order, the subjects of surveillance 
never even find out that their personal records have been examined by the 
government. Section 213 expands the Government's ability to search private 
property with a warrant but without notice to the owner. This means that law 
enforcement agents can enter a house, apartment or office with a search warrant 
when the occupants are away, search through their property, take photographs, 
download files off their computer and in some cases even seize property and not 
tell them until later. The Patriot Act also changes the law to allow wiretaps and 
searches without showing probable cause when 'a significant purpose' is 
intelligence gathering for regular domestic criminal cases. It also expands the use 
of warrantless wiretaps to include lists of websites visited and email headers.(45) 

Section 106 of 'Patriot Act II' states that Government agents must be given 
immunity for carrying out warrantless searches of private property. This section 
throws out the entire Fourth Amendment against unreasonable searches and 
seizures. Section 123 restates that the Government no longer needs warrants 
and that the investigations can be a giant dragnet-style sweep. Section 126 
grants the Government the right to mine the entire spectrum of public and 
private sector information from bank records to educational and medical records. 
This is the enacting law to allow computers to break down all walls of privacy. 
The Government states that they must look at everything to 'determine' if 
individuals or groups might have a connection to terrorist groups. From cradle to 
grave, all Americans will be guilty and never proven innocent. Section 301-306 
sets up national databases of suspected terrorists complete with DNA samples. 
The database will also be used to 'stop other unlawful activities'. It will share the 
information with state, local and foreign agencies for the same purposes. Section 

117 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

313 provides liability protection for businesses, especially big businesses that spy 
on their customers for Homeland Security, violating their privacy agreements. (46) 

The Intelligence Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 2004 became Public Law 
No: 108-177 on 13 December 2003.(47) It achieved one of the objectives of 
'Patriot Act II' by removing the need of the FBI to obtain a warrant before 
conducting searches of third party information. Congressman Ron Paul made a 
speech against the bill in November: 

I am referring to the stealth addition of language drastically expanding 
FBI powers to secretly and without court order snoop into the business and 
financial transactions of American citizens. These expanded internal police 
powers will enable the FBI to demand transaction records from businesses, 
including auto dealers, travel agents, pawnbrokers and more, without the 
approval or knowledge of a judge or grand jury. This was written into the bill 
at the 11th hour over the objections of members of the Senate Judiciary 
Committee, which would normally have jurisdiction over the FBI. The 
Judiciary Committee was frozen out of the process. It appears we are 
witnessing a stealth enactment of the enormously unpopular "Patriot II" 
legislation that was first leaked several months ago. Perhaps the national 
outcry when a draft of the Patriot II act was leaked has led its supporters to 
enact it one piece at a time in secret. Whatever the case, this is outrageous 
and unacceptable. (48) 



Section 312 of 'Patriot Act II' gives immunity to law enforcement engaging in 
spying operations against the American people and would place substantial 
restrictions on court injunctions against Federal violations of civil rights across 
the board. Section 205 allows top Federal officials to keep all their financial 
dealings secret, and anyone investigating them can be considered a terrorist. (49) 

Section 304 of The Homeland Security Act removes liability from anyone 
involved in administering the smallpox vaccine and other bioterrorist 
countermeasures: Manufacturers and distributors of countermeasures, hospitals, 
clinics, and other healthcare entities under whose auspices the countermeasures 
are administered, and licensed health care professionals or other individuals 
authorized to administer the countermeasures under state law ("qualified 
persons"). (50) 

A study by the Defense Dept.'s Inspector General found that the Pentagon 
couldn't properly account for more than a trillion dollars in monies spent in year 


Article 1, chapter 1 of Protocol on the Privileges and Immunities of the E.U. 
states that '...premises and buildings of the Communities shall be exempt from 
search, requisition, confiscation or expropriation, and their archives shall be 
inviolable'. Article 12 of Chapter 5 states, 'In the territory of each member state 
and whatever their nationality, officials and other servants of the Communities 
shall.... be immune from legal proceedings in respect of acts performed by them 

118 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

in their official capacity, including their words (spoken or written). They shall 
continue to enjoy this immunity after they have ceased to hold office'. Thus no 
buildings or offices, filing cabinets, archives or bottom drawers belonging to the 
E.U., wherever they are located, can be snooped, searched or inspected EVER. 
These two exemptions alone place the staff and premises of the E.U., in their 
official capacities, completely above the law. (52) 

The European police force, Europol, is included in this legal exemption. Their 
officials are immune from prosecution and its files cannot be subpoenaed by any 
court. It is based in the old fortified Gestapo building in The Hague. Article 8 of 
the Treaty of Amsterdam, signed into law via British Statutory Instrument 
2973:1997, concerning Europol officers, declares that/such persons shall enjoy 
immunity from suit and legal process in respect of acts, including words written 
or spoken, done by them in the exercise of their official functions...' (53)(54) 

The proof of these incredible statements came in 1999, when the entire E.U. 
Commission resigned, having been exposed for fraud, yet nobody was 
prosecuted. The E.U. has been unable to sign off its accounts for the last ten 
years and an estimated 5-8% of its £63 billion budget disappears in fraud and 
mismanagement every year. (55)(56) Over 90% of the budget cannot be properly 
accounted for. (57) 

British MEP Theresa Villiers reports that the problem with the Commission's 
accounts was highlighted by the decision in 2002 by its Chief Accountant, Marta 
Andreasen, to go public about the total absence of genuine accounting 
procedures. The Commission was not even using the most basic double entry 
bookkeeping - in widespread use in Europe since the Renaissance - and used by 
virtually every company from British Petroleum to the local sweetshop. 
Andreasen uncovered these facts within weeks of arriving at her post at the 
European Commission. She quickly approached her bosses, pointing out the very 
serious problems which she had found and asked for change. She was told that it 
was her job to sign off on the accounts and if she did not do so, she would be 
sacked. When she refused to be silenced, the European Commission suspended 
her and subjected her to a petty campaign of persecution. And who was the man 
leading this campaign ? None other than former British Labour Party leader, Neil 
Kinnock, a member of the disgraced Santer Commission which was forced to 
resign in 1999, and who was subsequently re-appointed as Commissioner in 
charge of tackling E.U. fraud. (58)(59) 


In February 2005, Amnesty International put out a press release concerning 
the pending enquiry into the murder of human rights lawyer, Patrick Finucane, in 
which the British Government is alleged to have collaborated as part of its anti- 
terrorism strategy in Northern Ireland : 

The UK government has reneged on its promise to act on the recommendation of 
Justice Cory, a former Canadian Supreme Court judge, that a public inquiry be held in 
the case of Patrick Finucane. Instead it has stated that Patrick Finucane's case would 
be the subject of an inquiry under the new Inquiries Bill now going through 
parliament. The government has also stated that the Bill aims to take account of "the 
requirements of national security" 

119 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

...Under the Inquiries Bill: 

• the inquiry and its terms of reference would be decided by the executive; no 
independent parliamentary scrutiny of these decisions would be allowed; 

• the chair of the inquiry would be appointed by the executive and the executive 
would have the discretion to sack any member of the inquiry; 

• the decision on whether the inquiry, or any individual hearings, would be held 
in public or private would be taken by the executive; 

• the decision to issue restrictive notices to block disclosure of evidence would 
be taken by the executive; 

• the final report of the inquiry would be published at the executive's discretion 
and crucial evidence could be omitted at the executive's discretion, "in the 
public interest". (60) 

Chapter 11 End Notes 

1. Richard Norton-Taylor, EU set to agree sweeping counter-terror policies, The Guardian, 
25 March 2004. 

See http : //www .guardian .co. uk/eu/story/0, 7369, 1177349, 00 .htm I? = rss 

2. StateWatch, Scoreboard on post-Madrid counter-terrorism plans, 23 March 2004. 

3. Milburn promises Mental Health Bill, BBC, London, 14 Nov. 2002. See promises mental health bill 

4. Mental health rights fears, BBC, London, 11 Nov. 2002. See health rights fears 

5. Robert B. Bluey, Forced Drugging Case Headed to Supreme Court,, 29 
Nov. 2002. 


forced drugging case headed to supreme court 

6. Michael Arnold Glueck, M.D. and Robert J. Cihak M.D., American Conscience: The Saga 
of Dr. Charles Sell, Newsmax, 26 March 2003. See 

7. Edmund Conway, Don't pay TV licence fee, campaigners urge viewers, The Daily 
Telegraph, London, 08 Nov. 2002. See 

8. Vladimir Bukovsky, To Build A Castle: My life as a Dissenter, 1978, p. 196. 
See http://www.roca.Org/OA/5/5e.htm 

9. Criminal Justice: Battle Against the Bill, Liberty. See 

10. Criminal Justice Act, 2003, Part 7. See 

11. Phillip Day, Are You Furious and Paddling Vet? The Campaign For Truth in Europe. 

120 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

12. Commentary, Corpus Juris (a euro-sceptic website), 01 Jan. 1999 

13. Philip Johnston, Britons face extradition for 'thought crime' on net, The Daily 
Telegraph, 18 Feb. 2003. See 

14. Philip Johnston, Blair accused of treason over Europe, The Daily Telegraph, London, 
21 Sept. 2000. See 

main.ihtml?xml = %2Fnews%2F2000%2F09%2F21%2Fnblur221.xml& 
secu reRef resh = true& req uested = 56786 

15. Petrina Holdsworth, Bye Bye British legal System, UK Independence Party website. 
See comment info O.html 

16. Restrictions that UK suspects may face, BBC News online, 27 Feb 2005. See 

17. New UK-US Extradition Treaty, Statewatch website, analysis no 18. 2003. See 

18. U.S. Can Hold Citizens as Combatants, Fox News website, 08 Jan. 2003. See alert 010803 combatants.html 

19. US terror arrests to remain secret, BBC, London, 17 June 2003. See terror arrests to remain secret 

20. Charles Lane, In Terror War, 2nd Track for Suspects Those Designated 'Combatants' 
Lose Legal Protections, Washington Post, 1 Dec. 2002. See terror war 2nd track for suspects 

21. How the USA PATRIOT Act redefines "Domestic Terrorism" 
American Civil Liberties Union website, 6 Dec 2002 


22. Alex Jones, A Brief Analysis of the Domestic Security Enhancement Act 2003, Also 
Known as Patriot Act II, 10 Feb 2003. See 

23. Patriot Act II, draft version leaked to the Center for Public Integrity on 9 Jan. 2003. 
Available to download in full at: 
report.asp?ReportID=502&Ll = 10&L2 = 10&L3 = 0&L4=0&L5 = 

24. David Teather, US plans for executions at Guantanamo, The Guardian, London, 12 
June 2003, plans for executions at quantanamo.htm 

25. US plans death camp,, 26 May 03. 

See plans death camp.htm 

26. Robert Scheer, Conservatives put Bush above law,, 17 June 2004 

27. Mark Sherman, White House Won't Release Gonzales Papers, The Guardian, 6 
January 2005, 1280, -47 15334, 00. htm I 

121 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

28. Duncan Campbell, Afghan prisoners beaten to death at US military interrogation base 
The Guardian, London, 7 March 2003. 

See, 3604, 909 164, 00 .htm I 

29. Revolution in Military Affairs and Conflict Short of War . pl2, July 1994, U.S. Army 
War College. See 

30. Anti-Terrorism Legislation in The United Kingdom, Liberty, 2003. 
resources/publications/pdf-documents/a nti-terrornew.pdf 

31. Police questioned over terror act use, BBC, London, 10 Sept. 2003 

32. EU to adopt new laws on terrorism, Statewatch, 2003. See 

33. Conclusions adopted by the Council (Justice and Home Affairs) and the 
representatives of the member states on 13 July 2001 on security at meetings of the 
European Council and other comparable events, doc no 10916/01, 16. 7. 01; also Draft 
Conclusions on security at meetings of the European Council and other comparable 
events, doc no 

10731/01 and Rev 1, 10 & 11.7.01. See Statewatch article: The "enemy within" :EU plans 
the surveillance of protestors and the criminalization of protests 

Also: Initiative by the Kingdom of Spain for the adoption of a Council 
Recommendation on the introduction of a standard form for exchanging 
information on terrorists, Brussels, 29 May 2002 5712/6/02 REV 6. 

34. ACLU, op cit. 

see http://www.aclu.orq/NationalSecurity/NationalSecurity.cfm?ID=11437&c=lll 

35. Charles Lewis and Adam Mayle, Special Report, Justice Dept. Drafts Sweeping 
Expansion of Anti-Terrorism Act Center Publishes Secret Draft of 'Patriot II' Legislation, 
The Center for Public Integrity, January 2003. See 

ReportID=502&Ll = 10&L2 = 10&L3 = 0&L4=0&L5 = 

36. Alex Jones, op cit. 

37. This FBI Flyer is available to view at: 

38. 911: The Road To Tyranny, a documentary film by Alex Jones. See 

39. Eric Lichtblau, Administration Creates Center for Master Terror 'Watch List', New York 
Times, 16 Sept 2003. See 

administration creates center for master terror watchlist 

40. Liberty, op cit. 

41. U.K. Human Rights Act 1998, Chapter 42. 

122 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

See at 

42. Liberty op cit., p. 13 

43. Fourth Report of the Joint Committee on Human Rights, Serious Organised Crime and 
Police Bill, 12 January 2005. See 

44. How the Anti-Terrorism Bill Puts Financial Privacy at Risk, ACLU website 
23 October 2001. 

See http://www.aclu.oro/NationalSecurity/NationalSecurity.cfm?ID=9147&c=lll 

45. Surveillance Under the USA PATRIOT Act, ACLU website. See 

46. Alex Jones, op cit. 

47. Intelligence Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 2004, H.R.2417, 108th Congress. 
See http://thomas.loc.gOv/cqi-bin/query/z7cl08:H.R.2417 : 

48. Ron Paul, Congressman for Texas, speech in the House of Representatives, 20 Nov. 
2003. See cr/h 112203 .htm I 

49. Alex Jones, op cit. 

50. Guidance for the Healthcare Community Concerning Section 304 of the Homeland 
Security Act, CDC website. See 

51. Tom Abate, Military Waste Under Fire, $1 Trillion Missing - Bush targets Pentagon 
Accounting, San Francisco Chronicle, 18 May 2003. See 

52. Philip Day, op cit. 

53. Ibid. 

54. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, EU police force could be a repressive monster, says report, 
The Daily Telegraph, 31 Jan. 2001. 

main.ihtml?xml = %2Fnews%2F2001%2F01%2F31%2Fweup01.xml 

55. Theresa Villiers MEP, Tackling Fraud And Mismanagement In The EU, 28 April 2003. 

http://vil I record .jsp?type = news&ID= 138 

Also, Top financial watchdog slams EU accounts system, The EU See news.html 

56. EU Accounts - A decade of failure,, 15 November 2004 
http://www. conservatives. com/tile. do?def= news. story. page&obj_id = 117282 

57. EU accounts fail to pass muster, BBC News on-line, 18 November 2003. See 

58. Theresa Villiers MEP, Cleaning Up The Commission. See 
http://www.theresa-villiers. com/record .isp?type=issue8JD=8 

59. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, Tory MEPs urge Kinnock to resign, The Daily Telegraph, 
123 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

London,^ March 2003. See 


60. Amnesty International Press Release, AI Index: EUR 45/003/2005 (Public), News 

Service No: 034,11 February 2005 

http://web.amnesty .org/1 ibrary/index/enqEUR450032005?open&of=enq-qbr 

Chapter 12 


[T]he capacity to assert social and political control over the 
individual will vastly increase. It will soon be possible to assert almost 
continuous surveillance over every citizen and to maintain up-to-date, 
complete files, containing even the most personal information about 
the health or personal behavior of the citizen in addition to more 
customary data. These files will be subject to instantaneous retrieval 
by the authorities. 

- Between Two Ages- America's Role in the Technetronic Era, 1970. 
Zbigniew Brzezinski, first director of The Trilateral Commission 1973-1976 and 
U.S. National Security Advisor 1977-1981. 
Source:The Rand Corporation website 

In an interview with The Times newspaper, the U.K. Information 
Commissioner, Richard Thomas, expressed his concern that "we don't sleepwalk 
into a surveillance society". (i) He said that there is a growing danger of East 
German Stasi-style snooping if the state gathers too much information about 
individual citizens. He was referring to three projects in particular, which 
Brzezinski foresaw over thirty years ago: the proposed Identity Card scheme 
which will have personal details and the fingerprints of everyone in the country; 
the population database named the 'Citizen's Information Project' and proposals 
in the Children Bill - currently before Parliament - which would create a database 
of personal information on all children from birth to age 18 and details of their 

These and many other measures and technologies are being introduced 
piecemeal across the globe and justified individually. However collectively, they 
constitute the awesome global network of big brother surveillance planned 
decades ago. 



After the establishment of biometric ID systems, pressure will begin to build 
to enact laws that will require citizens to produce an ID whenever a government 

124 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

official demands it. In the countries that already have national ID card systems, 
the police have acquired such powers e.g. France, Germany, Belgium, Greece, 
Luxembourg, Portugal, and Spain. (2) 

The European Commission has produced two draft Regulations (25.9.03) to 
introduce two sets of biometric data (fingerprints and facial image) on visas and 
resident permits for third country nationals by 2005. The biometric data and 
personal details on visas will be stored on national and E.U.-wide databases and 
be accessible through the Visa Information System (VIS) held on the Schengen 
Information System (SIS II). The Regulation stipulates that two biometric 
identifiers must be held on an imbedded chip in a document. (3) 

On 13 December 2004, the E.U. General Affairs Council agreed to adopt a 
Regulation on mandatory facial images and fingerprints in E.U. passports. (4) Once 
the details have been decided, replacement and new passports will have to 
contain facial images within 18 months and fingerprints within three years. The 
U.K. has not signed up to this Regulation, but is proceeding with biometric 
passports and ID cards anyway. 


The Government introduced The Identity Cards Bill in November 2004, 
enabling the phased introduction of ID cards by 2008.(5) The Home Office website 
partly justifies the ID card on the grounds of international requirements, stating 
that Brits will not be able to travel abroad if we don't have biometric passports 
and that we might as well have an ID card because the biometric passport 
system is virtually the same thing!: 

The Government's decision to proceed with the introduction of a national identity 
cards scheme is based in part on the fact that we will have to introduce more secure 
personal identifiers (biometrics) into our passports and other existing documents in 
line with international requirements. Right across the world there is a drive to 
increase document security with biometrics. If our citizens are to continue to enjoy 
the benefits of international travel, as increasing numbers of them are doing we 
cannot be left behind. It is worth remembering that 21 of the 25 EU Member States 
(all apart from the UK, Ireland, Denmark and Latvia) have identity cards. 

Already the International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO) has established standards 
in the use of biometrics in passports and a biometric British passport will be 
introduced in 2005 that will incorporate a computer chip to store a facial image 
biometric. The United States is introducing a biometric passport requirement for all 
visitors going to the US without a visa. 

The decision to introduce biometrics into existing identity documents has therefore 
already been made. Without an identity cards scheme, the majority of the population 
would be enrolled via existing identity documents like passports anyway. The costs 
involved in this would be nearly the same as implementing a comprehensive identity 
cards scheme available to the whole resident population, but without the added 

The British anti-ID campaign,, outlines the main aspects of the 
system (6): 

125 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

1. The National Identification Register. The heart of the system. Clause 1 of the 
Bill imposes an obligation on the Secretary of State to establish a central population 
register containing a wide range of details of every UK citizen and resident aged from 
16 years and 3 months. 

2. The code. Clause 2 (6) requires that every individual must be given a unique 
number, to be known as the National Identity Registration Number (NIRN). This 
number will become the "key" for government and private sector organisations to 
access information on the register and to share that information. 

3. Biometrics. Clause 5 (5) requires individuals to submit to fingerprinting and 
"other" means of physical identification. This is likely to include electronic face 
scanning and iris recognition. 

4. The card. Clause 8 establishes the actual identity card, generated from and 
containing the information in the Register. 

5. Legal obligations. Clause 15 establishes a requirement to produce the card in 
order to obtain public services. 

6. Administrative convergence. The number and the card register are used by a 
variety of agencies and organisations as their administrative basis. 1 (5) permits the 
bringing together of all registration numbers (National Insurance, NHS, etc) used by a 

7. Cross notification. Agencies will be required to notify each other of changes to a 
person's details. Clause 19 authorises the Secretary of State to disclose details from 
the register to other agencies without the consent of the individual. 

8. New crimes and penalties. The Bill establishes a large number of new crimes and 
offences to ensure that people comply with the ID requirements. 


A Canadian parliamentary committee has unexpectedly told the Canadian 
Parliament that it could find no evidence to justify a national ID card scheme. 
Members almost unanimously declared the proposal a waste of time and 
resources. Government MP Joe Fontana, who chairs the committee, told press 
that the Committee was still struggling to determine why an ID card was even 
needed. "I think the fundamental question of why do we need to have a national 
ID card has yet to be answered," he said. (7) 

It was only a matter of days after the attack of September 11th before some 
members of the U.S. Congress proposed the implementation of a national ID 
card system as a way of thwarting terrorist attacks. The national ID card had 
been proposed in the past as a way of stopping illegal immigration. Larry Ellison, 
chairman and CEO of Oracle, made headlines after 9/11, saying: "We need a 
national ID card with our photograph and thumbprint digitized and embedded in 
the ID card". The prospect of massive computer databases or registries, software 
data collection systems, digital fingerprinting, handprint scans, facial recognition 
technologies, voice authentication devices, electronic retinal scans, and other 
'biometric' surveillance technologies have suddenly become realistic options for 
government identification purposes. (8) 

Due to popular suspicion of a compulsory ID card in the U.S., the federal 
Government is introducing the measure by stealth. On 16 April 2002, the 
Subcommittee Hearing on Standardizing State Driver's Licenses proposed 
establishing a national identity system based on the state driver's licence. The 
measures proposed unspecified unique biometric identifiers on the new cards. (9) 
H.R. 418, The Real ID Act, passed in the House in February 2005 and will require 
states to have either an electronic licence or ID card by 2008, which interestingly 

126 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

is also the year that ID cards will be phased in the U.K.(io)The legislation allows 
the Dept. Homeland Security to design state ID cards and drivers licenses with 
biometric information such as retinal scans, fingerprints, DNA data and RFID 
tracking technology. 

Behind these proposals is a huge Government sponsored research effort into 
biometric technology. The Office of Homeland Security now has a Behavioral 
Research and Biometrics Science and Technology Directorate. It has awarded a 
three year contract to International Biometric Group LLC for research into the 
effects of identity determination systems and processes on international travel, 
border management and homeland security. (ii) 

The Science and Technology section of the Office of Homeland Security's 
National Strategy for Homeland Security, July 2002, states that it wants to 
develop systems that can measure 'hostile intent' and sensors that can detect 
immunization status. (i2)The section entitled Law contains proposals for increased 
information sharing, biometric identification, and standardization of state drivers 
licences. (i3) 

Biometrics and smart-card technologies will play a major role in the ' U.S. Visit 
' project, a $1.5-10 billion project under the Dept. Homeland Security, 
announced in September 2003. The Enhanced Border Security and Visa Entry 
Reform Act of 2002 mandated the system and set several milestones, including 
the collection of biometric information from visitors entering the U.S. by air and 
sea by the end of 2003. All visitors over the age of 13 will now have their 
fingerprints taken and stored for 75 to 100 years by the Dept. Homeland 
Security, which will be shared with other government departments and agencies, 
and other governments. The E.U. Regulation requiring biometric passports has 
the secondary effect that whenever E.U. citizens travel abroad (not just to the 
United States), they will again be required to register their fingerprints and face- 
scans with foreign governments as their passports are verified. As a result, the 
E.U. is drastically enlarging the U.S. VISIT programme by turning it against its 
own citizens and then globalising this practice. (14) 

The Transportation Security Administration has a major contract in the works 
called the Transportation Workers Identification Credential. A pilot program 
involving 10,000 transportation workers is evaluating biometric technologies that 
can be used for government, contractor, and private-sector workers at 
transportation facilities. (15) 

The Biometrics Management Office (BMO) has been set up as a central 
procurement agency for the U.S. Dept. Defense, its motto reads, 

...ensuring the right person with the right privileges has access at the 
right time to support war fighting dominance.... Biometrics are measurable 
physical characteristics or personal behavioral traits used to recognize the 
identity, or verify the claimed identity of an individual. We are looking at: 
facial recognition, fingerprint, hand geometry, iris scan, signature 
verification, and voice recognition. 

All military personnel and DOD civilian employees will be subject to biometric 
identification. (16) In an interview with the BBC, a BMO spokesman said that 
biometrics are going to play an increasing role in everyone's lives. (i7)The BBC 
also reported in January 2003 that retinal scanners will be used at the new 
£14. 5m Venerable Bede Church of England Aided School. The technology will be 
used on pupils buying meals in the school canteen and in the library when 

127 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

children want to take out books. (is) In May 2003, Akron School Board in Ohio 
gave the go ahead for afinger-printing system to be installed in the school 
canteen. (19) Since October 2002 the U.N. High Commission for Refugees has 
been taking compulsory iris-scans of returning Afghan refugees at three centres 
on the Pakistan border. A total of over 130,000 people have been scanned so far. 


The Pentagon is developing a radar-based device that can identify people by 
the way they walk, for use in a new anti-terrorist surveillance system. Operating 
on the theory that an individual's walk is as unique as a signature, the Pentagon 
has financed a research project at the Georgia Institute of Technology that has 
been 80 to 95 percent successful in identifying people. (2i) 

In 2001 a company called Graphco teamed up with several other companies to 
bring face scanning cameras to the Super Bowl in Tampa, FL. After the game, 
Tampa Bay police reported that the technology pinpointed 19 people with 
criminal records out of a crowd of 100,000.(22) 

Biometrics research has been guided by the U.S. military over the past 
decade. In 1992, the National Security Agency (NSA) initiated the Biometric 
Consortium, consisting of representatives from six departments of the U.S. 
Government and each of the Military Services. The NSA initiated the formation of 
the Consortium as part of its Information Systems Security mission, with a goal 
to increase the availability of biometric authentication and identification to meet 
the needs of the Dept. Defense and other Federal agencies. It is chaired by an 
NSA agent and its stated objective is to build a consensus in industry and 
academia around the requirements of the NSA: 

[To] Create standardized testing databases, procedures, and protocols for the 
community and security policy organizations. Provide a forum for information 
exchange between the Government, private industry, and academia. Establish 
increased Government and commercial interaction. Facilitate 
symposia/workshops to include the participation of academia and private 


To take advantage of the snooping provisions in Patriot Acts I and II, a 
project called 'Total Information Awareness Network' was proposed. Although the 
Government officially shelved the plan in September 2003 due to public outrage, 
it will only take another terror attack to bring it back. The controversial 
programme was conceived by retired Admiral John Poindexter and was run by 
the Information Awareness Office that he headed inside the Defense Advanced 
Research Projects Agency (DARPA). The goal was to develop software that could 
examine the computerized travel, credit, medical and other records of Americans 
and others around the world to search for telltale hints of a terrorist attack. 
Poindexter's office told contractors that he wanted the software to allow U.S. 
agents to rapidly scan and analyze multiple petabytes of information. Just one 
petabyte of computer data could fill the Library of Congress more than 50 times. 


Whilst the Federal Government officially shelved its TIA network, the States 
have been working on a similar project independently with Federal backing. 
Dubbed "Matrix", Multistate Anti-Terrorism Information Exchange, the database 

128 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

has been in use for a year and a half in Florida, where police praise the crime- 
fighting tool as nimble and exhaustive. It cross-references driving records and 
restricted police files with billions of pieces of public and private data, including 
credit and property records. As a dozen more states pool their criminal and 
government files with Florida's, the Matrix database is expanding in size and 
power. Organisers hope to coax more states to join, touting its usefulness in 
everyday policing not just tracking terrorists. Organisers are considering giving 
access to the CIA even though in the 1970s, Congress barred the CIA from 
scanning files on Americans. The system is owned by a private company called 
Seisint, in Boca Raton, but it is federally funded and guarded by state police. (25) 

In September 2003, alongside Project VISIT, Dept. Homeland Security 
launched a Security Planning and Integrated Resources for Information 
Technology (SPIRIT) system that will combine hundreds to thousands of legacy 
applications into single computer networks . This will facilitate the creation of a 
vast federal database encompassing all the large federal agencies. Together, the 
contracts for this project are worth about $10 billion. In the Information Sharing 
and Systems section of The National Strategy for Homeland Security 2002, the 
Government says that it needs to link up all the IT systems of every single 
agency of the Federal government in order to create accurate terrorist 'watch 
lists'. More disturbing still is the paper's proposal to use data-mining techniques 
to interrogate this database in order to spot 'patterns of criminal behaviour' and 
detain 'suspected terrorists' before they act. (26)(27)(28) 

The Transportation Security Administration's Computer Assisted Passenger 
Prescreening (CAPPS II) system, is being developed to screen travelers, rather 
like the European Schengen Information System (SIS) that monitors peoples' 
movement around the E.U.. It will use 'dynamic intelligence information' to select 
passengers for enhanced screening' authenticated from publicly and 
commercially available databases to 'run against terrorist or other appropriate 
federal systems and an aggregate numerical threat score will be generated in 
less than five seconds'. (29) 


In June 2002 the British Home Secretary sought to expand the scope of 
section 22 of the Regulation of Investigatory Powers Act 2000. S.22 currently 
authorizes the police (including MOD police, NCS, NCIS) Secret Intelligence 
Agencies (MI5, MI6, GCHQ), Customs and Excise and the Inland Revenue, to 
obtain communications data from companies without a court order for the 
following purposes: 

(2)(a) in the interests of national security; 

(b) for the purpose of preventing or detecting crime or of preventing 

(c) in the interests of the economic well-being of the United Kingdom; 

(d) in the interests of public safety; 

(e) for the purpose of protecting public health; 

(f) for the purpose of assessing or collecting any tax, duty, levy or other 
imposition, contribution or charge payable to a government department; 

(g) for the purpose, in an emergency, of preventing death or injury or any 
damage to a person's physical or mental health, or of mitigating any injury or 
damage to a person's physical or mental health; or 

(h) for any purpose (not falling within paragraphs (a) to (g)) which is 

129 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

specified for the purposes of this subsection by an order made by the Secretary 
of State 

Communications data includes name and address, service usage details, 
details of who you have been calling, details of who has called, mobile phone 
location (which through global positioning system tracking chips can place you 
within 200 meters), source and destination of email, usage of web sites (but not 
pages within such sites). The draft Statutory Instrument expanded this list to 
include 24 public bodies, which according to StateWatch, amounted to 1039 
individual authorities. (30)(3i) The proposed bodies are: 

1) Government departments: Dept. Environment, Food and Rural Affairs; 
Dept. Health; Home Office; Dept. Trade and Industry; Dept. Transport; Dept. 
Work and Pensions; Northern Ireland Executive's Dept. Enterprise. 

2) Local authorities: Any local authority in England and Wales; any fire 
authority; any council in Scotland; any district council in Northern Ireland 

3) NHS bodies in Scotland and Northern Ireland: The common services 
Agency of the Scottish Health Service; The Northern Ireland Central Services 
agency for Health and Social Services. 

4) Other bodies: Environment Agency; Financial Services Authority; Food 
Standards Agency; Health and Safety Executive Information Commissioner; 
Office of Fair Trading; Postal Services Commission; Scottish Drug Enforcement 
Agency; Scottish Environmental Protection Agency; UK Atomic Energy Authority 
Constabulary; a universal service provider covered by Postal Services Act. (32) 

Due to a backlash from civil liberties groups, the plans to expand RIPA S.22 
were shelved a week after they were announced. (33) 

Separate from the identity card scheme, the Cabinet has given the go-ahead 

to set up Britain's first national population computer database under the Office of 

National Statistics. For use by public services, the 'citizen information project' is 

to bring together all the existing information held by the Government on the 58 

million people residing in Britain. It will include their name, address, date of birth, 

sex, and a unique personal number to form a 'more accurate and transparent' 

database than existing national insurance, tax, medical, passport, voter, and 

driving licence records. (34) 

The Children Bill introduced on 4th March 2004, proposes a database of all 
children from birth until adulthood. (35) It was put forward after the failure of 
official agencies to share information in the Victoria Climbie child abuse case. 
School achievements, medical and social services records and parental marital 
status could be on the database. The Dept. Health is also planning a database 
detailing treatments and social care for all patients. Childrens' personal files will 
record every "concern" that a professional has about them. It will also record 
"concerns" about their parents. The Bill will allow this to happen without the 
knowledge or consent of children and parents. The information-sharing goes far 
beyond concerns that a child is at risk of significant harm. It will also include 
information about other family members that may be considered relevant, such 
as suspected drug and alcohol misuse or mental health problems. 

Clause 8 of the Bill empowers the Secretary of State to define by Regulations 

130 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

what information should be held on the database. There is no limit to this power, 
and there seems to be nothing to prevent the Secretary of State from ordering 
that all agency files be held centrally. 


Section 11 of the U.K. 2001 Terrorism Act outlined a voluntary code of 
practice for Internet Services Providers (ISP's) to hold data on customers' web 
surfing and email for up to 6 years. (36) This ill thought out piece of legislation 
hassince been criticized by MPs as being completely unworkable due the huge 
burden of record keeping it places on ISPs but the Government is still keen to 
press ahead with it. (37)(38) 

E.U. Directive on Privacy and Electronic Communications (Directive 
2002/58/EC) July 2002 allows member states to pass laws mandating the 
retention of the traffic and location data of all communications taking place over 
mobile phones, SMS, landline telephones, faxes, e-mails, chat rooms, the 
Internet, or any other electronic communication device. The retention of the 
contents of the communications are not covered by the Directive, but the 
purpose is exactly the same as the British proposals, applied to 450 million 
citizens: To keep a log of who you have phoned and when; who you have 
exchanged emails with and when; who you have sent short messages via mobile 
phone to and when; which internet pages you visited and for how long. 

The Directive reverses the 1997 Telecommunications Privacy Directive by 
explicitly allowing E.U. countries to compel ISPs and telecommunications 
companies to record, index, and store their subscribers' communications data. 
These requirements can be implemented for purposes varying from national 
security to criminal investigations and prosecution of criminal offences, all 
without specific judicial authorization. (39)The Directive requires records to be kept 
for up to 24 months. (40) The list of data to be retained by ISPs and telecoms 
companies was drawn up by Europol as revealed in a confidential document 
obtained by Statewatch containing the agenda of the Expert Meeting on 
Cybercrime of 10th April 2002. (4i) 

At the summit which followed the Madrid bombing in March 2004, the E.U. 
accepted a draft Framework Decision on data retention at the request of the 
U.K., France, Ireland and Sweden. This strengthened the 2002 Directive by 
extending data retention to up to 3 years and widened its use from specific 
investigations to "prevention and detection" of crime. This opens the door for a 
dragnet style sweep on the American "Total Information Awareness" model. (42) 



British police have a database of 2 million DNA samples taken from people 
charged with criminal offences. This is the first of its kind in the world. In 
September 2003 Kevin Morris, chairman of the Police Superintendent's 
Association said he would urge the Home Secretary to consider extending the 
database to everyone in the country in order to solve crimes quicker and prevent 
them happening. (43) In March 2003 the Home Office announced proposals to take 
and store DNA samples from anyone arrested even if they are released without 

131 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

charge. (44) The highest court in the land, the law lords, ruled on 22 July 2004 that 
police can keep these DNA samples indefinitely. (45) 


The proposals for a DNA database under 'Patriot Act II' were outlined in the 
previous chapter. However, the FBI already hold a DNA database of 1.5 million 
people. In April 2003, the U.S. Government announced plans to include DNA 
samples from everybody arrested even if they are not charged. (46) 


A study of future military strategy entitled Airforce 2025 was drawn up by the 
U.S. Air University in 1996. In the section Information Operations: A New War 
Fighting Capapility, the authors suggest the advantages of satellite linked 
implanted brain microchips over other communication systems. These will allow 
the implanted personnel to 'pull a computer-generated mental visualization of the 
desired battlespace anytime, anywhere'. It suggests that the civilian population 
can become conditioned to accept the concept of implanted troops in the way 
they have become accustomed to other medical implants. (47) 

Researchers at the University of Southern California are now developing the 
world's first prosthetic brain part. Funded by DARPA, they are learning how to 
build sophisticated electronics and integrate them into human brains which could 
one day lead to cyborg soldiers and robotic servants as well as putting them into 
diseased brains for medical purposes. Under DARPA'S Brain Machine Interface 
Program, MIT researchers have monkeys in a laboratory can control the 
movement of a robotic arm using only their thoughts. This is technology which 
can literally read your mind. (48) (49) (50) 

A Mexican company called Solusat is marketing the Verichip, manufactured by 
military contractor Applied Digital Solutions of Florida (ADS), as an anti- 
kidnapping device. The RFID Verichip is injected under the skin and emits a radio 
frequency signal which can be detected by a scanner. Other potential uses of the 
chip, according to company officials, include scanning unconscious patients to 
obtain their medical records or restricting access to high-security buildings by 
scanning workers to verify their clearance. (5i) 

ADS is developing Radio Frequency ID chips able to track the movement of 
people worldwide using global positioning satellites. The company is field testing 
its Personal Locator Device, or PLD, which ADS says could help track lost children 
and sick or elderly family members. Currently the company is marketing a GPS 
system which uses a strap on monitor or watches. (52) (53) from ADS for other 
purposes such as. 

The current body piercing fashion which is being heavily promoted by the 
controlled media might be seen against this background. The police state 
planners are using popular culture to persuade today's youth that it is 'cool' to 
have pieces of metal inserted into their heads. Being linked up to national 
defence departments by such artefacts will not be such a 'cool' experience 

On 7 April 2004, Alex Jones interviewed Conrad Chase, director of the Baja 
Beach Clubs International, an international chain of exclusive nightclubs. He has 
introduced the VeriPay system for VIP members of his clubs allowing them to pay 
for services by swiping their microchipped bodies. Chase himself was implanted 

132 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

at the media launch of the VIP implant system along with stars from the Spanish 
version of the TV Show, "Big Brother," (called "Grand Hermano" in Spain). 
Showcased by ADS at a global security conference in November 2003, the 
VeriPay System is a new syringe-injectable microchip implant for humans, 
designed to be used as a fraud-proof payment method for cash and credit-card 
transactions. The chip implant is alleged to be an advance over credit cards and 
smart cards. (54) 

The use of ADS chips has also caught on in government agencies. (55) On 14 
July 2004, the Associated Press announced: 

MEXICO CITY (AP) - Security has reached the subcutaneous level for Mexico's 
attorney general and at least 160 people in his office - they have been implanted with 
microchips that get them access to secure areas of their headquarters. 

Mexico's top federal prosecutors and investigators began receiving chip implants in 
their arms in November in order to get access to restricted areas inside the attorney 
general's headquarters, said Antonio Aceves, general director of Solusat, the company 
that distributes the [ADS] microchips in Mexico 


Katheryn Albrecht of Consumers Against Supermarket Privacy Invasion and 
Numbering (CASPIAN) reports: 

A new consumer goods tracking system called Radio Frequency Identification 
(RFID) is poised to enter all of our lives within five years, with profound 
implications for consumer privacy. RFID couples radio frequency (RF) 
identification technology with highly miniaturized computers that enable 
products to be identified and tracked at any point along the supply chain. The 
system could be applied to almost any physical item, from ballpoint pens to 
toothpaste, which would carry their own unique information in the form of an 
embedded chip. The chip sends out an identification signal allowing it to 
communicate with reader devices and other products embedded with similar 
chips. Analysts envision a time when the system will be used to identify and 
track every item produced on the planet. RFID employs a numbering scheme 
called EPC (for 'electronic product code') which can provide a unique ID for any 
physical object in the world. The EPC is intended to replace the UPC bar code 
used on products today. Unlike the bar code, however, the EPC goes beyond 
identifying product categories--it actually assigns a unique number to every 
single item that rolls off a manufacturing line. For example, each pack of 
cigarettes, individual can of soda, light bulb or package of razor blades produced 
would be uniquely identifiable through its own EPC number. Once assigned, this 
number is transmitted by a radio frequency ID tag (RFID) in or on the product. 
These tiny tags, predicted by some to cost less than 1 cent each by 2004, are 
'somewhere between the size of a grain of sand and a speck of dust'. They are to 
be built directly into food, clothes, drugs, or auto-parts during the manufacturing 
process. They are not removed from the product when it leaves the store. 
Receiver or reader devices are used to pick up the signal transmitted by the RFID 
tag. Proponents envision a pervasive global network of millions of receivers along 
the entire supply chain -- in airports, seaports, highways, distribution centers, 
warehouses, retail stores, and in the home. This would allow for seamless, 
continuous identification and tracking of physical items (and their owners) as 
they move from one place to another, enabling companies to determine the 
whereabouts of all their products (and owners) at all times. The ultimate goal is 

133 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

for RFID to create a 'physically linked world' in which every item on the planet is 
numbered, identified, cataloged, and tracked. Since the Auto-ID Center's 
founding at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) in 1999, it has 
moved forward at remarkable speed. The center has attracted funding from some 
of the largest consumer goods manufacturers in the world, and even counts the 
Department of Defense among its sponsors. The European Central Bank is 
quietly working to embed RFID tags in the fibers of Euro banknotes by 2005. 
With corporate sponsors like Wal-Mart, Target, the Food Marketing Institute, 
Home Depot, and British supermarket chain Tesco, as well as some of the world's 
largest consumer goods manufacturers including Procter and Gamble, Phillip 
Morris, and Coca Cola it may not be long before RFID-based surveillance tags 
begin appearing in every store-bought item in a consumer's home. (56) 

Confidential documents obtained by CASPIAN from the AutoID Center show 
that the industry is fully aware of the massive unpopularity of RFID technology 
but is relying on consumer apathy to enable them to force it on the public. To 
reinforce this apathy, the RFID coalition are hiring PR firms to emphasize the 
"inevitability" of its introduction. (57) 

Gillette introduced RFID into its products early in 2003 and combined them 
with technology to take a photograph of anyone who picked up the product off 
the shelf. Trials of this anti-theft technology were undertaken by a Tesco Store in 
Cambridge U.K. (58) Tesco, the world's third largest retailer is also one of the 
world's largest promoters of RFID technology, and has recently purchased 
20,000 readers and antennas for 1300 of its stores. (59) Wal-Mart is the leading 
promoter of RFID use in American retailing. 

Meanwhile the U.S. Defense Dept. announced in October 2003 that by January 
2005 all its suppliers must embed passive RFID chips in each individual product 
where possible. (60) 

The European Central Bank is moving forward with plans to embed RFID tags 
as thin as a human hair into the fibers of Euro bank notes by 2005, in spite of 
consumer protests. The tags would allow currency to record information about 
each transaction in which it is passed. Governments and law enforcement 
agencies hail the technology as a means of preventing money-laundering, black- 
market transactions, and even bribery demands for unmarked bills. However, 
consumers fear that the technology will eliminate the anonymity that cash 
affords. (6i) 


On the horizon, the consultants say, is the day when RFID chips would allow 
shoppers to leave the store without checking out at all and get the bill on their 
credit card or store account. Stores across the world already track consumer 
purchases with opt-in loyalty cards. Using RFID to register sales instead of 
regular checkouts would force people to use the loyalty cards in order to pay for 
the goods. Anonymous purchases will become a thing of the past. Potential for 
RFID technology to be used to prescribe or proscribe what people can buy can be 
seen in the proposed "Fat Tax" whereby sales taxes would be imposed on foods 
considered to cause obesity. The RFID system could be used to stop people 
purchasing too many of these items. The "fat tax" idea is backed by major 
scientific and environmental organizations such as WorldWatch and The Center 
for Science in the Public Interest and scientists writing in the British Medical 
Journal. (62)(63)The new Dialogue Youth cards were introduced in October 2003 at 

134 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

the new super-campus incorporating three schools in Midlothian, Scotland, 
comprising Dalkeith High School, St David's High and Saltersgate school for 
children with special needs. The use of the cards to monitor eating habits is the 
latest initiative introduced to fight rising levels of obesity amongst children. The 
photo ID card is part of a cashless system in the dining areas. Once pupils have 
topped up the cards with credit, IT systems at the school will be able to record 
every purchase a pupil makes from the schools' canteen, cafe and vending 
machines. Those who choose salads and other healthy options will be rewarded 
with discounts or privileged access to activities.(64) 

And who knows, the intelligence services who have access to supermarket 
databases might decide that your loyalty card needs to be invalidated because 
their data-mining software has determined that you are a potential terrorist or 
criminal. If you adjust your behaviour then you may find your loyalty card comes 
back on-line. 

In step with the loyalty card database is the pronouncement by U.S. Postal 
Service that they are going to end anonymous use of the postal service due to 
the anthrax mailings in October 2001. The impetus for this move came directly 
from a Presidential commission, which recommended that USPS introduce sender 
identification for every item of mail.(65)The investigation of the anthrax mailings 
by Dr. Leonard Horowitz and Michael Ruppert found that the Government itself 
was the likely culprit, showing once again how the problem-reaction-solution play 
is being used to manipulate policy-makers and public opinion into accepting the 
police state. (66)(67) 


One of the best kept secrets in auto manufacturing is the fact that most new 
cars have black box data recorders in them. Ford and General Motors began 
phasing them in six years ago and Toyota and Honda also use them. Ford calls it 
the 'Electronic Data Recorder'; GM calls it the 'Sensing Diagnostic Module.' It's a 
small device that records your speed, the percentage of throttle, your RPMs, 
whether you have your foot on the brake and whether your seat belt is buckled 
and if you get in an accident, deploys an airbag.(68)The U.K. government is 
looking at implementing a nationwide satellite global positioning system (GPS) 
that not only links the black box to a national road toll database but also controls 
the speed of vehicles by linking the black box to throttle control. When the car 
enters a 40mph zone the GPS will prevent the car exceeding the speed limit. The 
GPS system could also be used to detect drivers who have not paid vehicle duty 
or insurance. Most importantly the Government will know exactly where you are 
at any time because GPS is accurate within ten metres. The prototype system for 
cars is currently being introduced in lorries in Germany and could be 
implemented in the UK by 2006. All vehicles would have to be fitted with the 
black box technology. (69)(70)The Institute for Public Policy Research who support 
the GPS measure have proposed that the national road charge should be £1.30 
per mile adding £16 billion per year to the cost of motoring by 2010.(71) 

Mobile phones contain GPS tracking chips which can determine the location of 
users within a few hundred metres. Under the E.U. data retention Directive, the 
data that can be retained includes all data generated by the conveyance of 
communications on an electronic communications network ("traffic data") as well 
as data indicating the geographic position of a mobile phone user (location data 
Art. 2 (b) and (c) of Dir. 2002/58/EC).(72) In October 2004 a new service was 

135 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

launched in the U.K. by MobileLocate, a company which enables employers to 
track their employees by their mobile phones down to 200 metres. The company 
says it takes just 10 to 15 seconds for a manager to make a request to find a 
mobile phone and receive a reply. (73) 

Secret Government plans to turn mobile phone masts into Big Brother spy 
stations have been revealed. The new system called Celldar works by analysing 
radio waves sent out by phone masts. When these waves hit an object they are 
reflected to the mast. By analysing the reflections, a picture can be built of 
moving objects nearby, tracking vehicles and people anywhere in the U.K. using 
the country's 35,000 masts. The Evening Standard has learned that the Ministry 
of Defence planned a test in October 2003 but an MoD spokesman said he was 
unable to comment on the project. (74) MoD is hoping to introduce the system as 
soon as resources allow. Police and security services are known to be interested 
in a variety of possible surveillance applications. Celldar, is supposedly aimed at 
anti-terrorism, defence, security, and road traffic management. (75) 


As previously discussed, biometric facial recognition technology already 
exists. The Orwellian implications of this are mind-boggling bearing in mind the 
millions of CCTV cameras worldwide. The Pentagon is developing an urban 
surveillance system whose centerpiece is groundbreaking computer software that 
is capable of automatically identifying vehicles by size, color, shape, and license 
tag, or drivers and passengers by face. (76) 

In the U.S., tragic school shootings such as that at Columbine have led to 
hundreds of schools installing surveillance cameras. Some school districts have 
allowed the local police or head teacher to access the spyware via the internet 
and monitor the activities of students and staff at the click of a mouse. (77)(78) 

Researchers are working to give the new equipment 'X-ray vision' - the 
capability to 'see' through walls and look into people's homes. In February 2003, 
U.S. Federal Regulators in relaxed rules on this "ground-penetrating radar" 
technology allowing industry to develop technology which gives clearer images. 
Time Domain Corp., based in Huntsville, Ala., demonstrated a "through-wall 
motion detector," a briefcase-sized, 10-pound device that can be held up to a 
wall. A person moving behind the wall shows up as a colorful blob on a small 
display. The detector is intended for use by law enforcement, firefighters, and the 
military. (79) The potential military and police use of "through wall surveillance" 
technology developed by Hughes corp. is discussed in a report by the 
Department of Applied Military Science at the Royal Military College of Canada. 
These devices are already being used by police in California and Mexico, and are 
also designed for urban warfare. (80) Similar technology is useful for seeing 
through clothing at airports and checkpoints. (8i) 

In Germany, EADS (European Aeronautic Defense and Space), the Bavarian 
Police Helicopter Squadron, and the Bavarian Interior Ministry are collaborating 
on Project Autopol (automatic object recognition for police helicopters) to help 
law enforcement agencies track illegal residents. Autopol combines automatic 
target recognition (ATR) technology with an infrared camera installed in a police 
helicopter. The infrared camera pinpoints warm objects such as people, animals, 
cars, or power lines. (82) 

The U.S. Centibots project, funded by (DARPA), has developed new 
technology to support the coordinated deployment of as many as 100 robots for 

136 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

missions such as urban surveillance. These small mobile cameras on wheels, 
have their own artificial intelligence and can hunt fugitives or provide mobile 
surveillance and security for government agencies. (83) 

The Federal National Science Foundation has awarded Bill Kaiser and his 
engineering team at UCLA $7.5 million to develop a systems of mobile cameras 
that zip through the countryside on cables. Designed to monitor endangered 
species and analyze environmental chemistry, they will also extend the urban 
surveillance grid out into the wilderness. (84) 


Development of the technological apparatus of totalitarianism is possibly 
being funded by the Pentagon's black budget. The Dept. Defense's Inspector 
General found that the Pentagon couldn't properly account for trillions of dollars 
in accounting entries every year. (85) For fiscal year 2000, auditors found $1.1 
trillion in bookkeeping entries that could not be tracked or justified and $2.3 
trillion worth of untraceable bookkeeping entries for year 1999. (86) 

Chapter 12 End Notes 

1. Richard Ford, Beware rise of Big Brother state, warns data watchdog, The Times, ,27 10- 12 186 15, 00. htm I 

2. Identity Cards, Frequently Asked Questions, Privacy International Website, 24 
Aug. 1996. 

See fag .htm I 

3. Biometrics - the EU takes another step down the road to 1984, Statewatch, 2003. See 

4. Statewatch, news index, December 2004 

5. Home Office website, FAQ's on ID Cards. See 

6. FAQ's on ID Cards, 

7. Canadian parliamentary report ridicules ID cards as pointless, costly and dangerous, 
Privacy International Media Release, 8th Oct. 2003. See 

8. Adam Thierer, National ID Cards: New Technologies, Same Bad Idea, Cato Institute, 
Issue #21, 28 Sept. 2001. See 

9. Watching the Watchers - Policy Report #1, Electronic Privacy Information Center. Feb. 
2002. See cards/you rpapersplease.pdf 
Also see cards/ 

10. Declan McCullagh, National ID cards on the way?, CNET, 14 February 2005 
http://news. com. com/National+ID+cards+on+the+way/2100-1028_3-5573414. html 

11. Gail Repsher Emery, Biometrics company to evaluate technologies for Homeland 

137 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Security, Washington Technology, 10 Aug. 2003. See 
http://www.washinqtontechnoloqy.eom/news/l l/homeland/2 1866-1 .htm I 

12. The National Security Strategy for Homeland Security, July 2002, Science and 
Technology, p. 52. See 
Ma in paqe http://www. htm I 

13. Ibid., Law, p. 49. See 

14. An Open Letter to the European Parliament on Biometric Registration of All EU 
Citizens and Residents, Privacy International, 30 November 2004. See 

15. Homeland Security takes action, Washington Technology, 1 Sept 2003; Vol. 18 No. 
11. See ll/cover-stories/21541-l.html 

16. Biometrics Management Office, Dept. of Defense website. See 

17. Alfred Hermida, Faces and eyes rival passwords, BBC, London, 23 Jan. 2003. See and eyes rival passwords 

18. Eye scanners for school children, BBC, London, 8 Jan. 2003, scanners for school children 

19. Stephanie Warsmith, Students will scan for meals: Akron school board OKs 

system, Akron Beacon, 28 May 2003. See will scan for meals 

20. UNHCR imposing compulsory iris-scans on returning refugees over six years old, 
Statewatch, Aug. 2003. See 

21. Pentagon System Hopes to Identify Walks, Rocky Mount Telegram, 19 May 2003. See 

pentagon system hopes to identify walks 

22. Biometrics Benched for Super Bowl, Wired News, 31 Dec. 2002. See re/0, 1284, 56878, 00 .htm I 

23. Background of the US Government's Biometric Consortium, The Biometric Consortium 
website. See 

24. Michael J. Sniffen, Pentagon office creating surveillance system to close, The 
Associated Press, 

copy on, 25 Sep. 2003. See 

25. Organizers say 'Matrix' Big Brother database would be tied in with CIA, Associated 

copy on 


26. Homeland Security takes action, Washington Technology, op cit. 

27. Amelia Gruber, Government rife with opportunities for small IT companies, survey 
finds,, 14 Aug. 2003. See 

138 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


28. The National Security Strategy for Homeland Security, Information Sharing and 
Systems, pp. 55-58 

29. Privacy and Human Rights, a report by Privacy International, 2003. See 

30. Regulation of Investigatory Powers Act, 2000, section 22. See 

31. UK government forced to delay new surveillance powers, Statewatch, news, June 

2002. See 

32. Stuart Millar, Government sweeps aside privacy rights, The Guardian, London, 11 
June 2002. See uk/Archive/Article/0,4273,4431 109,00. html 

33. Stuart Millar, Lucy Ward and Richard Norton-Taylor, Blunkett shelves access to data 
plans, The Guardian, London, 19 June 2002. See, 7369, 7399 59, 00 .htm I 

34. Alan Travis, Secret go-ahead for ID card database, The Guardian, London, 30 Sept. 

2003. See 

35. UK: Children Bill to introduce surveillance of every child and record "concerns" about 
their parents, Statewatch news, April 2004 

36. Anti-Terrorism Legislation in The United Kingdom, Liberty, 2003, p. 29. 

publications/pdf-documents/a nti-terrornew.pdf 

37. MPs urge changes to net snooping laws, BBC, London, 28 Jan. 2003. See 

38. Stuart Millar, Internet providers say no to Blunkett, The Guardian, London, 22 Oct. 

2002. See, 7369, 8 16523, 00 .htm I 

39. Data Retention, Electronic Privacy Information Center. 

See retention. htm l#oriq ins 

40. Privacy fears over EU snooping plans, BBC, London, 20 Aug. 2002. 

41. EU surveillance of telecommunications, Statewatch, news, May 2002. See 

42. Data retention comes to roost - telephone and internet privacy to be abolished, 
Statewatch news, September 2004. See 

43. Simon Jeffery, Police seek DNA record of everyone, The Guardian, London, 8 Sept. 

2003. See seek dna record of everyone 

44. Nick Hopkins, Police to get right to DNA test everyone they arrest, The Guardian, 

139 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

London, 27 March 2003, See 
police to get right to dna test everyone they arrest 

45. Police can keep DNA of innocent people indefinitely, statewatch, September 2004 

46.. Richard Willing, White House seeks to expand DNA database, USA Today, 15 April 
2003. See x.htm 

47. LTC William B. Osborne, Maj Scott A. Bethel, Maj Nolen R. Chew, Maj Philip M. 
Nostrand and Maj YuLin G. Whitehead, Airforce 2025, The Air University, August 1996, 
Information Operations: A New War-Fighting Capability, Ch.4 Implanted Microscopic 
Chip. See 

48. Brain Machine Interfaces, DARPA Defense Sciences Office, Biological Sciences, 

49. Michael Rosenwald, Can an electronic device replace damaged brain circuits?, Popular 
Science, June 2003. See cyborg race 

50. Gareth Cook, Defense Department funding brain-machine work,The Boston Globe, 5 
August 2003. See. 

defense department funding brain machine work 

51. Tracking Junior With a Microchip, Wired News. See 

52. Angela Swafford, Barcoding humans, Boston Globe, 20 May 2003. See humans 

53. Digital Angel Corporation website, GPS technology section. See 

54. Alex Jones,, Baja Beach Club in Barcelona, Spain Launches Microchip 
Implantation for VIP Members, 7 April 2004 

55. Chip Implanted in Mexico Judicial Workers,Associated Press 14 July 2004. See 

56. Katherine Albrecht, RFID: Tracking everything, everywhere, Consumers Against 
Supermarket Privacy Invasion and Numbering (CASPIAN). See overview.htm 

57. Alex Jones Interviews Katherine Albrecht, The Alex Jones Show, 8 July 2003. See report 071403 albrecht.html 

58. Alok Jha, Tesco tests spy chip technology: Tags in packs of razor blades used to track 
buyers, The Guardian, London, 19 July 2003. 


uk news/story/0%2c3604%2cl001211%2c00.html 

59. Tesco Spychips, See 

60. Matthew Broersma, Defense Department drafts RFID policy, CNET, 24 Oct. 

140 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

See 2-5097050.html 

61. Electronic Privacy Information Center, RFID page. See 

62. Fat tax 'could save lives',BBC, London, 28 Jan. 2000. See 

63. More Absurd Fat Tax Proposals, Consumer Freedom, 1 March 2000. See detail.cfm?ARTICLE ID=102 

64. Stephen Naysmith, New ID cards let parents spy on what kids eat, Sunday Herald, 26 
Oct. 2003. See 

65. Audrey Hudson, 'Smart stamps' next in war on terrorism, The Washington Times, 26 
oct. 2003. See 

66. Dr Leonard Horowitz, The CIA's Role in the Anthrax Mailings: Could Our Spies be 
Agents for Military-Industrial Sabotage, Terrorism, and Even Population Control?. 
See espionaqe.html 

67. Investigators Conclude Russian Defector is Lead Suspect in Anthrax Mailings Case, 
Tetrahedron LLC. News Release: No. DITA-81, 30 Aug. 2002. See 

68. In-Car Black Boxes: Safety Measure Or Spy Tactic? Louisville Ky. — transcript of John 
Boel's report shown exactly the way it appeared on WLKY NewsChannel 32 at 11 p.m. on 
17 Feb. 2003. 


in car black boxes safety measure or spy tactic 

69. Juliette Jowit, Black box in car to trap speed drivers, The Observer, London, 3 Aug. 
2003. See box in car to trap speed drivers 

70. Tom Symonds, Tracking the future of driving, BBC, London, 9 June 2003. See politics/29752 16.stm 

71. Anger at £1.30-a-mile road toll plan, The Scotsman, 14 Oct. 2003. See .com/topics .cfm?tid=477&id = 1136522003 

72. Electronic Privacy Information Center, op cit. 

73. Now Employers Can Spy on Staff Out of Office, The Scotsman, 17 October 2004 

74. Mark Prigg, Secret MoD plan to create spy stations, The Evening Standard, London, 
23 Oct. 2003. See 

732 1553?source = Even ing%20Standard 

75. Jason Burke and Peter Warren, How mobile phones let spies see our every move, The 
Observer, London, 13 Oct. 2002. See 

how mobile phones let spies see our every move 

76. Noah Shachtman, The Pentagon's Plan for Tracking Everything That Moves, Big 
Brother Gets a Brain, Village Voice Media, 9-15 July 2003. 


the pentagons plan for tracking everything that moves 

141 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

77. Sam Dillon, U.S. schools resort to security cameras, International Herald Tribune, 25 
Sept. 2003. See = 250&newsld = 115 . Also peer into school hallways 

78. Donna Lowry, Web Cameras Monitor Class Activity , WXIA-TV Atlanta, 15 Oct. 2003. 
See cameras monitor class activity 

79. David Ho, Federal regulators ease restrictions on technology that can see through 

Associated Press, copy on The San Diego Union Tribune website. 13 Feb. 2003. See 

federal regulators ease restrictions on technology that can see through walls 

80. Major G.J. Burton CD, PPCLI and Major G. P. Ohlke CD, Intelligence, Exploitation of 
millimeter waves for through-wall surveillance during military operations in urban terrain, 
Land Force Technical Staff Programme V, Department of Applied Military Science, Royal 
Military College of Canada, Kingston, Ontario, 24 May 2000, pp.14, 30, 35. 


81. New airport scans could expose travelers: Screeners could get x-ray vision, CNN, 26 
June 2003. See screeners.htm 

82. Felix Soh, "Using War Technology to Track Illegals," Singapore Straits Times Online, 
15 June 2002, copy on Justice Technology Information Network website, a division of the 
National Law Enforcement and Corrections Technology Center. See 

83. Cenibots: The 100 Robots Project, DARPA. 

84. Charles Choi, Tiny robots in the trees, United Press International, science news, copy 
on, 12 Oct. 2003. See 

85. Tom Abate, Military Waste Under Fire, $1 Trillion Missing - Bush targets Pentagon 
Accounting, San Francisco Chronicle, 18 May 2003. See 

86. David Wood, Pentagon's Unreliable Bookkeeping Stands as Obstacle to Bush Reforms, 
New House News Service, 2001. See 

142 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 13 



Like the communists, the Western elite are attacking traditional social 
insitutions which challenge the moral authority of the state. They are promoting 
New Age religion because it is more suited to their political agendas. 


New Age religion proposes the ascendancy of a ruling elite un-restrained by 
the moral strictures of ancient religious texts. Whereas monotheistic religions 
propose a deity who is apart from the world and judges man for his actions, New 
Age pantheism proposes that God is the collective whole of every entity in the 
world organized into a spiritual hierarchy. Evolution and reincarnation underpin a 
spiritual hierarchy headed by the Masters of Wisdom who can communicate 
telepathically with their followers. The Masters will bring humanity into the Age of 
Aquarius or The New World Order using their higher wisdom. These ideas stem 
from the Theosophical movement founded by a Russian woman called Helena 
Blavatsky born in 1831. The Nazis took Theosophy seriously and Hitler based his 
genocidal theories of master race, or supermen ( "Ubermenschen") on it.(i) 
Theosophy hasbeen promoted at the U.N. by The Lucis Trust which enjoys 
consultative status with its Economic and Social Council. (2)The U.N. is regarded 
by New Agers as the supreme political instrument of the Hierarchy, which is 
appropriate given that the U.N. has always been controlled by the elite.(3) 

Not only is pantheism used to justify the dictatorship of a ruling elite, it also 
tied into agendas such as eugenics / bioethics, population control, and radical 
environmentalism. Pantheistic Earth worship is promoted at the highest level of 
the environmental movement. As an atheistic parallel of the ten commandments, 
the U.N. Earth Charter, a 16 point plan for humanity written by Stephen 
Rockefeller and Mikhail Gorbachev, has been placed in a 500 pound chest called 
The Ark of Hope. 

On page 60 of her book, Manual of the Co-Creators for the Quantam Leap, 
New Ager Barbara Marx Hubbard states that the spiritual elite will have to kill off 
one half of the population in order to evolve humanity to the next level: 'We are 
in charge of God's selection process for Planet Earth. He selects, we destroy. We 
are the riders of the pale horse, Death'. Hubbard was a former member of the 
Presidential Committee on National Curriculum and Democratic Party nominee for 
Vice-President in 1984.(5) (6) 

143 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


On 2nd August 1982 Newsweek magazine reported: 

... the world's most prestigious summer camp - the Bohemian Grove - is now 
in session 75 miles north of San Francisco. The fiercely guarded, 2,700 acre 
retreat is the country extension of San Francisco's all-male ultra-exclusive 
Bohemian Club to which every Republican President since Herbert Hoover has 
belonged. With its high-powered clientele, coveted privacy and cabalistic rituals, 
the Bohemian Grove has prompted considerable suspicion... The most important 
events, however are the "lakeside talks" (past orators: Alexander Hague and 
Casper Weinberger). This year's speaker was Henry Kissinger on The Challenge 
of the '80s. (7) 

In July 2001, documentary film-maker Alex Jones infiltrated Bohemian Grove, 
becoming the first person to capture the bizarre occult activities of the Bohemian 
Club's world leaders on videotape. (8) The centre-piece of the festivities is The 
Cremation of Care, literally the torching of human compassion. This involves a 
mock human sacrifice to the sun god Moloch, performed in front of a forty-foot 
tall stone owl. Alex Jones commentates: 

We were all focused at what was going on across the pond. Suddenly the owl 
was lit up by some flood lights and out ran a hundred priests or so in black, red 
and green robes. Most of them were in black, some in red and a couple in silver 
or green robes. Then, out came the high priest, who went through all his 
incantations about the dead (who is dead at the Grove in the past, may their 
spirits be conjured and brought back there by the "great owl"). He praised the 
owl for about twenty minutes and he talked about "goodly Tyre and Babylon". 

The priests went on to burn alive a human effigy whose cries for mercy were 
broadcast through a public address system. Pyrotechnics caused metal crucifixes 
around the pond to burst into flames. 

Religious infanticide was widespread among the ancient peoples of the 
Eastern Mediterranean region, but the cult of Moloch is the most documented. 
Baal Moloch (or Molekh) 'The Bull of the Sun' was the sun god of the Phoenecians 
(called Canaanites in the Bible). He was conceived in the form of a calf or an ox, 
or depicted as a man with the head of a bull. In many instances the bodies of 
children were burnt as sacrifices, performed to renew the strength of the sun 
fire. (9) 

Canaan is an ancient term for the country roughly corresponding to what was 
later historically known as Palestine or The Holy Land, and in modern political 
terms, Israel and the Occupied Territories. The Canaanites were the Semitic 
inhabitants of Canaan before the Israelites arrived and it seems that the 
Israelites followed the Canaanite practice of sacrificing children to Molech. The 
ritual is described in The Old Testament 'to pass through the fire' and is strongly 
condemned. (io) Tyre was an major commercial city in the Phoenician empireand 
many of its kings were named Baal after the sun god. (ii) 


New Age religion and witchcraft have become very popular amongst today's 
youth because they offer magical power, personal liberation, and an anything 

144 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

goes culture. This is exactly the kind of moral vacuum the elite need to exert 
control over the population. According to Reuters, 19 June 2003: 

Paganism and the ancient art of witchcraft are on the rise in Britain, experts 
said on Thursday as the summer's most celebrated Pagan festival approached. 
Television, the Internet, environmentalism and even feminism have all played a 
role in the resurgence, they say. Soaring Pagan numbers have churches worrying 
and calling for stricter controls on cult TV programs and films that celebrate 
sorcery like "Harry Potter," "Buffy the Vampire Slayer" and "Sabrina the Teenage 
Witch... "Anything that makes teenage girls feel powerful is bound to go down 
well," joked OBOD's McCabe. Kevin Carlyon, High Priest of British White Witches 
said "Harry Potter" in recent years had continued the trend, helping create what 
he called "the fastest growing belief system in the world." (12) 

Sponsored by ExxonMobil, 'Harry Potter Day' 2001, saw American children 
attending public libraries for potion class. (13) Here is a sample of Harry Potter 's 
occult powers: 

Harry longed to bite the man... but he must master the impulse. He had 
more important work to do. But the man was stirring... Harry saw his vibrant, 
blurred outline towering above him, saw a wand withdrawn from a belt... He had 
no choice... He reared high from the floor and struck once, twice, three times, 
plunging his fangs deeply into the man's flesh, feeling his ribs splinter beneath 
his jaws, feeling the warm gush of blood... The man was yelling in pain... then 
he fell silent... He slumped backward against the wall... Blood was splattering 
onto the floor... His forehead hurt terribly. (14) 

K B Toys now make occultic barbie dolls called Secret Spells Christie and 
Secret Spells Kayla.(i5) One company, Mezco Toyz, has invented the Living Dead 
Doll, a creation straight from a horror movie. The gruesome ten-inch dolls, with 
devil-red eyes and blood pouring from their mouths, come in their own coffins, 
along with a death certificate. The characters include Sybill, who is strapped in a 
straitjacket with a collar and chain, and Inferno, who has auburn hair, fiery eyes 
and bat-like wings. (16) 


Meanwhile, the E.U. is attacking religions using human rights laws, just as 
they are being used to attack national sovereignty. In December 2003, a law was 
implemented in the U.K. based on a European Union Directive which bans 
discrimination in the workplace on the grounds of religion, belief, or sexual 
orientation. Thousands of religious schools, charities and organizations could face 
legal action if they refuse to employ atheists or homosexuals, or sack staff who 
become Satanists under proposed Government regulations. (17) 

President Bush signed America up to UNESCO on 1st October 2003 after a 
nineteen year absence. UNESCO'S Manifesto 2000 for a culture of peace and 
non-violence includes the aim to, 'Defend freedom of expression and cultural 
diversity, giving preference always to dialogue and listening without engaging in 
fanaticism, defamation and the rejection of others. '(18) Christianity, Judaism and 
Islam and most other religions emphatically "reject others" and can be extremely 
defamatory. Under this rule, monotheistic religions would be muzzled. 

UNESCO is equally contemptuous of the family. A 10-part series for teachers, 

145 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

published in 1949 under the title Toward World Understanding, reads like The 
Communist Manifesto: 'Government schools must stamp out love of country and 
the family must be viewed as the enemy'. (19) 

The U.K. Serious Organised Crime and Police Bill introduced in November 
2004, creates a new crime of incitement to religious hatred. This will have the 
effect of stopping religious groups from criticizing each other, and therefore 
expressing their core belief that theirs is the only true religion. It also sets a very 
dangerous precedent that the state can censor criticism of a set of beliefs. What 
happens when the state declares that euthanasia or another belief of some 
'bioethics committee' falls within this protection? 


We have cut the links between child and parent, and between man and man, 
and between man and woman. No one dares trust a wife or a child or a friend 
any longer. But in the future there will be no wives and no friends. Children will 
be taken from their mothers at birth, as one takes eggs from a hen. The sex 
instinct will be eradicated. Procreation will be an annual formality like the 
renewal of a ration card. We shall abolish the orgasm. Our neurologists are at 
work upon it now. There will be no loyalty, except loyalty towards the Party. 
There will be no love, except the love of Big Brother. -George Orwell, 1984 

Chapter 12 described the U.K. Children Bill, 2004, which sets up a database 
to monitor personal, health and educational information for all children and their 
families. (20) Currently, under The 1996 Education Act parents can be fined £2500 
or sentenced to three months in prison if their child regularly truants from school. 
In October 2003 the Government proposed introducing £25- £100 fines for each 
unauthorized absence from class. (2i) 


On top of all the tyrannical social politcal agendas, the elite are backing an 
equally disturbing agenda of sexual abuse. The Daily Telegraph reported on 23rd 
October 2003: 

The European Union's elite are determined to destroy Europe's Christian heritage, 
Italy's reform minister, Umberto Bossi said yesterday. He described the elite as 'filthy 
pigs' who wanted to 'make paedophilia as easy as possible'. (22) 

Many major paedophile rings have been uncovered which involved members 
of the ruling class. In June 2003, scandal rocked the Portuguese establishment 
when it emerged that senior figures were in a paedophile ring at a state run boys 
orphanage. Among them were Paulo Pedroso, an MP and number two in the 
opposition Socialist Party; Carlos Cruz, one of Portugal's most popular television 
journalists; and Jorge Ritto, retired ambassador to UNESCO. The arrest of 
Pedroso was the first of a politician during the investigation. It followed the 
testimony of two 14-year-old boys who identified the 38-year-old divorcee from 
photographs and claimed that they were taken to a country home in Elvas, near 
the Spanish border, on several occasions during 1999 and 2000 while Pedroso 
was still a Minister. (23) 

French police investigating the disappearance of 115 young women in the 
Toulouse area between 1986 and 1997 discovered that serial killer Patrice Alegre, 

146 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

a policeman's son, organized the city's prostitution business, providing under-age 
girls for sadomasochistic orgies with Magistrates, politicians, policemen, 
journalists and businessmen at Toulouse's Palais de Justice and a chateau owned 
by Toulouse council. (24) 

In January 2003, child porn allegations caused Tony Blair to issue a D-Notice 
to gag the press from revealing the names of known paedophiles within the 
British Government. The Sunday Herald has also had it confirmed by a senior 
source in British intelligence that at least one high-profile former Labour Cabinet 
minister is among Operation Ore suspects, an operation by Scotland Yard's 
Paedophile Unit into child porn downloaded from the internet. The Sunday Herald 
has been given the politician's name but, for legal reasons, cannot identify the 
person. There are still unconfirmed rumours that another senior Labour politician 
is among the suspects. The intelligence officer said that a 'rolling' Cabinet 
committee had been set up to work out how to deal with the potentially ruinous 
fall-out for both Tony Blair and the Government if arrests occur. (25) 

The Independent reported on 12th June 2002: 

When police in the tiny republic of Montenegro swooped on a suspected 
pimp accused of running a major sex trafficking operation, they ran into an 
embarrassing problem. The man they were about to put behind bars was 
none other than the country's deputy state prosecutor... Montenegro has 
been shaken hard by the burgeoning scandal, which allegedly involved 
leading members of the judiciary, police and political officials. Zoran 
Piperovic, the republic's deputy prosecutor, was arrested this week, and six 
other officials have been detained. They are accused of forcing women, 
mostly from Moldavia, Ukraine and Romania, into prostitution... It is an 
open secret in the Balkans that people-trafficking rings run through 
Montenegro to Bosnia and Kosovo, with profits from the dirty trade reaching 
millions of Euros. The sex-slave routes lead to Italy and Britain, where at 
least 1,400 women, mainly from eastern Europe, are tricked into 
prostitution each year. The trade is highly lucrative for the men who "own" 
them; in London, women can bring in about £100,000 a year for their 
pimps. (26) 

Madeleine Rees, the head of the U.N. Human Rights Commission office in 
Sarajevo, stated that trafficking in women through Bosnia started with the arrival 
of the international peace keepers in 1992. As well as 21,000 NATO peace 
keepers and aid workers, there were police from 40 countries trying to keep 
Bosnia's warring factions apart. Extra-curricular activities involved running 
paedophile and prostitution rings with the local criminals. (27) The core of the U.N. 
international police force in Bosnia were employees of Dyncorp, a US based 
military contractor. Insight on the News magazine reports that none of the girls 
were from Bosnia but were kidnapped in Russia, Romania and other places, and 
transported by DynCorp /U.N. employees and the Serbian mafia. (28) More than 
6000 girls aged between 12 and 16 are smuggled to Western Europe each year. 
Researchers have identified north-eastern Italy as a key sorting centre for girls 
from Eastern Europe, again underlining the importance of the U.N.'s activities in 
Bosnia. (29) 

A copy of the joint study sponsored by the U.N. High Commission for 
Refugees and Save The Children, obtained by United Press International, 
describes the sexual abuse of children in Sierra Leone, Liberia, and Guinea by 
U.N. and NGO staff. Agency workers from the international and local NGOs as 

147 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

well as U.N. agencies were ranked as among the worst sex exploiters of children, 
often using the very humanitarian aid and services intended to benefit the 
refugee population as a tool of exploitation. The assessment team listed sexual 
allegations and called for further investigation against workers from 42 agencies. 


Chapter 13 End Notes 

1. Jackson Spielvogel and David Redles, Hitler's Racial Ideology: Content and Occult 

Simon Wiesenthal Center, Annual 3. See 

2. List of the non-governmental organizations in consultative status with the Economic 
and Social Council as at 31 July 1998, E/1998/INF/6,Distr. GENERAL, U.N. 


3. The Aquarian Age Community website. 

4. The Ark of Hope website. 

See http://arkofhope.oro/index.php?module=htmlpaoes&func=display&pid = l 

5. Gary Kah, The Demonic Roots of Globalism, Huntington House Publishers, 1995 p. 125 

6. Ibid., p. 116 

7. Bohemian Club, Gaylon Ross Sr.. 

8. Alex Jones, Occult Activities at the Elite Bohemian Grove, in Northern California 
Exposed!. See story template.html 

9. Moloch, Encyclopedia Mythica. 

See http://www.pantheon.Org/articles/m/moloch.html 

10 Moloch, Catholic Encyclopedia. 




12. Pete Harrison, Sabrina, Harry and the Web Help UK Paganism Grow, Reuters, 19 June 

sabrina harry and the web help uk paganism grow 

13. Caryl Matrisciana, Entertainment at any cost?,, 9 Nov. 2001. See potter/any cost.htm 

14. J K Rowling, Harry Potter and The Order of The Phoenix, p. 463. 

harry potter and the order of the phoenix 

15. barbie.htm 

148 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

16. Jacqui Goddard, Horror dolls threaten Barbie, The Scotsman, 25 Nov. 2002. See dolls threaten barbie 

17. Jonathan Petre, Euro rules force Church bodies to employ atheists, The Daily 
Telegraph, London, 25 Jan. 2003. See 

euro rules force church bodies to employ atheists.htm 

18. Manifesto 2000 for a culture of Peace and Non-violence, UNESCO. See 

uk/uk manifeste.htm#respecter 

19. Phil Brennan, UNESCO: Strangle This Monster in Its Crib, Newsmax, 18 June 2003. 
See strangle this monster in its crib 

20. UK: Children Bill to introduce surveillance of every child and record "concerns" about 
their parents, Statewatch news, April 2004 

21. £100 instant penalty for truancy, BBC, London, 3 Oct. 2003. See 

22. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, EU elite are filthy pigs, says Bossi, The Daily Telegraph, 
London, 23 Oct. 2003. See 

main.ihtml?xml = %2Fnews%2F2003%2F10%2F23%2Fwpio23.xml 

23. Portugal shamed by child sex, The Sunday Herald, 12 Oct. 2003. See 

24. Paul Webster, Toulouse officials ordered murder, says serial killer, The Guardian, 
London, 3 June 2003. See 

toulouse officials ordered murder says serial killer 

25. Neil Mackay, Child porn arrests 'too slow', The Sunday Herald, 19 Jan. 2003. See 

26 Vesna Peric Zimonjic, Government officials in sex trafficking ring arrested, The 
Independent, London, 6 Dec. 2002. See 
government officials in sex trafficking ring arrested 

27. Daniel McGrory, Woman sacked for revealing UN links with sex trade, The Times, 
London, 7 Aug. 2002. See 

28 Kelly Patricia O Meara, DynCorp Disgrace, Insight on the News, 14 Jan. 2002. See 

include/detail/story id/ 163052 .htm I 

29 Philip Willan, 6,000 children smuggled to the west each year for sex, The Guardian, 
London, 12 July 2002. See 

6000 children smuggled to the west each year for sex 

30. U.N. Finally Forced to Probe Its Pedophilia Scandal,, 7 May 2002. See 

un finally forced to probe its pedophillia scandal 

149 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Chapter 14 


Gradually, by selective breeding, the congenital differences 
between rulers and ruled will increase until they become almost different 
species. A revolt of the plebs would become as unthinkable as an 
organized insurrection of sheep against the practice of eating mutton. 

- Bertrand Russell, The Impact of Science on Society 

With the restraints of moral conventions and democracy dispensed with, the 
new Utopia offers the holy grail of all dictators: Control over life itself. Yet some 
of that control has existed for decades in spite of our notionally free and 
democratic societies. Science offers the great advantage that very few people 
can understand it. Whoever pays for its conduct and its presentation in the 
popular media can dictate the consensus on any given issue, simply by asserting 
that his committee of experts are the most distinguished. The less well funded 
and represented dissenters are labeled the dangerous 'quacks' and 'junk 

And this is how the petrochemical-pharmaceutical cartel has killed, injured, 
and sterilized millions of people over the last hundred years. The same forces 
that supported Hitler have continued to operate covertly ever since. 

Population control is multi-faceted. It includes: Reducing the number of 
people; eugenics; reducing intelligence levels; mind control; increasing poverty; 
and creating financial dependence on the pharmaceutical industry. Various facets 
of the population control agenda can be served simultaneously by the same 

Facing up to this 21st century holocaust merely requires an acknowledgement 
of the moral position of its elevated sponsors. Some might be unashamedly evil 
but most are Malthusians who believe that the there is no sanctity in human life. 
To 'save the planet' we must kill off most of the people, so said Jacques 
Cousteau in the UNESCO Courier of November 1991: 

The damage people cause to the planet is a function of demographics - it is equal 
to the degree of development. One American burdens the earth much more than 
twenty Bangladeshes ... This is a terrible thing to say. In order to stabilize world 
population, we must eliminate 350,000 people per day. It is a horrible thing to say, 
but it's just as bad not to say it. (i) 

Bertrand Russell, one of the twentieth century's most eminent philosophers, 
said the same in his book, The Impact of Science on Society: 

At present the population of the world is increasing ... War so far has had no great 
effect on this increase ... I do not pretend that birth control is the only way in which 
population can be kept from increasing. There are others ... If a Black Death could be 
spread throughout the world once in every generation, survivors could procreate 

150 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

freely without making the world too full... (2) 

Russell also supported the idea of engineering human beings to meet social 

Scientific societies are as yet in their infancy. ... It is to be expected that 
advances in physiology and psychology will give governments much more control over 
individual mentality than they now have even in totalitarian countries. Fitche laid it 
down that education should aim at destroying free will, so that, after pupils have left 
school, they shall be incapable, throughout the rest of their lives, of thinking or acting 
otherwise than as their schoolmasters would have wished. . . . Diet, injections, and 
injunctions will combine, from a very early age, to produce the sort of character and 
the sort of beliefs that the authorities consider desirable, and any serious criticism of 
the powers that be will become psychologically impossible. 

The Nazis were more scientific than the present rulers of Russia. . . . If they had 
survived, they would probably have soon taken to scientific breeding. Any nation 
which adopts this practice will, within a generation, secure great military advantages. 
The system, one may surmise, will be something like this: except possibly in the 
governing aristocracy, all but 5 per cent of males and 30 per cent of females will be 
sterilized. The 30 per cent of females will be expected to spend the years from 
eighteen to forty in reproduction, in order to secure adequate cannon fodder. As a 
rule, artificial insemination will be preferred to the natural method. . . . 

Gradually, by selective breeding, the congenital differences between rulers and 
ruled will increase until they become almost different species. A revolt of the plebs 
would become as unthinkable as an organized insurrection of sheep against the 
practice of eating mutton. (3) 

The progressively dumbed down society described in Brave New World is 
desirable to those in the ruling class who believe in 'command and control'. 
However, with the internet serving as a counter-weight to official disinformation, 
we can now afford ourselves some protection against a health catastrophe we 
might otherwise endure at their hands. 


Displayed on Rockefeller University's website homepage on 3 December 
2003, was a picture of a crowded city market with the following caption beneath: 

It took from the beginning of time until 1950 to put the first 2.5 billion people 
on the planet. Yet in the next half-century, an increase that exceeds the total 
population of the world in 1950 will occur, So writes Joel E. Cohen, Ph.D., 
Dr.P.H., professor and head of the Laboratory of Populations at The Rockefeller 
University and Columbia University, in a Viewpoint article in the November 14 
issue of the journal Sc/'ence.(4) 

Limiting population growth has been a preoccupation of the European and 
American elite throughout the twentieth century. The Population Council was 
established in 1952 by John D. Rockefeller III. The multi-billion dollar World 
Wildlife Fund is sponsored by British and Dutch Royalty and the elite 
environmental think-tank, The Club of Rome, counts several world leaders 
amongst its members. The U.N.'s population control activities receive funding 
from all the major charitable foundations, especially the Ford Foundation and 

151 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Rockefeller Foundation. Ted Turner's $1 billion United Nations Foundation and the 
$24 billion Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation are entirely devoted to population 
control activities although they are disguised as public health campaigns. 

The United Nations Population Fund (UNFPA) is the single largest international 
source of overt funding for population and reproductive health programmes. 
Since it began operations in 1969, the Fund has provided nearly $6 billion in 
'assistance' to developing countries. (5)The UNFPA only manages one quarter of 
the world's population control budget for developing countries, which is in excess 
of $1 billion per year. (6) The Netherlands, Britain, and Japan were by far the 
biggest funders of UNFPA in 2001, providing almost 50% of the total $396 
million. (7) Meanwhile the U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID) 
gives substantially more money to population control programmes than to 
healthcare and food assistance. (8) 


The population control agenda is presented to the public as a universal 
concern for planetary resources and environmental pollution, and to a lesser 
degree, socio-economic deprivation, women's rights, and reproductive health. 
Whatever the truth of these arguments, the point is that population 'control' is 
coercive. The policy papers on population control contain objectives that are so 
extreme that coercion would certainly be needed to meet them. The 1972 
benchmark environmentalist publication, The Limits To Growth, predicted 
planetary meltdown by 2050 unless radical limits to population growth were 
imposed. In 1974, this was translated into hard U.S. national security policy by 
National Security Advisor, Henry Kissinger. His lengthy National Security Study 
Memorandum 200 laid out the aims, timescale, and methods of U.S. foreign 
policy for limiting the population growth of 'lesser developed countries'. (9) 
Measures were to be taken to keep the world's population growing beyond 8 
billion, meaning 500 million fewer people by year 2000 and 3 billion fewer by 
2050. However, many suspect that this is nowhere near the real target of the 
elite and their Malthusian collaborators, which is to cut the world's current 
population in half. The American population control think tank, Negative 
Population Growth Inc., recommended in 1992 that the population of the U.S. 
should be 125-150 million, requiring a 50% cut from its current level.(io) In 1995, 
the same think-tank published a study recommending an 80% reduction in global 
population. (ii) 

In NSSM 200, Henry Kissinger stated that no single approach would 'solve' 
the population problem. Multiple and seemingly unconnected approaches are also 
less likely to attract attention. Here follows a short-list of these approaches. 


The environmental movement has been an important tool for justifying 
population reduction. As The Daily Telegraph recently reported, banning the 
pesticide DDT in the early 1970s was a huge victory for the population 
controllers. DDT was introduced as an insecticide in the 1940s and promised to 
eradicate malaria, one of the world's biggest natural killers. Despite all the 
scientific evidence to the contrary, the powerful environmental lobby declared it 
dangerous, and so it was banned. As a result, hundreds of millions of lives have 
been lost to malaria unnecessarily. (12) Alexander King, president of the The Club 

152 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

of Rome, confirmed the real purpose of the ban: 

My own doubts came when DDT was introduced. In Guyana, within two 
years, it had almost eliminated malaria. So my chief quarrel with DDT,in 
hindsight, is that it has greatly added to the population problem. (13) 



The pharmaceutical industry is a multi-trillion dollar business, and healthcare 
spending consumes a significant proportion of Western GDP. One family in 
particular has played a key role in the development of the pharmaceutical 
industry - The Rockefellers. As described in chapters 2 and 4, the Rockefellers 
invested in the German chemical and pharmaceutical giant, I.G. Farben in the 
1930s. Sterling Drug, Inc., was the main cog and largest holding company in the 
Rockefeller drug empire during the first half of the 20th Century .(i4)Today, 
Rockefeller owned Bristol- Myers Squibb Inc. accounts for nearly half of the 
chemotherapy sales in the world. (15) 

The five leading private medical research institutes in the U.S. are either 
controlled by, or affiliated to, the Rockefellers: Rockefeller University, Memorial 
Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, Aaron Diamond AIDS Research Center, Howard 
Hughes Medical Institute and Cold Spring Harbour Laboratories. These institutes 
conduct cutting edge medical research which affects the world's entire health 
care system. 

A brief chronology of the establishment of health and educational institutions 
by John D. Rockefeller: 

• 1889 -1909 The University of Chicago 

• 1901 The Rockefeller Institute For Medical Research, now Rockefeller 

• 1909 Rockefeller Sanitary Commission for Eradication of Hookworm Disease 

• 1910 In partnership with the Harriman family, funded the Station for 
Experimental Evolution and Eugenics Records Office in Cold Spring Harbour. 

• 1914 The China Medical Board (16) 

The $65 million endowment of the Rockefeller Institute dwarfed the 
budget of the Public Health Service in the first three decades of 20th century. (17) 
Rockefeller University is a world leading centre for pharmaceutical medicine. Its 
website boasts: 

In its history, Rockefeller has been associated with 22 Nobel laureates and 18 
Lasker Award recipients. Five faculty members have been named MacArthur 
Fellows and 11 have garnered the National Medal of Science, the highest science 
award given by the United States. And, 34 Rockefeller faculty are elected 
members of the National Academy of Sciences... Rockefeller forges collaborations 
with biotech and pharmaceutical companies as needed to speed research findings 
into development to improve patient care.(i8) 

The world's premier AIDS research institution, Aaron Diamond AIDS Research 
153 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Centre, is affiliated to the Rockefeller University by academic, infrastructural, and 
administrative ties.(i9) Established in 1991, ADARC is the world's largest private 
research laboratory devoted solely to biomedical research on HIV/AIDS and is 
currently co-leading China's largest AIDS 'treatment programme'. (20) Rockefeller 
owned Time magazine voted their man at ADARC, Dr David Ho, 'Man of The Year' 
in 1996. 

The Howard Hughes Medical Institute has worked in partnership with the 
Rockefeller University since 1986. (21) Founded in 1953, at close of financial year 
2002, Howard Hughes Medical Institute endowment was $10.3 billion making it 
the second largest philanthropy in the USA after the $24 billion Bill Gates 
Foundation. (22) HHMI currently employs seven Nobel prize winners. (23) Current 
Trustees include James A Baker III and CEO of the Hughes Corporation, William 
R Lummis. In 1987 World Bank President, James D Wolfensohn, was elected as 
trustee. (24) 

The Rockefeller University has close ties with Memorial Sloan-Kettering 
Cancer Center. (25) During early 1970s Laurence S. Rockefeller sat on the board of 
the Memorial Sloan -Kettering Cancer Centre and was trustee of the Sloan 
Foundation. (26)The Rockefeller University archive reveals that the Rockefellers 
provided substantial endowment for Memorial Sloan-Kettering. The New York 
Cancer Hospital, founded in 1884, was one of the first hospitals devoted entirely 
to the research and treatment of cancer. Later known as the General Memorial 
Hospital for Cancer and Allied Diseases (1899-1916), and then as Memorial 
Hospital, it was vastly expanded and modernized in 1936 as a result of 
contributions by John D. Rockefeller II and the General Education Board. The 
Sloan foundation was founded in 1934 by Alfred P. Sloan Chairman of General 
Motors. In 1945, the Sloan-Kettering Institute was created to conduct intensive 
research in oncology. In 1960 the Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center was 
formed to serve as an administrative umbrella for the hospital and institute.(27) 
Rockefeller's modernization involved relocating Memorial to a new site just across 
the street from Rockefeller University. (28) Nelson A. Rockefeller was a Member of 
Westchester County (NY) Board of Health from January 1933 to June 1953.(29) 
Westchester became home to the Phelps Hospital founded in 1952 with 
Rockefeller money. With a donation of 66 acres on the Hudson River and 
$500,000 by the Arthur Curtis James Foundation, along with a pledge of 
$800,000 toward the project by John D. Rockefeller II, the new hospital was 
born. (30) The Phelps Hospital is now one of the sites of Memorial Sloan-Kettering 
Cancer Centre. (3i) James Robinson III, Chairman of the MSKCC board of 
Overseers and Managers, is also a director of Bristol-Myers Squibb. Richard Gelb, 
Vice-Chairman of the MSKCC board, is also Bristol-Myers Chairman of the Board. 
Richard Furlaud, another MSKCC board member, recently retired as Bristol- 
Myers' president. (32) 

The Station for Experimental Evolution and The Eugenics Records Office was 
endowed with funds from the Rockefeller and Harriman families in 1910.(33) Since 
the 1970s, the re-named Cold Spring Harbour Laboratories have been home to 
the world's cutting edge research programmes on cancer as well as research in 
neurobiology, plant genetics, genomics, and bioinformatics. James Watson, co- 
discoverer of DNA, was its Director froml969 to 1994 and it is undertaking work 
to map the human genome on behalf of The Human Genome Project. (34) The 
early research into eugenics at Cold Spring was mirrored by the Rockefellers' 
funding of racial hygiene research in Germany at the Kaiser Wilhelm Institute for 
Psychiatry in Munich and The Kaiser Wilhelm Institute for Anthropology, 

154 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Eugenics, and Human Heredity in Berlin in the late 1920s. (35) 

However, the roots of this pharmaceutical stranglehold penetrate deep into 
the American education system. In 1910, a report was produced by the American 
Medical Association that changed the course of medical history. Previously, 
American medical education had been unregulated and suffered a bad reputation. 
Seeing an opportunity, the Carnegie Foundation offered to produce guidelines 
and qualifications for medical schools on behalf of the AMA. The Flexner Report, 
named after Abraham Flexner of the Carnegie Foundation, included 
recommendations to strengthen courses in pharmacology. Rockefeller and 
Carnegie then commenced to pour money into those institutions which 
conformed to the new requirements. To date, Rockefeller, Carnegie, Ford, Sloan, 
kellogg and other foundations have showered over a billion dollars on the medical 
schools of America. (36) 

According to The Drug Story by Maurice Bealle, an investigation into 
Rockefeller influence on medicine, the Rockefeller Foundation was the single 
largest contributor to American medical education: 

Harvard, with its well-publicized medical school, has received $8,764,433 of 
Rockefeller's Drug Trust money, Yale got $7,927,800, Johns Hopkins 
$10,418,531, Washington University in St. Louis $2,842,132, New York's 
Columbia University $5,424,371, Cornell University $1,709,072, etc., etc.(37) 

The Rockefellers and their alumni have held key positions directing American 
public health, and were directly involved with the establishment of American 
public health institutions. In 1938 Jewish German researchers fleeing Hitler were 
welcomed at the newly founded National Institutes of Health, built on a private 
estate in Bethesda donated by John D. Rockefeller. (38)This is still the home of the 
NIH today. Nelson A. Rockefeller was Under Secretary of Department of Health, 
Education, and Welfare from June 1953 to January 1955. Prior to this 
appointment he was Chairman, Special Committee on Defense Organization from 
February to April 1953 and afterwards, Consultant to Secretary of Defense on 
Organization of the Department of Defense from January to April 1958. Between 
January 1953 and December 1958 he was Chairman of the President's Advisory 
Committee on Government Organization. Rockefeller took the HEW job to 
reorganize the health department to meet the secrecy requirements of U.S. 
biological, chemical, and nuclear weapons programme which required substantial 
testing on unwitting American and Canadian citizens, as described in the section 
on AIDS below. (39) Laurence S. Rockefeller was also on the board of the 
Community Blood Council of Greater NY, funded by the Sloan Foundation. (40) 
Rockefeller University faculty boasts 34 National Academy of Science members 
and eight of the New York Academy of Sciences' Council currently work for 
Rockefeller connected companies or institutions. (4i) 


Charges of genocide against the Drugs Trust are appropriate on three counts: 
1) Most pharmaceuticals do not cure diseases; 2) Pharmaceuticals kill and injure 
vast numbers of people; 3) Pharmaceuticals are forced upon the public by 
governments and effective alternatives are denied. 

Given the first two charges, it might seem impossible for the third to be 
accomplished in a free society. This is how it's done: 1) Laws and regulations 

155 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

controlling medical treatments, mainly administered by agencies such as the 
Food and Drug Administration in the U.S. and The Medicines Control Agency in 
the U.K. mandate which treatments are safe, effective, and legal; 2) Professional 
medical associations who licence doctors dictate what treatments can be 
prescribed; 3) The British and European model of socialized medicine allows the 
government health departments to decide health policy and purchase treatment 
on behalf of the public which very rarely includes non-drug based treatments; 4) 
Medical research bodies controlled by the Drugs Trust and the government, 
influence the policies of the previous three. 1, 2, and 3 are the enforcement arm 
of the cartel whilst method 4 is the propaganda arm. In this way western public 
health-care system is the epitome of fascism: The corporations use government 
to enforce a cartel at the expense of the public interest. 

Recent articles in the mainstream media and medical journals have revealed 
the tip of the public death-care iceberg. Killing 250,000 patients a year, doctors 
are the third leading cause of death in the U.S. according to the Journal of 
American Medical Association. (42) 

A recent editorial in The Lancet (Vol. 359, No. 9313; 2002) warned of the 
corruption of Western medicine by drug companies. The editors of this most 
esteemed scientific journal asked, "Just how tainted has medicine become [by 
pharmaceutical industry payoffs]?" They concluded, "Heavily, and damagingly 
so," urging "doctors who support this culture for the best of intentions" to "have 
the courage to oppose practices that bring the whole of medicine into disrepute." 
(43)Up to half the articles on drugs which appear in mainstream medical journals 
are written by ghost writers employed by drug companies not the named 
authors. (44) 

Congressman Dan Burton has been investigating vaccines for four years as 
Chairman of the Dan Burton Committee on Government Reform on The Status of 
Research into Vaccine Safety and Autism. He believes that conflicts of interest at 
the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) are a problem, particularly on the vaccine 
advisory panel: 

This presents a real paradox when the CDC routinely allows scientists with 
blatant conflicts of interest to serve on influential advisory committees that make 
recommendations on new vaccines, as well as policy matters... All the while 
these same scientists have financial ties, academic affiliations, and other vested 
interests in the products and companies for which they are supposed to be 
providing unbiased oversight. (45) 

Dr Matthias Rath, research colleague of Nobel Laureate Linus Pauling and 
Director of Cardiovascular Research at the Linus Pauling Institute in Palo Alto, 
California, is a world expert in nutritional medicine. (46) On 14th June 2003, Dr 
Rath filed a complaint at the International Criminal Court in The Hague against 
the pharmaceutical industry. The charges brought were 'genocide' and other 
'crimes against humanity', committed in connection with the pharmaceutical 
industry's business with disease: 

The accused willfully and systematically maintain cardiovascular diseases, 
including high blood pressure, heart failure, diabetic complications and other 
diseases, cancer, infectious diseases including AIDS, osteoporosis and many 
other of today's most common diseases that are recognized to be largely 
preventable by natural means. The accused have deliberately caused the 
unnecessary suffering and premature death of hundreds of millions of people. 

156 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

The accused systematically and deliberately prevent the eradication of 
cardiovascular disease, cancer and other diseases by obstructing and blocking 
the dissemination of life-saving information on the health benefits of natural 
non-patentable therapies. Thereby, the accused have deliberately caused further 
unnecessary suffering and the premature death of hundreds of millions of 
people. The accused deliberately and systematically expand existing diseases 
and creating new diseases by manufacturing and marketing pharmaceutical 
drugs with short-term symptomatic relief but with known and detrimental long- 
term side-effects. Thereby the accused have deliberately caused further 
unnecessary suffering and premature death of hundreds of millions of people. 


In 1996 the U.N. Codex Alimentarius Commission launched a world-wide 
initiative to restrict access to natural medicines. The Codex has been translated 
into hard law by the E.U.(48) In August 2005, The European Food Supplements 
Directive will become law across the E.U. including the U.K.. This will remove 
over 5000 vitamin formulations from U.K. shops and dramatically cut the dosage 
of many others. The Herbal Medicines Directive under consideration by the 
European Parliament will prevent any new herbal formulas ever coming onto the 
market and remove any herbal product which hasn't had a proven track record in 
the E.U.. The Pharmaceuticals Directive seeks to expand the scope of the drug 
classification. In its current wording even food or water can be included as a 
substance which 'restores, corrects, or modifies physiological functions'. 

The banning of over-the-counter natural medicine will create a two tier 
planetary health system as the E.U. laws are imposed in other countries under 
World Trade Organization 'harmonization' rules which will include America. 
Natural Medicines will be available on prescription only for those that can afford 
to pay for private consultations whilst the state-run health-care systems will 
continue to prescribe pharmaceuticals to the public. In this way, the elite will 
blatantly deny most people access to ground-breaking life-extension herbal and 
vitamin formulations that they themselves will continue to enjoy. 

Dr Rath states that 'No sinister dark men stand behind the unethical plans of 
the 'Codex Alimentarius" commission, but unscrupulous shareholders and 
investors of the pharmaceutical industry bank on it'. (49) However, the controlling 
stake in the pharmaceutical industry is held by the same tiny cabal that controls 
all other major industries. They are committed to planetary de-population as 
their policy papers show. It is not, therefore, just about making money. 

A challenge to the E.U. Food Supplements Directive is currently being mounted 
in the European Court of Justice by the Alliance for Natural Health (see ). 

14.5 CANCER 

One in three Europeans and one in two Americans will get cancer. Ten million 
people a year die of cancer worldwide. (50) Despite the trillions of dollars spent on 
orthodox research and treatment for cancer, the medical establishment is no 
further forward in finding a cure. The reason is, of course, that the cancer 
industry is a hugely profitable population control programme which depends upon 
patented drugs. World Without Cancer: The Story of Vitamin B17, by G. Edward 
Griffin, was first published in 1974. The foreword to the 1997 edition states that 
absolutely nothing has changed since then, except the actors in the plot. 

157 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

The book details the astonishing fraud and cover-up of the effectiveness of 
vitamin B17 (laetrile), not least by the Rockefellers' Memorial Sloan Kettering 
Cancer Centre. For five years between 1972 and 1977 the effectiveness of 
laetrile was tested by Dr Kanematsu Sugiara at MSKCC. On 13 June 1973, he 
produced a report which strongly indicated its anti-cancer properties. This did not 
please his employer, who then set about denigrating his findings, saying that 
noone else could reproduce them. By 1977, the propaganda war was won. 
However in November 1997, Ralph Moss, the Assistant Director of Public Affairs 
who wrote the propaganda, did an extraordinary thing. He held his own press 
conference at which he named the MSKCC officials who had collaborated in the 
massive laetrile cover-up. He was fired the next day, but the media soon forgot 
all about it. (5i) 

Since the FDA banned laetrile in 1971, thousands of Americans have traveled 
to Mexico and Germany every year to be treated with it. American doctors can 
have their licences taken away for prescribing it, or even face imprisonment in 
California due to its 'anti-quack' cancer legislation. In the U.K., it is illegal for 
anyone other than registered medical practitioners to claim they can cure or treat 
cancer. (52) Unfortunately it is the Rockefeller/I. G. Farben monopoly treatment of 
cancer which is quackery: there is no evidence that chemotherapy or 
radiotherapy increase life expectancy. In fact both are extremely toxic and often 
lethal treatments which themselves destroy the patient's immune system and 
cause cancer and death. 

Dr. Lorraine Day is an internationally acclaimed orthopedic trauma surgeon 
and best selling author. She spent 15 years on the faculty of the University of 
California School of Medicine in San Francisco as Associate Professor and Vice 
Chairman of the Department of Orthopedics. She was also Chief of Orthopedic 
Surgery at San Francisco General Hospital and is recognized worldwide as an 
AIDS expert. Ten years ago, she contracted breast cancer and reached the 
terminal stage. However she refused orthodox treatment and devised for herself 
a ten point plan which didn't involve drugs or even vitamin supplements. 
Knowing that cancer is the consequence of a dysfunctional immune system, poor 
diet, and lifestyle and environmental factors, she cured herself by addressing 
these issues. Dr. Day, like many thousands of others, is alive and well today by 
taking matters into her own hands. She is roundly attacked in the mainstream 
press for her crusade against the fraud of the cancer industry and the drug 
industry in general. Pictures of her tumor can be seen at 


It seems illogical that self-proclaimed population control advocates would 
spend billions of dollars on vaccination programmes trying to save the lives of 
millions of people in the Third World. The grim reality is that they are covertly 
murdering and sterilizing these poor people under the guise of public health. 
Launched in 1999, The Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunization is a 
partnership of the who's who in population control: The Rockefeller Foundation, 
the $24 billion Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, the United Nations Foundation 
( a $1 billion endowment by Ted Turner), The World Bank, The World Health 
Organization and Western governments. (53) 

The stated mission of GAVI and the Vaccine Fund, is to ensure that 'all the 
world's children have equal access to lifesaving vaccines'. Unfortunately, the 
more malnourished a child is the more likely it is to suffer a severe reaction to 

158 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

immune-suppressing vaccinations, especially when they are given in 
combination. Even the American Vaccination Adverse Event Reporting Systems 
(VAERS) set up in 1990, gives some indication of the carnage caused by 
vaccines. 90% of all adverse reactions go un-reported to VAERS and chronic 
conditions which emerge months or years later, such as autism, autoimmune 
diseases, allergies, cancer, and neurodevelopment disorders, are not officially 
recognized as consequences of vaccinations anyway. (54) The report by United 
Presslnternational should be read bearing this in mind: 

As of the end of last year, the system contained 244,424 total reports of 
possible reactions to vaccines, including 99,145 emergency room visits, 5,149 
life-threatening reactions, 27,925 hospitalizations, 5,775 disabilities, and 5,309 
deaths, according to data compiled by Dr. Mark Geier, a vaccine researcher in 
Silver Spring, Md. The data represents roughly 1 billion doses of vaccines, 
according to Geier. (55) 

An investigative report by Roman Bystrianyk for, 
shows that there is little epidemiological evidence for the contribution of vaccines 
to the widescale reduction in death rates from infectious diseases. (56) The Vital 
Statistics of the United States, published by the Bureau of the Census and the 
U.S. Dept. of Health, contain death rates from infectious diseases. From 1900 to 
1963, when the measles vaccine was introduced, death rates from measles had 
declined from 13.3 per 100,000 to 0.2 per 100,000 - a 98% decrease. From 
1900 to 1949, death rates from whooping cough declined from 12.2 per 100,000 
to 0.5 per 100,000 - a 96% decrease. From 1900 to 1949, death rates from 
diphtheria declined from 40.3 per 100,000 to 0.4 per 100,000 - a 99% decrease. 











- Scarlet Fever 


Wioaping Cfejgh 

OlpMhtf* tnrj Whooping Cough 
Vaccines Widespread Use In 
The Lste 1940s 

Measles Vaccine 
Introduced 19S3 

IT M II Ir — r-r- 

-jS* <& „£*> <# -XV J? >$> <£ <$• _£ _* <£> <§> <® a fr J? j& <£■ j? j£ _# _<£ 

,$> ^r N ? ^ N n ^ ^i £i r ^ r ^ r ^ £t £b ^> £i 4?r $> Q ,p ^1 ^s Jib 


fig. 1: Death rates from infectious diseases in the U.S. 

Mortality data in England and Wales provided by the Office of National 
Statistics in 1997 shows an identical picture. From 1850 to 1968, when the 
measles vaccine was introduced, death rates from measles had declined from a 

159 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

range of 52.11 to 26.6 per 100,000 to 0.11 per 100,000 - a range of 99.6% to 
99.8% decrease. From 1860 to 1955, death rates from whooping cough declined 
from a range of 43.73 to 60.86 per 100,000 to 0.2 per 100,000 - a 99.5% to 
99.7% decrease. 

Also note that scarlet fever and typhoid were eliminated in both countries 
without any vaccination programme. 

Public health experts have long recognized these facts. Thomas McKeown was 
Professor of Social Medicine in the University of Birmingham Medical School 
between 1950 and 1978. He is still regarded as a major social philosopher of 
medicine, and known for his important works on epidemiology and the practice 
and purpose of medicine. His conclusion was that infectious diseases were 
declining well before widespread vaccination: 

The distinguished epidemiologist Thomas McKeown (1912-1988) maintained that 
reductions in deaths associated with infectious diseases (air-, water-, and food-borne 
diseases) cannot have been brought about by medical advances, since such diseases 
were declining long before effective means were available to combat them. 

A paper published in the premier medical journal, The Lancet, in Januaryl977 
by the Department of Community Medicine, also indicated that vaccinations were 
not responsible for the decline in mortality: 

Vaccination, beginning on small scale in some places around 1948 and on a 
national scale in 1957, did not affect the rate of decline if it be assumed that one 
attack usually confers immunity, as in most major communicable diseases of 
childhood. ... The steady decline of whooping cough between 1930 and 1957 is 
predictive of a linear exponential decay characteristic of a general and progressive 
lessening in the volume and spread of infection among the susceptible population. 
With this pattern well established before 1957, there is no evidence that vaccination 
played a major role in the decline in incidence and mortality in the trend of events 

An even a more recent editorial statement from the Journal of Pediatrics in 
December 1999 declared that proper sanitation was largely responsible for the 
early large declines in infectious diseases: 

...the largest historical decrease in morbidity and mortality caused by infectious 
disease was experienced not with the modern antibiotic and vaccine era, but after the 
introduction of clean water and effective sewer systems. 

Again, in the August 2001 edition of the American Journal of Infection Control, 
epidemiologists concluded that, 

except for the smallpox vaccination, which was introduced in 1798 and made 
compulsory in England in 1853, the overall contribution of medical innovations to the 
health revolution of the 1800s is difficult to validate. Diphtheria, tetanus, and 
pertussis vaccine arrived on the scene only after disease mortality rates already had 
been reduced significantly; measles, rubella, and polio vaccines did not become 
available until the middle of the 20th century 


160 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Because they do not trigger a proper immune response, vaccinations give live 
viruses and other live vaccine contaminants a headstart in the body. Normally 
microorganisms have to pass through the mucous membranes in the mouth and 
gastro-intestinal tract which are lined with Immunoglobulin A. Interaction with 
IgA triggers a cellular immune response which precedes the antibody/humoral 
response. Injected microorganisms bypass the mucousal /cellular immune 
system and directly trigger the antibody-producing plasma cells in the bone 
marrow. This is why vaccine manufactures add immune system stimulating 
'adjuvants' such as aluminium, lipopolysacchride and squalene. Live 
microorganisms also take advantage of significant immune suppression caused 
by the vaccination itself. Research found that 20% of measles vaccines recipients 
have chronic measles infections in their brains later in life indicating that live 
virus vaccines create greater risk of developing the disease. (57) In the New 
England Journal of Medicine of July 1994, a study found that over 80% of 
children under 5 years of age who had contracted whooping cough had been fully 
vaccinated against it. (58) 

Dr. Archie Kalokerinos is a Life Fellow of the Royal Society for Health, a Fellow 
of the International Academy of Preventive Medicine, Fellow of the Australasian 
College of Biomedical Scientists, Fellow of the Hong Kong Medical Technology 
Association, and a Member of the New York Academy of Sciences. In 1978 he 
was awarded the A. M.M. (Australian Medal of Merit) for 'outstanding scientific 
research'. On the subject of vaccines he comments: 

My final conclusion after forty years or more in this business [medicine] is 
that the unofficial policy of the World Health Organization and the unoffical policy 
of the 'Save the Children's Fund' and... [other vaccine promoting] organizations 
is one of murder and genocide... I cannot see any other possible explanation... 
You cannot immunize sick children, malnourished children, and expect to get 
away with it. You'll kill far more children than would have died from natural 
infection. "It was similar with the measles vaccination. They went through Africa, 
South America and elsewhere, and vaccinated sick and starving children... They 
thought they were wiping out measles, but most of those susceptible to measles 
died from some other disease that they developed as a result of being 
vaccinated. The vaccination reduced their immune levels and acted like an 
infection. Many got septicaemia, gastro-enteritis, etc, or made their nutritional 
status worse and they died from malnutrition. So there were very few susceptible 
infants left alive to get measles. It's one way to get good statistics, kill all those 
that are susceptible, which is what they literally did. "(59) 

American children receive up to forty vaccinations before the age of two. Dr. 
H.H. Fudenberg, world-renowned immunologist with hundreds of publications to 
his credit, made the following comments: 

One vaccine decreases cell-mediated immunity by 50%, two vaccines by 70%. ..all 
triple vaccines (MMR, DTaP) markedly impair cell-mediated immunity, which 
predisposes to recurrent viral infections. (60) 

Like HIV, the measles virus is particularly immune suppressing hence the 
danger of the live virus measles vaccine. In 2001, GAVI launched an initiative to 
vaccinate all 200 million children in sub-Saharan Africa against measles, despite 
the fact that HIV infection is rampant there. (61) 

161 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


As well as the dangerous assault on fragile immune systems by the vaccine's 
active ingredients, there are live contaminants in vaccines. Microorganism 
contamination, is a relatively common finding in many commercial vaccines. One 
study in the journal Vaccine in 1986, found that ~6% of commercial vaccines 
tested were contaminated with a tiny bacteria called mycoplasma. Most 
U.S. military personnel deployed to the Gulf in 1990 received up to 30 
vaccinations in a two to three day period, some probably experimental and 
administered without proper informed consent. Recent studies by the Institute of 
Molecular Medicine found that ~40% of veterans with Gulf War Illness were 
infected with mycoplasma fermentans. (62)100% of Gulf War Illness patients who 
developed the motor neuron disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, tested 
positive for systemic mycoplasma infection. (63) 

The polio vaccine administered to thirty million Americans during the late 
fifties and early sixties was contaminated with the monkey virus SV40. This is 
believed to be responsible for an epidemic of cancers. (64) When SV40 was 
discovered in rhesus monkey kidney cells during the early 1960s, the 
manufacturers switched rapidly to cells from African green monkeys. However Dr 
John Martin, an FDA scientist discovered in 1972 that these cells were also 
contaminated, this time with a cytomegalovirus. To date his requests to have the 
vaccine properly tested have gone unanswered by the FDA because the 
manufacturers can hide behind 'proprietary interests'. Dr Martin now works as an 
independent researcher studying the role of this 'stealth' virus in whole range of 
chronic debilitating illnesses. (65) 


The World Health Organization has a twenty year history of developing 
contraceptive vaccines. These work by creating immunity to the body's own 
fertility hormone, human chorionic gonadotrophin (HcG).(66) A BBC documentary 
entitled Horizon: The Human Laboratory aired 5 November 1995, revealed that 
the W.H.O. started using these vaccines to sterilize women in the mid 1990s. 
They got caught giving it to women without informed consent in the Philippines, 
by putting in the tetanus shots. (67)(68) After the recipients of the vaccine started 
having miscarriages a study conducted by the Philippine Medical Association on 
behalf of the Philippine Department of Health revealed that almost 20 percent of 
the tetanus vaccine sampled positive for HcG. 

A UNICEF campaign to vaccinate Nigeria's youth against polio may have been 
a front for sterilizing the nation, according to Dr. Haruna Kaita, a pharmaceutical 
scientist. In March 2004 he reported that, using WHO-recommended 
technologies like Gas Chromatography (GC) and Radio-Immuno assay, he found 
evidence of serious contamination. "Some of the things we discovered in the 
vaccines are harmful, toxic; some have direct effects on the human reproductive 
system," he said. Asked why he thought manufacturers would do this, he replied: 

These manufacturers or promoters of these harmful things have a secret agenda 
which only further research can reveal. Secondly they have always taken us in the 
third world for granted, thinking we don't have the capacity, knowledge and 

162 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

equipment to conduct tests that would reveal such contaminants. And very 
unfortunately they also have people to defend their atrocities within our midst, and 
worst still some of these are supposed to be our own professionals who we rely on to 
protect our interests. (69) 


First manufactured in the 1930s, thimerosal is a mercury compound containing 
49.6% ethyl mercury by weight. Since then it has been used in some multi-dose 
vaccines as a preservative. Autism was relatively uncommon before 1990, 
averaging around 1 in 10,000 American children. Today it averages 1 in 150. (70) 
7 out of 10 autistic children have an I.Q below 70 points, low enough to create 
'learing difficulties'. Congressman Dan Burton predicts that if current trends 
continue, there could be 4 million autistic Americans in the next decade. (7i) 
Researchers believe that when the number of vaccines given to children was 
increased in 1990, the public health agencies failed to take into account the 
cumulative mercury exposure. 

A United Press International investigation into the vaccine controversy 
reported that, depending on what vaccines a child got during that period, a visit 
to the doctor during the 1990s may have exposed some children to 125 times 
the limit on mercury set by the Environmental Protection Agency. Since the mid- 
1980s the CDC has doubled the number of vaccines children get, up to nearly 40 
doses before age 2. (72) On 7 July 1999, The American Academy of Pediatrics and 
the U.S. Public Health Service issued a joint statement calling for the removal of 
thimerosal from vaccines following a risk assessment by the FDA. Although 
manufacturers did take steps to remove it from many vaccines, there is no 
requirement for them to do so because the CDC will not take action. Dr. Mark 
Geier, an expert witness on vaccine cases, states that major manufacturers are 
still using thimerosal and that children were being injected with more mercury 
than ever in 2003.(73) Fluzone by Aventis Pasteur, is provided in multi-dose vials 
that still contain 25mcg of thimerosal, 25 times the safe level of mercury 
suggested by the FDA. (74) For this reason, Congressman Dan Burton and Dave 
Weldon have introduced Bills to ban thimerosal use in vaccines. 

The Insitute of Medicine, which advises the CDC on this issue, refuses to 
acknowledge the dangers of thimerosal. This is in spite of Dr Mark Gaier's study 
published in the Journal of American Physicians and Surgeons in April 2003(75) 
which concluded that there is a strong link between thimerosal exposure and 
neurodevelopment disorders such as autism, speech impediments, and attention 
deficit disorder. Gaier noted that one in eight American children requires special 
education due to brain impairment and that number is expected to rise to one in 

In February 2000, Dr Thomas Verstraeten of the National Immunization 
Program of the CDC produced an analysis of the CDC's Vaccine Safety Datalink, a 
patient record database that includes information on children vaccinated who 
developed neurological disorders. These findings were never made public but 
they were discussed at a secret CDC conference held on 7-8th June , 2000 at the 
Simpsonwood Retreat Center, Norcross, Georgia. This was top level assembly of 
51 scientists and physicians, of which five represented vaccine manufacturers 
(Glaxosmithkiine, Merck, Wyeth, North American Vaccine and Aventis Pasteur). 
Minutes of this conference were obtained by Congressman David Weldon through 

163 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

a freedom of information request. (76) Verstraeten's findings showed a risk of 
autism 2.48 times greater for infants who received the highest amounts of 
mercury in vaccines. The delegates agreed that these findings should be kept 
secret and went on to discuss how they could manipulate the data to conceal the 

In November 2003, Verstraeten et al. published a study in Pediatrics which 
denied the association. The Journal did not disclose the fact that since the 
meeting in 2000, Verstraten had been working for Glaxosmithkline. In December 
2003, Congressman Weldon got Dr. Mark Gaier access to the same Datalink 
database and he was able to conclude that the earlier findings were correct. (77) 


Dr Russell Blayock is a neurosurgeon and expert on excitotoxins. He warns 
that mercury is not the only vaccine additive which can cause brain damage 
including autism. (78)(79) Substances called adjuvants are added to vaccines in 
order to stimulate an immune response. These include squalene, aluminium, and 
lipopolysacchride. The problem with current heavy vaccination schedules is that 
these substances remain in the tissues, continually stimulating the immune 
system. This is particularly bad for the brain because its immune system cells 
called microglia, once activated, begin to move about the nervous system, 
secreting numerous immune chemicals (called cytokines and chemokines) and 
pouring out an enormous amount of free radicals in an effort to kill invading 
organisms. The problem is, there are no invading organisms. It has been tricked 
by the vaccine into believing there are. Unlike the body's immune system, the 
microglia also secrete two other chemicals that are very destructive of brain cells 
and their connecting processes. These chemicals, glutamate and quinolinic acid, 
are called excitotoxins. They also dramatically increase free radical generation in 
the brain. Studies of patients have shown that levels of these two excitotoxins 
can rise to very dangerous levels in the brain following viral and bacterial 
infections of the brain. High quinolinic acid levels in the brain are thought to be 

the cause of the dementia seen with HIV infection. 

A recent study by the world-renowned immunologist Dr. H. Hugh Fudenberg, 
found that adults vaccinated yearly for five years in a row with the flu vaccine 
had a 10-fold increased risk of developing Alzheimer's disease. He attributes this 
to the mercury and aluminum in the vaccine. Interestingly, both of these metals 
have been shown to activate microglia and increase excitotoxicity in the brain. 


In the early 1970s the medical establishment came up with a diagnosis of 
Sudden Infant Death Syndrome (SIDS) and Shaken Baby Syndrome (SBS) to 
hide the fact that vaccines might be killing thousands of babies all over the world 
every year. After their baby fell victim in 1997, Alan and Francine Yurko launched 
The Yurko Project, to expose the real cause of their son's death. (80) They 
successfully rallied an army of scientists and doctors from around the world and 

164 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

overturned Alan Yurko's wrongful conviction for shaking his son to death in 
August 2004, after he had spent seven years in prison. A series of high profile 
cases in the U.K. have thrown the whole diagnoses of shaken baby syndrome 
and other spurious allegations of infanticide into disrepute. (8i)(82)(83) 

Most of the parents who contact the Yurko Project for help state that their 
child's problems began within days of vaccination. This reflects the official data 
on SIDS and SBS. There are approximately 2500 SIDS cases and 1300 SBS 
cases per year in the U.S.. The Center for Disease control acknowledges that the 
peak age for SIDS - 2 to 4 months- coincides with the first round of vaccinations. 
(84)The bacterial vaccines which contain endotoxin, DTaP and Hib, are particularly 
suspect. In its latest review, The Institute of Medicine has been unable to rule 
out the connection between DtaP and SIDS. (85) The mean average age for SBS 
cases is 2.2 months. (86) 


The connection between vaccination and inflammatory disease is strong. 
Inflammatory diseases plaguing Western nations include: Type one diabetes, 
rheumatoid arthritis, asthma, hay fever and other allergies, multiple sclerosis, 
Guillain-Barre, amyotrophic-lateral- sclerosis/motor neuron disease, Stevens- 
Johnson's syndrome, Lupus, Alzheimer's, Parkinson's, Huntington's, Crohn's 
colitis and irritable bowel syndrome. 

In the U.S., asthma in children has doubled in the last twenty years coinciding 
with the doubling of childhood vaccines. (87) 

In New Zealand there was a 60% increase in juvenile diabetes following a 
massive hepatitis B vaccination programme for newborns. In Finland the 
incidence of juvenile diabetes increased 147% in children under five after the 
introduction of three new vaccines for children in the late 1970s. Then in the late 
1980s addition of a live MMR vaccine and an experimental vaccine (Hib) resulted 
in another 62% increase in the incidence of juvenile diabetes in children 3 
months or older who received the new multiple vaccines. Interestingly, a former 
NIH investigator, Dr. J. B. Classen, has proposed that the increase in type 1 
juvenile diabetes associated with multiple childhood vaccines may be avoidable 
by changing the regimen by which multiple vaccines are given in childhood. (88) 

Merck & Co.'s documentation on the adverse reactions to its Hepatitis B 
vaccine is published in the Physician's Desk Reference. Some of the inflammatory 
and autoimmune diseases listed include Guillain-Barre, multiple sclerosis, 
arthritis, lupus and Stevens-Johnson's syndrome. (89) 

In 1998, France became the first country to terminate a hepB vaccine program. 
The French Ministry of Health acted when complaints of multiple sclerosis, 
rheumatoid arthritis and other illnesses in patients who received the hepB 
vaccine were reported. Up to 900 cases of MS may have been linked to the 
vaccine. (90) 

Immunization with the recombinant hepatitis B vaccine trebles the risk of 
developing multiple sclerosis according to new U.S. research based on UK 
statistics. Published in Neurology, a study by the Harvard School of Public Health 
estimated that HBV immunization was associated with a 3-fold increase in 
incidence of MS within 3 years. (9i) 

The 2002 the 'Madsen study' of 537,304 children in Denmark concluded that 
there was no link between the MMR vaccine and autism. This study is cited by 
public health agencies around the world as definitive proof that MMR is safe. 

165 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

However in Autumn 2004, an article was published which contradicted these 
findings. The Madsen study monitored the progress of vaccinated children in 
Denmark for only four years. Dr Fouad Yazbak and Dr G S Goldman looked at the 
same data but over a longer period of time and found that prevalence of autism 
among children aged from 5 to 9 stood at 8.38 cases per 100,000 in the pre- 
vaccine years 1980 to 1986, and then rose to 71.43 cases by the year 2000. (92) 


SmithKline Beecham produced a vaccine for Lyme disease called Lymerix in 
1996. By October 2000 it had been given to 1.4 million people according to the 
Centers for Disease Control. However, the company pulled the vaccine off the 
market in February 2002 after large numbers of recipients developed chronic 
arthritic symptoms. (94) 

The science of immunology is extremely complex but vaccination critics 
believe that the fundamental problem with vaccines is the injection of foreign 
substances directly into the body. Heavy childhood vaccination schedules may 
permanently skew the immune system towards a humoral response. Immune 
systems biased towards humoral immunity are associated with autoimmune 
diseases and allergies. 

Autoimmune diseases can also be caused by the virus itself as well as by 
modification to the cellular/humoral balance of the immune system. Viruses and 
other live vaccine contaminants such as mycoplasmas frequently have surface 
proteins which are similar to those in the human body, particularly in the brain 
and nervous system. (95) It is well established in the scientific literature that genes 
can be transferred between microorganisms and human cells. Any slight genetic 
changes to the surface proteins of human cells by genetic transfer from 
microorganisms or vice-versa can lead to an autoimmune response. (96) (97) 


Many adverse reactions to vaccines can prove fatal in the long term. Dr. 
Russell Blayock points out the relationship between inflammatory disease and 
cancer. Medical research found that 76% of cancer patients had developed an 
inflammatory disease 7-13 years before. (98) These findings were the cover story 
of Time Magazine on 23 February 2004. Inflammation produces large amounts of 
free-radicals that damage DNA. (99) 


In July 2004, The Independent newspaper reported that vaccines which block 
sensations of euphoria associated with narcotics and smoking are under 
development. The British Government has backed the research in the hope that 
soon, doctors will be able to vaccinate children to prevent them experiencing the 
pleasure associated with taking drugs. Given that vaccines are already strongly 
suspected of reducing childrens' intelligence, any attempt to interfere with their 
emotional responses has to be viewed with concern. Will the new vaccines create 
a generation of emotionally impotent automatons? Orwell predicted that The 
Party would abolish the orgasm, after all. (ioo) 


166 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

America's consumption of psychotropic drugs is so great that Prozac has 
made its way into the water supply and is contaminating fresh water fish. Not 
satisfied with this achievement, in July 2004, President Bush's 'New Freedom 
Commission on Mental Health' recommended screening all American school 
children for mental illness with a view to possible treatment with new 
antidepressants and anti-psychotic drugs. George Bush sr. sits on the board of Eli 
Lilly, which manufactures Zyprexa, one of the anti-psychotics recommended by 
the Commission. (ioi)(io2) 

Ritalin is prescribed to about two million American children. It has become 
the standard way for teachers and parents to deal with unruly children even to 
the point where children are being threatened with expulsion or being taken into 
care if they do not take it.(io3) Ritalin is an ideal mind control drug because it 
suppresses the natural energy and spirit of young people often leaving them 
robotic, lethargic, depressed, or withdrawn. It also introduces the idea at an early 
age that drugs are an acceptable way of dealing with social problems. 

Europe is not being left behind on the quest for 'soma'. Nearly one in four 
French people are on tranquillizers, antidepressants, anti psychotics, or other 
mood-altering prescription drugs. An average of 40% of men and women aged 
over 70 in France were routinely prescribed at least one of this class of 
dependence-creating drug, as well as some 4% of all children under nine.(i04) 

As discussed in chapter 11, the U.K. draft Mental Health Bill creates powers to 
compel medication for a whole range of 'disorders of the mind.' 

Prozac and other SSRIs are capable of inducing psychosis and suicidal 
depression. In the U.K., certain SSRIs have recently been banned from being 
prescribed to children after a string of suicides. The active ingredient in prozac 
and many other drugs is fluoride, which has been linked to brain damage and 
loss of I.Q. (see Fluoride below). 


The future of mind control and even body control, lies in electronic implants 
which are currently under development. The U.S. military-directed research of 
implantable microchips and their war fighting applications was discussed earlier in 
Chapter 12. Some recent news articles describe medical applications of 
microchips with mind and body control potential. The BBC reported that patients 
with chronic migraines could one day have an electric device implanted into their 
foreheads to control the pain. Doctors in the United States have already used the 
treatment successfully on one woman, who was suffering from constant 
headaches. (105) The BBC also reported that U.S scientists writing in Nature 
Materials describe a drug-containing microchip which can be implanted in the 
body. This releases the medication slowly so the patient no longer has to take 
any pills. (106) 

With satellite linked implantable microchips being developed by Applied Digital 
Solutions Inc., the prospect of remote controlled medical implants may not be 
too distant. 


Congressman Dennis Kucinich's 2001 Preservation of Space Act calls for a ban 

167 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


the use of land-based, sea-based, or space-based systems using radiation, 
electromagnetic, psychotronic, sonic, laser, or other energies directed at 
individual persons or targeted populations for the purpose of information war, 
mood management, or mind control of such persons or populations. 
Kucinich was refering to technologies he had learned about during his 
chairmanship of the House Armed Services Oversight Committee. 

Private researchers, such as Dr. Nick Begich, have turned up some 
remarkably frank discussions of mind control published by the U.S. Military. The 
Mind Has No Firewall, by Timothy L. Thomas, published in the spring 1998 issue 
of the U.S Army War College's quarterly Parameters, describes decades of 
research in the U.S. and Soviet Union focused on manipulating human behaviour. 
Propaganda is considered a key tool of psychotronic warfare, including tactics 
such as 'information overload'. Certain electronic devices are completely 
undetectable, e.g. the "Russian Virus 666" which can broadcast subliminal 
images. This can put viewers of television or computer screens into a trance and 
change their perceptions. 

Dr. Begich obtained documents from the Scientific Advisory Board of the Air 
Force in which researchers envisage the development of electromagnetic 
weapons which can prevent voluntary muscular movements, control emotions, 
produce sleep, interfere with memory, and delete experience. Russian army 
Major I. Chernishev writing in the military journal Orienteer of Februaryl997, 
describes the development of a pyschotronic generator capable of broadcasting 
through telephone lines, TV, radio networks, supply pipes, and incandescent 
lights. (107) Even more disturbing is the use of high power microwaves in the 
gigahertz range to beam sounds directly into human brains and literally talk to 
them. As early as 1933, Soviet scientists had discovered that microwave 
irradiation caused central nervous system changes and affected behaviour even 
at low intensity. Physiological disturbances include immune suppression, 
hormonal imbalances, sleep impairment and sterility. (ios) 

The new British police radio system called TETRA, uses pulsed microwaves at 
17.6Hz, a frequency in the 13Hz to 20Hz beta range of the human brain's 
electrical activity. Unlike ordinary mobile phone masts which only respond on 
demand and produce a continuous microwave signal, TETRA masts are 
permanently active. TETRA is a £3 billion system initiated by the Home Office 
that will be adopted by all British police forces by the end of 2005. (109) 

Interference with the alpha wave of brain activity is threatened by the U.S. 
Defense Dept.'s High Frequency Active Auroral Research Program (HAARP), a 
gigantic electromagnetic frequency generator in Alaska: 

The alpha-wave frequency of the human brain is known to be between eight and 
twelve hertz... The ionospheric wave-guide oscillates at eight hertz, making it a good 
harmonic carrier of low frequency sound (LFS) waves. In the June 17 1976 issue of 
New Scientist, Dr Frank Barnaby, Director of the Stockholm International Peace 
Research Institute, warned that if methods could be devised to produce greater field 
strengths of such low-frequency oscillations, either by natural or artificial means, then 
it might become possible to impair performance of a large group of people in selected 
regions overextended periods. (no) 

There are equivalent projects elsewhere in the world - European Incoherent 
168 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Scatter Radar site (EISCAT) in Tromsoe, Norway and SURA in Nizhny Novgorod, 


The Western diet is a 'slow kill' which largely goes undetected. Three major 
components - sugar, caffeine, and hydrogenated vegetable oils- open the door 
for every type of disease by playing havoc with the body's metabolism and 
immune system. On top of this are the neuro-toxic and cancer causing flavour 
enhancers which are added to the majority of processed foods and soft drinks 
especially in the U.S.. A report, Adolescent Health, published by the British 
Medical Association, in December 2003 stated that the present generation of 
children and teenagers will turn into the most obese and infertile adults in the 
history of mankind. (in) 


Refined sugar is extremely immune suppressing and is the first item that 
should be cut out of the diet of anyone suffering from chronic illness or wanting 
to avoid it. A suppressed immune system opens the door to every serious 
disease including cancer. Caffeine exacerbates this effect. (112) 


For decades the public health authorities persuaded the public that animal 
fats were bad and that they should consume healthier poly-unsaturated fats 
found in vegetable oils. The current hysteria regarding cholesterol stems from 
research done during the 1940s and 1950s by the manufacturers of the new 
margarines and 'healthy' fats made with hydrogenated vegetable oils. The 
suggestion was that cholesterol (specifically LDL-cholesterol) was responsible for 
heart disease, which was even then beginning to increase, due to the relatively 
high-fat diet enjoyed by most westerners. This is not borne out by the facts. 
Western diets had always contained a relatively high proportion of red meat. In 
1978, Dr. Mary Enig also proved that cancer rates were directly related to 
consumption of vegetable oils (including hydrogenated vegetable oils) and total 
fat intake, but not related to animal fat consumption. This research is often 
ignored by the cholesterol lobby, despite the fact that it has been confirmed by 
other researchers. When food manufacturers heat vegetable oil at very high 
temperatures 250- 400 C and usually in the presence of catalysts, they undergo 
hydrogenation which turns them into saturated fats. The melting point of the oil 
is raised, turning many previously liquid oils into solids. Shelf-life is increased, as 
the resulting oil is less susceptible to degrading over time. All nutritional value in 
the original oil is lost. The texture of the resultant solid can be made to resemble 
that of natural animal fats. However, during this process, 'trans-fats' are formed 
which are found to cause significant increases in blood cholesterol. Most 
processed foods in supermarkets that contain fat will therefore be laden with 
these potentially lethal trans-fats. (113) 

Ischaemic heart disease (IHD) was virtually unknown until the 1940s, when 
hydrogenated vegetable oils were introduced. Now it is one of the biggest killer in 
the Western world. The dangers of trans-fats were recognized as long ago as 

169 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

1958, but the vegetable oil industry continues to bad-mouth safer natural animal 

Announced on the front page of The Daily Mail on 5 July 2003, threats of legal 
action have caused major multi-national food companies including Cadbury, 
Kellogg, Nestle and United Biscuits to reduce or eliminate hydrogenated 
vegetable oils from their products. Fearing litigation like that taken against 
cigarette companies, the food companies decided to take drastic action. 

On 11th March 2003, Denmark passed a law banning all but the tiniest amount 
of trans-fat from food. (ii4) On 12th January 2005, the U.S. Government issued 
guidelines to manufacturers and consumers to reduce trans-fat intake and has 
forthcoming legislation on mandatory labeling. (ii5) 


There are a growing number of clinicians and scientists who are convinced 
that a group of compounds called excitotoxins play a critical role in the 
development of several neurological disorders. , Excitotoxins: The Taste That 
Kills, by neuro-surgeon Dr. Russell Blaylock, describes how the common flavour 
enhancers monosodium glutamate, hydrolyzed vegetable protein, and 
Aspartame/Nutrasweet are extremely neuro-toxic. They literally put holes in the 
brain, and cause neurological diseases and cancer, as proven in an enormous 
body of scientific research. Brain tumours grow rapidly in the presence of the 
concentration of glutamic acid. Fully aware of these facts, the public health 
regulators have allowed hundreds of millions of people to consume excitotoxins 
for over fifty years. 

The sweetener Aspartame would never have been approved by the U.S. Food 
and Drug Administration in 1981 without lobbying by G.D. Searle Inc.( since 
bought out by Monsanto) headed by Donald Rumsfeld. The FDA regulators who 
approved Aspartame went on to take jobs in the multi-billion dollar Aspartame 
industry. In addition to the FDA Commissioner who left to take up a job with G.D. 
Searle, four other FDA officials connected with the approval of Aspartame took 
positions connected with the Aspartame industry between 1979 and 1982: The 
Deputy FDA Commissioner, the Special Assistant to the FDA Commissioner, the 
Associate Director of the Bureau of Foods and Toxicology, and the Attorney 
involved with the Public Board of Inquiry. (ii6) 

The Food and Drug Administration once listed 92 adverse reactions from 
10,000 consumer complaints and would send the list to all inquirers. In 1996 the 
FDA stopped taking complaints and now denies existence of the report. 

In September 2004, a $350 million class action lawsuit was filed against 
Monsanto. The suit charges the defendants with manufacturing and marketing a 
deadly neurotoxin unfit for human consumption, while they assured the pubic 
that aspartame products are safe and healthful, even for children and pregnant 
women. Donald Rumsfeld is mentioned throughout the lawsuit. (ii7) 

Worse still, regulations allow food manufacturers to label their foods 'contains 
no flavour enhancers' if the MSG content is less than 99% pure. MSG can be 
described as anything the food companies like such as 'spice extracts' or 'natural 
flavourings'. (ii8) (ii9) Most savoury processed foods purchased in supermarkets 
contain either MSG or hydrolyzed vegetable protein. 


170 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

In 1924 soybean production in the U.S. was only at 1.8 million acres 
harvested. Today, the soybean is America's third largest crop (harvesting 72 
million acres in 1998), supplying more than 50 percent of the world's soybean 

Most of these beans are made into animal feed and are manufactured into 
soy oil for use as vegetable oil, margarine and shortening. For more than 20 
years now, the soy industry has concentrated on finding alternative uses and 
new markets for soybeans and soy byproducts. It can now be found disguised as 
everything from soy cheese, milk, burgers and hot dogs, to ice cream, yogurt, 
vegetable oil, baby formula and flour. These are often marketed as low-fat, 
dairy-free, or as a high-protein, meat substitute for vegetarians. But soy isn't 
always mentioned on food labels. Today, 60% of the food on America's 
supermarket shelves contain soy derivatives (i.e. soy flour, textured vegetable 
protein, partially hydrogenated soy bean oil, soy protein isolate). (120) 

All soybean producers pay a mandatory assessment of one-half to one per 
cent of the net market price of soybeans. The total - something like US$80 
million annually - supports United Soybean's programme to strengthen the 
position of soybeans in the marketplace. Public relations firms help convert 
research projects into newspaper articles and advertising copy, and law firms 
lobby for favourable government regulations. IMF money funds soy processing 
plants in foreign countries, and free trade policies keep soybean abundance 
flowing to overseas destinations. The push for more soy consumption has been 
relentless and global in its reach. (121) 

On 25th October 1999, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) decided 
to allow a health claim for products "low in saturated fat and cholesterol" that 
contain 6.25 grams of soy protein per serving. The best marketing strategy for a 
product that is inherently unhealthy is, of course, a health claim. 

Two senior U.S. government scientists, Drs. Daniel Doerge and Daniel 
Sheehan of the National Center for Toxicological Research, broke ranks with the 
FDA, claiming that soy could increase the risk of breast cancer in women, cause 
brain damage and thyroid disorders, and cause sexual abnormalities in infants. 
They wrote an internal protest letter warning of 28 studies revealing toxic effects 
of soy, mostly focusing on chemicals in soy known as isoflavones, which have 
effects similar to the female hormone oestrogen. (i22)They pointed to a major 
study of 3,734 Japanese American men which found that soy consumption was 
associated with increased brain shrinkage in middle age, increased cognitive 
impairment and Alzheimer's disease. (123) Soy has the highest level of glutamic 
acid of any plant food, therefore it has an excitotoxic effect on the brain. (124) 
In May 2003, the U.K. Government's Committee on Toxicity of Chemicals in 
Food, Consumer Products and the Environment issued a report on 
phytoestrogens and health. It concluded, 

After reviewing the data and conclusions in the report relating to soy-based infant 
formula, SACN considered that there is cause for concern about the use of soy-based 
infant formula. Additionally, there is neither substantive medical need for, nor health 
benefit arising from, the use soy-based infant formulae (125) 

The Committee also noted that, exposure to oestrogen in infants can lead to 
menstrual problems in females and low sperm count in males. "The amount of 
phytoestrogens that are in a day's worth of soy infant formula equals 5 birth 

171 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

control pills," says Mary G. Enig, Ph.D., president of the Maryland Nutritionists 
Association. She and other nutrition experts believe that infant exposure to high 
amounts of phytoestrogens is associated with early puberty in girls and retarded 
physical maturation in boys. A study published in The Lancet in July 1997, by Dr 
K. Setchell eta/, found that in the blood of infants tested, concentrations of soy 
isoflavones were 13000-22000 times higher than natural estrogen concentrations 
in early life. (126) 

A study of babies born to vegetarian mothers, published in the British 
Journal of Urology in January 2000, indicated just what those changes in baby's 
development might be. Mothers who ate a vegetarian diet during pregnancy had 
a fivefold greater risk of delivering a boy with hypospadias, a birth defect of the 
penis. The authors of the study suggested that the cause was greater exposure 
to phytoestrogens in soy foods popular with vegetarians. (127) 

Early maturation in girls is frequently a harbinger for problems with the 
reproductive system later in life, including failure to menstruate, infertility and 
breast cancer. (128) 

In short, soy is certainly nature's contraceptive and may also be affecting the 
sexual characteristics and sexual orientation of future generations. It is 
recognized that transexuality is a medical condition caused by the effect of 
hormonal aberrations on the brain of the developing foetus. (129) On 20 January 
2005, the U.K. Civil Service website on Diversity reported that, 

Estimates vary on the number of transvestite men in the population, owing to 
the lack of any research data whatsoever. Informed guesses have been as high as 1 
in 20 adult males. Certainly estimates between 1/100 and 1/200 would not be 
outrageous, if judged only by the commercial success of businesses catering for the 
interests of those people. 

.... Depending where you draw the line in what to count, between 1 in 200 and 1 in 
1000 children are born with a visible or concealed ambiguity in their genitals, gonads 
and/or chromosomes which qualify them as Intersex (130) 

Soy is not the only substance linked to sexual changes in humans. The 
National Geographic magazine reported that scientists are warning that 
chemicals in pesticides, plastics and other products are 'endocrine disrupters' 
which are having a serious gender altering impact on both animals and humans. 



Water fluoridation has been rejected by most Western European nations but 
the U.K. currently fluoridates 11% of its water supply and the U.S around 60%. 
The 2003 Water Act requires British water companies to fluoridate the water 
supply if requested to do so by the local Strategic Health Authorities. However 
any decision by health authorities must follow public consultation at the local 
level. (132) (133) 

A by-product of the nuclear power, fertilizer, and other heavy industries, 
fluoride is more toxic than lead and only marginally less toxic than arsenic. 

Dr. R. Swinburne Clymer tried to expose the purpose of water fluoridation in 
his book, The Age of Treason (1957). He wrote: 

172 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Charles Eliot Perkins, a research worker in chemistry, biochemistry, physiology and 
pathology . . . was sent by the United States Government to help take charge of the 
I.G. Farben chemical plants in Germany at the end of the second world war. What 
follows are statements from a letter which Mr. Perkins wrote the Lee Foundation for 
Nutritional Research. . . . 

'. . . In the 1930s Hitler and the German Nazis envisioned a world to be 
dominated and controlled by the Nazi philosophy of pan-Germanism. . . . 

The German chemists worked out a very ingenious and far-reaching plan of 
mass control which was submitted to and adopted by the German General Staff. 
This plan was to control the population in any given area through mass 
medication of drinking water supplies. By this method they could control the 
population of whole areas, reduce population by water medication that would 
produce sterility in the women, and so on. In this scheme of mass control, sodium 
fluoride occupied a prominent place. 

We are told by the ideologists who are advocating the fluoridation of water 
supplies in this country that their purpose is to reduce the incidence of tooth 
decay in children . . . the real reason behind fluorination is not to benefit 
children's teeth. The real purpose behind water fluorination is to reduce the 
resistance of the masses to domination and control and loss of liberty. 

. . . there is a small area of brain tissue that is responsible for the individual's 
power to resist domination. Repeated doses of infinitesimal amounts of fluorine 
will in time gradually reduce the individual's power to resist domination by slowly 
poisoning and narcotizing this area of brain tissue and make him submissive to 
the will of those who wish to govern him. . . . 

. . . any person who drinks artificially fluorinated water for a period of one year or 
more will never again be the same person, mentally or physically.' (134) 

On 29th June 2000, Dr William J. Hirzy testified before the U.S. Senate 
Subcommittee on Wildlife, Fisheries and Drinking Water. (135) He represented the 
labour union of the professional toxicologists, biologists, chemists, engineers and 
lawyers working at the headquarters of the U.S. Environmental Protection 
Agency. The union voted to oppose water fluoridation in 1997. 

These are some of the points Dr Hirzy made to the committee: 

- According to a study by the National Institute of Dental Research, 66 
percent of American children in fluoridated communities show the visible sign 
of over-exposure and fluoride toxicity, dental fluorosis. 

- In 1998, the results of a fifty-year fluoridation experiment involving 
Kingston, New York (un-fluoridated) and Newburg, New York (fluoridated) 
were published. In summary, there is no overall significant difference in rates 
of dental decay in children in the two cities, but children in the fluoridated city 
show significantly higher rates of dental fluorosis than children in the un- 
fluoridated city. 

-There is epidemiological evidence showing elevated bone cancer in young 
men related to consumption of fluoridated drinking water. 

173 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

- In 1990, the results of the National Toxicology Program cancer bioassay on 
sodium fluoride were published, the initial findings of which would have ended 
fluoridation. But a special commission was hastily convened to review the 
findings, resulting in the salvation of fluoridation through systematic down- 
grading of the evidence of carcinogenicity. The final, published version of the 
NTP report says that there is, "equivocal evidence of carcinogenicity in male 
rats," changed from "clear evidence of carcinogenicity in male rats." The 
change prompted Dr. William Marcus, who was then Senior Science Adviser 
and Toxicologist in the Office of Drinking Water, to blow the whistle about the 
issue, which led to his firing by EPA. Dr. Marcus sued EPA, won his case and 
was reinstated with back pay, benefits and compensatory damages. 

- Since 1994 there have been six publications that link fluoride exposure to 
direct adverse effects on the brain. Two epidemiology studies from China 
indicate depression of I.Q. in children. A 1998 paper shows brain and kidney 
damage in animals given the "optimal" dosage of fluoride, viz. one part per 
million. Another publication links fluoride dosing to adverse effects on the 
brains pineal gland and pre-mature onset of sexual maturity in animals 

- In three landmark cases adjudicated since 1978 in Pennsylvania, Illinois and 
Texas, judges with no interest except finding fact and administering justice, 
heard prolonged testimony from proponents and opponents of fluoridation. 
None of them could find evidence supporting fluoridation but all were 
convinced of its toxicity. Judge Anthony Farris in Texas found: "[That] the 
artificial fluoridation of public water supplies, such as contemplated by 
{Houston} City ordinance No. 80-2530 may cause or contribute to the cause 
of cancer, genetic damage, intolerant reactions, and chronic toxicity, including 
dental mottling, in man; that the said artificial fluoridation may aggravate 
malnutrition and existing illness in man; and that the value of said artificial 
fluoridation is in some doubt as to reduction of tooth decay in man 

- In recent years, two prominent dental researchers who were leaders of the 
pro-fluoridation movement announced reversals of their former positions 
because they concluded that water fluoridation is not an effective means of 
reducing dental caries and that it poses serious risks to human health. The 
late Dr. John Colquhoun was Principal Dental Officer of Aukland, New Zealand, 
and he published his reasons for changing sides in 1997. In 1999, Dr. Hardy 
Limeback, Head of Preventive Dentistry, University of Toronto, announced his 
change of views, then published a statement dated April 2000. 

The scienfic literature is full of studies that support Dr Hirzy's testimony. 
Animal studies show decreased fertility and higher rates of miscarriage in animals 
that drank fluoridated water. Fluoridation leads to osteoporosis and increased 
fractures. Regions with high levels of fluoride in the drinking water have 220% 
more fractures. Fluoride accumulates in the thyroid gland and produces 
hypothyroidism. Communities with fluoridated water have higher rates of cancer 
than non-fluoridated communities. The incidence of osteogenic sarcoma in males 
is 70% higher in fluoridated regions. Phyllis Mullenix showed the disastrous effect 
of water fluoridation on the brains of unborn and newborn animals, and 
numerous studies show a reduction of I.Q. in humans. Fluoride is the active 
ingredient in Prozac, Paxil, and several other widely used psychotrophic 

174 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

medications. (136) 

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration has never approved any fluoride 
product for the purpose of preventing tooth decay. (137) 


In the event that I am reincarnated, I would like to return as a deadly 
virus, in order to contribute something to solve overpopulation - HRH Prince 
Philip, reported by Deutsche Press Agentur (DPA), August, 1988. 

By 2020 UNAIDS estimates seventy million people will have died from AIDS. 
(i38)There is scientific controversy over what causes AIDS. Not all researchers 
agree that the HIV virus causes AIDS. Some believe that AIDS is caused by the 
toxic drugs such as AZT used to treat the infection or is a cumulative result of 
malnutrition and other environmental and lifestyle factors. 

However, it wasn't long after AIDS appeared in the early 1980s that rumours 
of its man-made origins began to circulate. Most doctors will dismiss this as 
lunacy, but both The National Institutes of Health and Rockefellers' Exxon Mobil 
subscribe to a publication dedicated to the idea - The Journal of Degenerative 
Diseases. I have subscribed to the journal since 2001, and am member of the 
Common Cause Medical Foundation which publishes it. The Foundation was set 
up by a retired Canadian professor named Donald Scott. He began researching 
chronic fatigue syndrome(CFS)/ Myalgic encephalomyelitis (ME), but over a 
number of years he came to the conclusion a whole range of chronic diseases 
had a common cause, and that this was most likely a biological warfare agent 
developed by the U.S. military. 

Much of the groundwork had already been prepared, not least by the book 
Emerging Viruses: AIDS and Ebola, published in 1996. Harvard Public Health 
graduate and practicing dentist, Dr. Leonard Horowitz documented how AIDS 
was manufactured in the laboratories of American universities and U.S. military 
biological warfare contractors during the 1960s and 70s. The programme was 
secret until 1972, when it was publicly named the 'War on Cancer'. 

Dr. Horowitz's research confirmed the ideas of Californian pharmacologist, Dr. 
Robert Strecker. In his film produced in the late '80s, The Strecker 
Memorandum, Dr. Strecker states that HIV is genomically very similar to the 
visna virus of sheep and the bovine leukemia virus of cattle, and that this hybrid 
could have been created in the laboratory. The documentation discovered by 
Horowitz showed that the National Cancer Institute's Special Virus Cancer 
Program 1964-1978, (called Special Virus Leukemia Program until 1968), 
involved recombining animal immuno-deficiency viruses and cancer viruses. Self 
proclaimed co-discoverer of HIV, Dr. Bob Gallo, was a senior SVCP scientist. 

Most of the SVCP reports were shredded during the Watergate scandal but 
many surviving copies of the 15 annual progress reports have been retrieved. 
Horowitz concluded that HIV was introduced to gay males in the U.S. and into 
blacks in Africa in the late '70s through experimental vaccine programmes, in 
particular the hepatitis B vaccine developed by Merck Sharpe & Dohm Inc.. 

Emerging Viruses contains an endorsement from Dr. Garth Nicolson, one of 
the world's leading microbiologists and researchers on Gulf War Illness and 
former consultant to the U.S. Defense Dept: 

175 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

One cannot fail to grasp the explosive significance of this book and its main thesis, 
that biological weapons programs developed and field tested immune-system- 
destroying agents that now cannot be contained. 

Dr. John Martin, a former Food and Drug Administration insider and expert on 
the cover-up of animal virus contamination of human polio vaccines wrote the 
foreword to the book. 

However, Emerging Viruses did not address the key question posed by the 
AIDS dissidents such as Dr. Peter Duesberg: Does HIV really cause AIDS? Donald 
Scott's research into the symptoms of CFS, AIDS and other neuro-systemic 
diseases suggests that they are consistent with chronic mycoplasma infection, a 
strain of tiny bacteria. Until quite recently, most doctors hadn't even heard of 
mycoplasma even though it is documented in the scientific literature going back a 
hundred years. Mycoplasma fermentans was identified by I.G. Farben during 
WWII and was one of the biological agents tested on prisoners in the 
concentration camps. 

Unlike viruses and conventional bacteria, mycoplasma are dependent on the 
uptake of pre-formed sterols from host cells. This means they can feed off the 
vital hormones produced by the endocrine glands. On page 39 of SVCP report no. 
9,1972, the project leaders state that, in order to 'activate' retro-viruses (HIV is 
one), it was first necessary to suppress the immune system by, 'physiological 
alteration of the endocrine balance'. Certain pesticides and chemicals were also 
noted to have this effect, which does lend support to the AIDS dissidents belief 
that toxic drugs can cause AIDS. Furthermore, on page 287, it is revealed that 
the National Institutes for Health contract with Dr. Leonard Hayfick of Stanford 
University to procure and study mycoplasmas was initiated in 1964, when SVCP 

World expert on mycoplasma, Dr. Garth Nicolson agrees that they cause 
immune suppression and therefore enhance the pathogenesis of HIV: 

Pathogenic Mycoplasma species may influence HIV pathogenesis by 
specific and direct activation or suppression of the immune system. (139) 

Dr. Nicolson's professional expertise in Polymerase Chain Reaction testing 
also brought him to the conclusion that similarities between the surface 
components of both organisms enables mycoplasma fermentans to bind to HIV. 
He was roundly attacked by scientific colleagues when he suggested that the HIV 
-1 envelope gene had been inserted into certain mycoplasmas in the laboratory: 

Mycoplasmas possessing the HIV-1 env gene could allegedly have been 
engineered to make them more invasive and pathogenic and more difficult to 
find. The HIV-1 env gene encodes a surface glycoprotein, gpl20, that is involved 
in virus attachment and entry into cells through receptors on the cell surface. 
This could result in opportunistic cell attachment and penetration of many types 
of cells and most tissues. (140) 

The possibility that mycoplasma and HIV work together as a 'binary' biological 
weapon is indicated by the existence of a U.S. Army patent on mycoplasma 
fermentans incognitus strain, filed by Dr. Shyh-Ching Lo in 1991. Patent no. 
5,242,820 gives the American Registry of Pathology proprietary rights over 
methods of detecting the organism and development of vaccines for it.(i4i)The 

176 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

patent gives some important background information on the question of whether 
or not HIV causes AIDS. Dr. Lo states: 'the human retroviruses have not fulfilled 
Koch's postulates, ie. producing transmissible AIDS-like diseases in experimental 
animals'. When the researchers infected human t-cells with HIV in the test tube, 
they eventually recovered from the initial cytocidal effects and remained 
persistently infected. However when M. fermentans incognitus was added, the 
cells died. Outside of the laboratory, the army researchers reported that 26 out 
of 32 patients (81.25%) with HIV and showing symptoms of AIDS were infected 
with M. fermentans incognitus. (142) Dr. Lo concluded that this organism was 
indeed a very likely co-factor in the progression of AIDS. 

The patent also states: 

Some of these patients who are infected with M. fermentans incognitus will 
be patients who have been diagnosed as having AIDS or ARC, chronic fatigue 
syndrome, Wegener's diseases, sarcoidosis, respiratory distress syndrome, 
Kibuchi's disease, autoimmune diseases such as as collagen vascular disease and 
Lupus and chronic debilitating diseases such as Alzheimer's disease. 

Dr. Nicolson's research on mycoplasma has also confirmed the significance of 
a mycoplasma in a wide range of neuro-systemic degenerative diseases. 100% of 
Gulf War Illness patients who developed amyotrophic lateral sclerosis tested 
positive for mycoplasma infection. 7 out of 8 were positive for mycoplasma 
fermentans strain. (143) Overall ~40% of veterans with Gulf War Illness were 
infected with mycoplasma fermentans. (144) He also found mycoplasma infection 
in 50% of North American patients with rheumatoid arthritis; in 51% of North 
American patients with CFS; and in 69% of European patients with CFS.(i45)(i46) 

The co-discoverer of HIV, Dr. Luc Montagnier, warns that AIDS research 
should not neglect the role of cofactors. In particular he emphasizes the need to 
research the mycoplasma as a virulence factor of HIV: 

[i]t is a deplorable fact that to this day, the number of researchers 
interested in this line of investigation worldwide barely exceeds the 
number of fingers on both hands. (147) 

The reason why official public health policy has ignored the role of the 
mycoplasma and focused on HIV is because mycoplasma is a type of bacteria and 
therefore can be treated successfully with long-term administration of 
inexpensive antibiotics such as doxycycline. The U.S. Army patent reads: 

M. fermentans incognitus is known to be sensitive to a number of antibiotics, 
including doxycycline, quinalones such as ciprofloxacin, chloramphenicol and 
tetracycline. Therefore, effective treatment of any of the above implicated 
diseases should include administration of antibiotics to which M. fermentans 
incognitus is sensitive. 

This is this is not a popular idea with the multi-billion dollar AZT industry. 
PCR testing for mycoplasma is not offered by the U.K.'s National Health Service, 
or indeed any public health service in the world. Only a handful of specialist 
research laboratories offer these tests. Dr. Nicolson's work on testing and 
treating Gulf War Illness victims for mycoplasma infection has been rejected and 
even sabotaged by the U.S. Defense Dept.(i48)Treatment for AIDS is being 

177 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

denied because mainstreammedical research is controlled by the elite. On 30th 
April 2000, the Washington Post reported that the U.S. National Security Council 
had declared AIDS a threat to national security and therefore would be involved 
with directing AIDS research, the first time it had ever been involved in fighting 
an infectious disease. (149) Dr. Horowitz commented: 

According to U.S. government watchdog groups, and related policy analysts 
linked to JuriMed -- a North American alternative medicine advocacy organization 
— the new Clinton decree empowers the CIA to act against scientific "dissidents" 
who raise concerns regarding vaccination policies, as done in this article, as a 
threat to U.S. national security. The JuriMed communique heralded the likelihood 
of increased "mainstream [media] blackouts on AIDS dissident positions," and 
"global disease control" initiatives including "wide-ranging vaccination programs" 
becoming more coercive. (150) 


1) Emerging Viruses: AIDS and Ebola - Nature, Accident or Intentional ? by 
Dr. Leonard Horowitz DMD, MA, MPH; Tetrahedron Publishing Group, 1996. See 

2) The Journal of Degenerative Diseases, especially 2002 Vol 3, no's 3&4 and 
2003 Vol 4 no's 2&3. Write to The Common Cause Medical Research Foundation, 
Box 133 Stn B, Sudbury ON, P3E 4N5, Canada; or contact me if you live in UK. 

3)Key Documents available from The Common Cause Medical Research 

i) Department of Defense Appropriations for 1970. Hearings before a 
Subcommittee of the Committee on Appropriations, House of Representatives 
Ninety-first Congress, First Session, 9 June 1969. Download them from . 

This single most important document on AIDS was obtained under Freedom 
of Information Act by Ted Strecker (Dr Robert Strecker's brother) and 
Congressman Douglas Huff of Chicago. Both men died mysteriously shortly 
afterwards in August and September 1988 respectively. (isi) Page 129 of the 
Hearings records the most significant statements on AIDS ever made. Dr. Donald 
MacArthur, Deputy Director of Research and Technology, Department of Defense 
Research and Engineering told the Congressmen that, 

Molecular biology is a field that is advancing very rapidly, and 
eminent biologists believe that within a period of 5 to 10 years it 
would be possible to produce a synthetic biological agent, an 
agent that does not naturally exist and for which no natural 
immunity could have been acquired... it would probably be 
possible to make a new infective microorganism which could 
differ in certain important aspects from any known disease- 
causing organisms. Most important of these is that it might be 
refractory to the immunological and therapeutic processes upon 
which we depend to maintain our relative freedom from 
infectious disease... A research program to explore the feasibility 
of this could be completed in approximately 5 years at a total cost 
of $10 million... It is a highly controversial issue, and there are 
many who believe such research should not be undertaken lest it 

178 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

lead to yet another method of massive killing of large 

This is a functional description of AIDS which is currently killing 8000 people a 

ii) Smallpox Vaccine "triggered Aids Virus", by Pierce Wright, Science Editor, 
The Times, London, front page, 11th Mayl987. Un-named insiders from the 
World Health Organization told The Times that they believed the thirteen year 
long smallpox eradication program in Africa awakened the dormant HIV virus. 
The programme concluded in 1978, the same year the Special Virus Cancer 
Programme ended and the first AIDS cases appeared: 

The spread of HIV infection coincides with the most intense immunization 
programmes... Brazil, the only South American country covered in the 
eradication campaign, has the highest incidence of Aids in that region. About 
14,000 Haitians on United Nations secondment to Central Africa, were covered in 
the campaign. They began to return home at a time when Haiti had become a 
playground for San Francisco Homosexuals. 

This story was never mentioned again by The Times or any other mainstream 
media outlet, indicative of frantic censorship. All attempts to get mainstream 
media attention to the man-made theory of AIDS are blocked. Journalists from 
mainstream news organizations have approached Donald Scott but the story 
never gets past the editor. The New York Times refused to review Dr. Horowitz's 
book Emerging Viruses. 

iii) United States Patent 5,242,820, Pathogenic mycoplasma, Lo, 7 Sept. 1993 
(also available on-line at U.S. Patent and Trademark Office 

iv) Special Virus Cancer Program Progress Reports of The National Cancer 
Institute: 1971 (8), 1972 (9), 1976 (13) and 1978 (15). These are referenced in 
Emerging Viruses and in The Journal of Degenerative Diseases but the complete 
documents are available from the Common Cause Medical Research Foundation. 

v) The Scientific Paper Trail, by Don Scott. A collection of important papers 
from peer-reviewed journals such as JAMA and The New England Journal of 
Medicine. Many are referenced in The Journal of Degenerative Diseases. 


Whilst AIDS is depopulating the Third World, the West is being plagued by a 
multitude of disabling diseases. As stated in Chapter 7, disease is an important 
tool for maintaining the social hierarchy by two methods: firstly, by making 
people dependent upon the petrochemical cartel for treatment, and secondly, by 
reducing living standards. Certain disabling diseases, in which mycoplasma 
infection plays a significant role, appeared in the West at the same time as AIDS. 
These include CFS or Myalgic Encephalomyelitis (M.E.), fibromyalgia and Lyme 

Even based on the public health authorities' very conservative estimate of 
0.4% prevalence, CFS/ME has disabled over a million Americans and 250,000 
British. The true figures are possibly double these. No specific pharmaceutical 
treatment is being developed and there has been a coordinated effort by the 

179 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

health authorities in the West to deny this disease even exists and then to label it 
a psychiatric disorder despite the overwhelming evidence of an infectious origin. 
The current U.K. Science Minister, Lord Sainsbury, the supermarket baron, and 
Cambridge psychology graduate uses his family's Linbury Trust to fund purely 
psychiatric research into both CFS/ME and Gulf War Illness. Many independent 
researchers have come up with inexpensive, proven, and effective treatment 
regimes but the health authorities refuse to recognize them. 

The cover-up was documented in Osier's Web, a book written in 1996 by 
Hillary Johnson, a former Wall Street Journal writer and Life staff reporter. Ms 
Johnson has since disappeared and the publishers are now 'no longer allowed ' to 
print this book.(i52) 

The same public health policy is being applied to Lyme disease which is very 
similar to CFS/ME. Even though it is recognized as being an infectious disease, 
the authorities are blocking doctors from using inexpensive long term antibiotic 
treatment which is proven to be effective. 

The lack of treatment of veterans of the first Gulf War is also inexplicable. The 
American Gulf War Veterans Association estimates 300,000 of the 700,000 
troops serving at the time of the Gulf War conflict are sick as a result of their 
military duty, a prevalence of 42%.(i53)The Defense Dept. is refusing to 
acknowledge that there is a Gulf War Illness, labelling victims as suffering from 
"post-traumatic stress disorder" even though studies indicate 40% are infected 
with mycoplasma fermentans and would therefore benefit from antimicrobial 
therapy. (154) 

A CIA press release entitled Darker Bioweapons Future confirmed the viability 
of biological agents for economic warfare. It reports that a panel of experts from 
the National Academy of Sciences studying the future threat of biological 
weapons believed that a genetically engineered stealth virus could be used to 
cripple a large number of people in their forties and fifties with severe arthritis, 
concealing its hostile origin and leaving a country with massive health and 
economic problems. It also warned that, 'the effects of these engineered 
biological agents could be worse than any disease known to man' and that 
advances in biotechnology will be very hard to police. (155) 


Rebuilding America's Defenses, written in September 2000 by the neo- 
conservative think tank, Project for the New American Century (PNAC) hints that 
the U.S. may consider developing biological weapons "that can target specific 
genotypes [and] may transform biological warfare from the realm of terror to a 
politically useful tool "(156) 


Depleted Uranium is a serious health hazard when DU munitions are fired and 
burn up on impact. Radioactive dust blows around in the air, enabling the DU to 
get into the body through the lungs and broken skin. 

On behalf of the U.S. Army, Major Doug Rokke led a 434 man depleted 
uranium clean up team in the first Gulf War. The entire team became sick from 
DU exposure almost as soon as they arrived in the Gulf. In 1994, he was 
appointed as depleted uranium project director for the U.S. Army. Despite his 
warnings of the dangers of DU exposure, both the U.S. army and coalition forces 

180 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

continue to use DU munitions with catastrophic effects on both their own troops 
and civilian populations. 

The table below shows statistics of permanent disability claims for U.S. troops 
according to the Government's Veterans Administration. (157) 

Gulf War I 

Number of surviving troops from the combat phase of Gulf War I 592,561 
Number of permanent disability claims submitted by May 2004 230,988 

Number of permanent disability claims awarded by the VA by May 
2004 179,000 

Gulf War II (Operation Iraqi Freedom) 

Number of permanent disability claims awarded by the VA by 

August 2004 27,571 

Troops serving in the Gulf Region between August 1990 and 
May 2004 

Number of permanent disability claims awarded by the VA by May 280,000 

Dr Rokke and many other researchers believe that the hundreds of tonnes of 
DU dust deposited in Iraq, Afghanistan and the former Yugoslavia, are 
responsible for an epidemic of cancers, birth defects and an array of neuro- 
systemic degenerative diseases in both Allied troops and native populations.This 
is, in fact, a covert form of nuclear warfare, the effects of which may never 
properly be known. (158) 


As described in Chapter 4, thirty million women a year are forced to undergo 
abortion or sterilization in China. Leading Chinese dissident and Executive 
Director of Laogai Research Foundation Harry Wu states that the United Nations 
Population Fund (UNFPA) cooperates closely with the Chinese government in 
implementing the one child policy. An independent Population Research 
Investigation studied a UNFPA so-called 'model county' programme in China 
between 27-30 Sept. 2001. It found that 'voluntary' family planning in the Sihui 
County UNFPA programme did not exist. The team was told by Chinese Family 
Planning officials that there was no distinction between UNFPA's work in this 
county and their own. Chinese officials showed PRI investigators the UNFPA office 
desk, which was located within the local Chinese Family Planning Office.(i59) 

Norplant is an implant which prevents pregnancy for at least five years. It can 
only be removed by surgery. The patent is held by the Rockefeller funded 
Population Council. The BBC documentary, Horizon: The Human Laboratory 
showed how these implants are not easily removed, and in many cases the 
doctors refuse to take them out even if they are causing severe side effects. 
Despite this, it is being tested on tens of thousands of women around the world. 


181 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

14.13 GM FOOD 

The Ecologist magazine reported that adopting GM crops would place farmers 
and the food chain itself under the control of a handful of multinational 
corporations such as Monsanto, Syngenta, Bayer, and DuPont. For U.S. farmers 
this has meant: 

1. Legally-binding agreements that force farmers to purchase expensive new 
seeds from the biotech corporations each season; 

2. Having to buy these corporations' herbicides (at a cost considerably above 
that of a generic equivalent) for herbicide-tolerant crops; 

3. Paying the biotech firms a technology fee based on the acreage of land 
under GM; 

4. The development of so-called 'traitor technology' crops on which particular 
chemicals will have to be applied if the crops' GM characteristics (such as their 
time of flowering or disease resistance) are to show; 

5. The invention of "terminator technology' that stops GM plants producing 
fertile seeds; thus farmers are physically prevented from sowing saved seed and 
have to buy new seed from the biotech firms instead; and 

6. Biotech firms buying up seed companies. This creates monopolies and 
limits farmers' choices still further. DuPont and Monsanto are now the two largest 
seed companies in the world. As a result of their control of the seed industry, 
farmers are reporting that the availability of good non-GM seed varieties is 
rapidly disappearing. 

According to the UK Soil Association: ' All non-GM farmers in North America 
are finding it very hard or impossible to grow GM-free crops. Seeds have become 
almost completely contaminated with GM organisms (GMOs), good non-GM 
varieties have become hard to buy, and there is a high risk of crop 
contamination.' The U.K. Government's official adviser on GM, the Agriculture 
and Environment Biotechnology Commission (AEBC), has said it would ' be 
difficult and in some places impossible to guarantee' that any British food was 
GM-free if commercial growing of GM crops went ahead. In North America, 
farmers can no longer be certain the seed they plant does not contain GM genes. 


GM food scientists can increase the vitamin content of food, so there is no 
reason why they cannot reduce it in order to increase malnutrition, disease, and 
death on a large scale. For example, more than $100 million has been spent over 
10 years to produce transgenic rice at the Institute of Plant Sciences in Zurich. 
The Zurich team introduced three genes taken from daffodils and bacteria into a 
rice strain to produce a yellow rice with high levels of beta-carotene, which is 
converted to Vitamin A within the body. As well as altering vitamin content, over 
300 open-field trials of ' pharma' crops have taken place around the world since 
1991. In California, for example, GM rice containing human genes has been 
grown for drug production. Pharmaceutical wheat, corn, and barley are also being 
developed in the U.S., France and Canada. A biotech company called Prodigene 

182 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

has been working on growing edible vaccines in corn and in November 2000 
began trials on an edible AIDS vaccine. (162) 

By introducing drugs into food, GM technology has huge population control 


Weather modification technology exists in America and Europe. The ability to 
deploy this technology for global depopulation without detection must be 
extremely tempting for the Malthusians since droughts, hurricanes, and floods 
can be blamed on natural weather variability, solar flares, and global warming. A 
study of future military strategy called Airforce 2025 was drawn up by the U.S. 
Air University in 1996. (163) In the section entitled Weather as a Force Multiplier: 
Owning the Weather in 2025, the authors state that altering weather patterns 
will eventually become an "integral part of U.S. national security policy with both 
domestic and international applications". By 2025 the Air Force fully expects to 
be able to influence the weather "on a mesoscale (<200 sq km) or microscale 
(immediate local area) to achieve operational capabilities.".... "Achieving such a 
highly accurate and reasonably precise weather-modification capability in the 
next 30 years will require overcoming some challenging but not insurmountable 
technological and legal hurdles," the report said.(i64) "The lessons of history 
indicate a real weather-modification capability will eventually exist despite the 
risk (because) the drive exists. People have always wanted to control the 
weather and their desire will compel them to collectively and continuously pursue 
their goal," the report concluded. The military also aim to deny an enemy 
satellite communication capabilities by modifying the Earth's ionosphere. 

One of the stated objectives of the U.S. Defense Dept.'s High Frequency 
Active Auroral Research Program (HAARP) is to, 'simulate and control ionospheric 
processes that might alter the performance of communications and surveillance 
systems'. (165) The HAARP ionospheric Research Facility was established in 
Gakona, Alaska on 18th October 1993. HAARP can beam 3.6 Gigawatts of high 
frequency radio energy from earth based antennae into the ionosphere. (166) 
According to the HAARP website factsheet: 

Interest in the ionosphere is not limited to the US: a five-country consortium 
operates the European Incoherent Scatter Radar site (EISCAT), a premier world- 
class ionospheric research facility located in northern Norway nearTromso. 
Facilities also are located at Jicamarca, Peru; near Moscow, Nizhny Novgorod 
("SURA") and Apatity, Russia; near Kharkov, Ukraine and in Dushanbe, 

Airforce 2025 does not specify HAARP as a weather modification device and it 
is not one of the HAARP's official purposes. However the U.S. patent on HAARP's 
technology states that it can serve as a giant ionospheric heater: 

In such experiments, certain regions of the ionosphere are heated to change 
the electron density and temperature within these regions. This is accomplished 
by transmitting from earth-based antennae high frequency electromagnetic 
radiation at a substantial angle to, not parallel to, the ionosphere's magnetic 
field to heat the ionospheric particles primarily by ohmic heating. The electron 
temperature of the ionosphere has been raised by hundreds of degrees in these 
experiments, and electrons with several electron volts of energy have been 

183 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

produced in numbers sufficient to enhance airglow. (168) 

The disclosure section of the patent adds: 

The production of enhanced ionization will also alter the distribution of 
atomic and molecular constituents of the atmosphere, most notably through 
increased atomic nitrogen concentration. The upper atmosphere is normally rich 
in atomic oxygen (the dominant atmospheric constituent above 200 km altitude), 
but atomic nitrogen is normally relatively rare. This can be expected to manifest 
itself in increased air glow, among other effects.... This invention has a 
phenomenal variety of possible ramifications and potential future developments. 
As alluded to earlier, missile or aircraft destruction, deflection, or confusion could 
result, particularly when relativistic particles are employed. Also, large regions of 
the atmosphere could be lifted to an unexpectedly high altitude so that missiles 
encounter unexpected and unplanned drag forces with resultant destruction or 
deflection of same. Weather modification [emphasis added] is possible by, for 
example, altering upper atmosphere wind patterns or altering solar absorption 
patterns by constructing one or more plumes of atmospheric particles which will 
act as a lens or focusing device. 

HAARP is clearly one of the weather modification technologies known to the 
authors of 2025. The world's foremost independent investigator of HAARP is the 
author of Angels Don't Play this HAARP, Dr. Nick Begich from Alaska. He 

HAARP zaps the ionosphere where it is relatively unstable. A point to 
remember is that the ionosphere is an active electrical shield protecting the 
planet from the constant bombardment of high-energy particles from space. This 
conducting plasma, along with Earth's magnetic field, traps the electrical plasma 
of space and holds it back from going directly to the earth's surface, says Charles 
Yost of Dynamic Systems, Leicester, North Carolina. "If the ionosphere is greatly 
disturbed, the atmosphere below is subsequently disturbed. "(169) 

Dr. Begich also considers the role of weather modification as a weapon of 
mass destruction: 

In 1966, Professor Gordon J. F. MacDonald was associate director of the 
Institute of Geophysics and Planetary Physics at the University of California, Los 
Angeles, was a member of the President's Science Advisory Committee, and later 
a member of the President's Council on Environmental Quality. He published 
papers on the use of environmental-control technologies for military purposes. 
MacDonald made a revealing comment:"The key to geophysical warfare is the 
identification of environmental instabilities to which the addition of a small 
amount of energy would release vastly greater amounts of energy." MacDonald 
had a number of ideas for using the environment as a weapon system and he 
contributed to what was, at the time, the dream of a futurist. When he wrote his 
chapter, "How To Wreck The Environment", for the book Unless Peace Comes, he 
was not kidding around. In it he describes the use of weather manipulation, 
climate modification, polar ice cap melting or destabilization, ozone depletion 
techniques, earthquake engineering, ocean wave control and brain wave 
manipulation using the planet's energy fields. He also said that these types of 
weapons would be developed and, when used, would be virtually undetectable by 
their victims. (170) 

184 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

It is worth noting that this book was written two years after The Report From 
Iron Mountain. This report identified environmental disaster as a credible 
substitute for war for the purpose of preserving social hierarchy, once world 
government had established permanent peace. 

In response to Dr. Nick Begich's testimony to the European Parliament's 
Foreign Affairs Subcommittee on Security and Disarmament 6th Februaryl998 in 
Brussels, Swedish MEP, Mrs. Maj Britt Theorin, put forward a motion for an 
independent international inquiry into HAARP a year later. The resolution 
describes HAARP as a weapons system which disrupts the climate and, virtue of its far-reaching impact on the environment to be a global 
concern and calls for its legal, ecological and ethical implications to be examined 
by an international independent body before any further research and testing; 
regrets the repeated refusal of the United States Administration to send anyone 
in person to give evidence to the public hearing or any subsequent meeting held 
by its competent committee into the environmental and public risks connected 
with the HAARP programme currently being funded in Alaska. (171) 

In October 2001, a similar bill was introduced to the U.S. Congress. Dennis 
Kucinich, Democratic Congressman and former head of the Armed Services 
Oversight Committee, proposed to the 107th Congress, The Preservation of 
Space Act, HR2977. This called for a ban on space based weapons with specific 
reference to HAARP in section (c): 

The term 'exotic weapons systems' includes weapons designed to damage 
space or natural ecosystems (such as the ionosphere and upper atmosphere) or 
climate, weather, and tectonic systems with the purpose of inducing damage or 
destruction upon a target population or region on earth or in space. (172) 

In the same bill, Dennis Kucinich listed 'chemtrails' as one of the space based 
weapons to be banned. This is a high altitude aircraft spraying programme in the 
U.S. and Europe, observed with increasing frequency over the past two years. 
Unlike normal jet engine condensation trails - which form when hot engine 
exhaust momentarily condenses in the frigid stratosphere like exhaled breath on 
a cold day - chemical trails linger for hours, turning clear skies into milky haze in 
a process the U.S. Air Force calls "aerial obscuration". What is being sprayed isn't 
clear, only the milky streaks across the sky often forming grids, are evidence of 
the programme. The U.S. Airforce's Boeing KC-135s appear to be the main 
source of chemtrails in North America. (i73)The Hugbes Aircraft Company hold a 
patent on a mechanism for spraying the atmosphere with aluminium oxide via jet 
engine exhaust fumes. (174) Some researchers believe that some of the metals 
being sprayed, especially barium, are designed to interact with the 
electromagnetic frequencies being generated by HAARP. 

Finally, in relation to possible martial law scenarios and the recent and bizarre 
power outages that affected 50 million Americans and Canadians in August 2003, 
and then hit London, Italy and Denmark a month later, HAARP's website reads: 

Ionospheric disturbances at high latitudes also can act to induce large currents in 
electric power grids; these are thought to cause power outages. (175) 


185 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Hailed as the new industrial revolution, the ability to manipulate matter at the 
atomic level and create microscopic machines that can scour the human body is 
already well advanced. (i76)The U.S. Government has allocated almost $700 
million to military and civilian government departments for nanotechnology R and 
D. (i77)There is obvious potential for introducing nanorobots into the bloodstream 
via routine vaccinations for undetected biological manipulation and genocide. 


The foundations for the genetic manipulation of humankind envisioned in 
Aldous Huxley's Brave New World have already been laid. 


'Rebuilding Americas Defenses' by the American think-tank PNAC states that 
race specific bioweapons could be a 'politically useful tool.' Furthermore the 
epidemiology of the global AIDS pandemic indicates that the population control 
agenda does have a bias against blacks. 70% of the world's 42 million AIDS 
cases are in sub-Saharan Africa. Africa makes up only 14% of the world's 
population. 40% of American AIDS victims are black; blacks make up only 13% 
of the American population. (178) 


A cloned human embryo does not result from the random union of sperm and 
egg, but from a process called somatic cell nuclear transfer, in which the nucleus 
containing DNA from a cell of one individual is put into an egg whose nucleus has 
been removed. The resulting cloned embryo becomes virtually genetically 
identical to the individual whose DNA was inserted into the enucleated egg. (179) 
In October 2003 ITN news reported that at the University of Kentucky the first 
cloned human embryo was ready to be implanted into a surrogate mother for the 
purpose of cloning children. (iso) 


Polls show that most people favour assisted suicide, believing in the right to 
die with dignity. However, other side of the coin is that the elite want the right to 
terminate us and to legalize euthanasia for this purpose. In December 1999, a 
senior consultant at a London hospital voiced concern that there was a policy of 
"involuntary euthanasia" by depriving elderly patients of food and water. (isi) The 
British charity Age Concern states that there is a policy of not resuscitating 
seriously ill elderly patients. (182) The chilling expose of euthanasia in the U.S. 
Forced Exit by Wesley J. Smith, reveals how people entering hospital sign "living 
wills" allowing the hospital not to resuscitate them if they fall into a coma, only to 
find they are used by the hospital to deny patients treatment. (183) In the U.K. 
doctors can and do put 'do not resuscitate' on patients medical records without 
their consent. (184) 


186 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Some of the work on the Human Genome Project is being done at The Cold 
Spring Harbor Laboratory, NY. This was the old Station for Experimental 
Evolution and The Eugenics Records office and was endowed with funds from the 
Rockefellers and Harriman families in 1910. It was dedicated to scientific 
research of racial differences. Like the RIIA, the Bilderberg Group, The CFR and 
Trilateral Commission, The Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory host secret 
conferences. Its Banbury Center meetings are off -the-record discussions on 
molecular biology and genetics, human genetics, and science policy by the 
world's leading scientists. (i85) 


Alongside the physical science of genetic engineering emerged the social 
science of 'bioethics', the discipline which decides what is ethical medical practice 
and research. UNESCO established an International Bioethics Committee in 1993. 
What used to be called genocide will masquerade as social engineering 
administered by pseudo-scientific committees. In matters of life and death, the 
ruling elite will have the final word. 

Chapter 14 End Notes: 

1. Stanley Monteith MD, The Population Control Agenda, See 

2. Ibid. 

3. Stanley Monteith MD, Radio Liberty Newsletter, November 2004. See 

4. The Rockefeller University website. See 

5 United Nations Population Fund website. See 

6 UNFPA Funding. See 

7 Top 20 Donors to UNFPA in 2001, UNFPA. See 

8 USAID MAP OF SHAME, Population Research Institute. See 

9. Henry Kissinger, National Security Study Memorandum 200, 197 '4. See 

10. Donald Mann President, Negative Population Growth Inc. Why We Need a Smaller 
U.S. Population and How We Can Achieve It, Position Paper, July 1992. See 

11. J. Kenneth Smail, Confronting The 21st Century's Hidden Crisis: Reducing Human 
187 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Numbers by 80%, Forum Series, Negative Population Growth, May 1995. See series/confronting .htm 

12.Terence Kealey, "DDT is Safe", The Daily Telegraph, London, 19 July 2001. 

13. Marjorie Mazel Hecht, Bring Back DDT, and Science With It!, 21st Century Science 
and Technology Magazine, Summer 2002 issue. See 

14. Hans Ruesch, The Drug Story. 


new world order/Rockefeller Drug Censor Empire.html 

15. Dr. Alexandra Niedzwiecki, Presentation to the Hague Tribunal, 14 June 2003. See Hague/lecture niedz.htm 

16. Rockefeller Foundation website. See 

17 Dr Leonard Horowitz, Death In The Air, Tetrahedron Publishing Group, 2001 p. 46. 

18. Quick Facts, Rockefeller University website. 

19. About Us, Aaron Diamond AIDS Research Centre website. 

20. New International Partnership will improve AIDS Treatment in China, The Clinton 
Presidential Center, Press Release, 6 Nov. 2003. See 

21 Research and Clinical Initiatives, Rockefeller University website. See 

22 About HHMI, Howard Hughes Medical Institute website. See 

23 Howard Hughes: Patron Of Science?, CBS, 23 Nov. 2003. See 

24 About HHMI, op cit.. See 

25 Quick Facts, Rockefeller University, op cit. 

26 Emerging Viruses: AIDS and Ebola, Nature, Accident or Intentional? Dr Leonard 
Horowitz, Tetrahedron Inc 1996, p. 476 

27 Rockefeller University archive. See 

28. 2000 Annual Report, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center. 

29. Nelson A. Rockefeller, 1908-1979, Rockefeller University archive. See 

30. Phelps Memorial Hospital Center, The North County News, 1 August 2003. 

188 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 2003/ 1-8-03/ 1-8-03 lifestylesl.htm 

31. Memorial Sloan-Kettering at Phelps Memorial Hospital Center, Memorial Sloan- 
Kettering Cancer Centre website 

32. Dr. Alexandra Niedzwiecki op cit. Hague/lecture niedz.htm 

33. History, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories website. 

34. Ibid., Historical Highlights. 


35. Horowitz, Death in the Air, op cit., p. 357 

36. G. Edward Griffin, World Without Cancer: The Story of Vitamin B17, American Media, 
second edition 1997, pp. 262-264 

37. Hans Ruesch, op cit. 

38. Horowitz, Death in the Air, op cit., p. 347 

39. Rockefeller University archive, op cit. 

40. Horowitz, Emerging Viruses, op cit., p. 476. 

41. President's Council, New York Academy of Sciences website. See 

42 Barbara Starfield, Is US Health Really the Best in the World? JAMA. 2000;284:483- 

485. See death.htm 

43. Just How Tainted Has Medicine Become:The Lancet (Vol. 359, No. 9313; 2002). See 
( source by Dr Leonard Horowitz ) 

44 Antony Barnett, Revealed: how drug firms 'hoodwink' medical journals, The Observer, 

London, 7 Dec. 2003. See news/story/0,6903,1101680,00.html 

45. 51. Mark Benjamin, United Press International Investigates: The vaccine conflict, 20 
July 2003, copy on See awareness/UPI Investigates.html 

46. Dr. Matthias Rath - Biography, Dr Rath Health Foundation website, see FOUNDATION/ 

About Dr Matthias Rath/dr rath.htm 

47. Dr Matthias Rath, Complaint Against Genocide and Other Crimes Against Humanity 
Committed in Connection With The Pharmaceutical 'Business With Disease' And The 
Recent War Against Iraq. See Hague/com plaint/index, htm I 

48. EU Legislation, Alliance for Natural Health website. See 

189 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

49. Dr Matthias Rath, The Documentation About "Codex Alimentarius" Who Is Behind The 
Codex Alimentarius? 

http://www4. dr-rath- foundation, org/ 

PHARMACEUTICAL BUSINESS/health movement against codex/ 
health movement04.htm 

50. Dr. Alexandra Niedzwiecki, op cit. 

51. G. Edward Griffin, World Without Cancer: The Story of Vitamin B17, American Media, 
second edition 1997, pp 40-41, 59-50 

52. The Cancer Act 1939, U.K. See news/wales/3044315.stm 

53. The Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunization websites. See 

54. Harold E Buttram MD, The Controversy of the Latent Period Following Immunizations 
21 Sept. 2001. See The Yurko Project website 

55. Mark Benjamin, United Press International Investigates: The vaccine conflict, 20 July 
2003, copy on See 

vaccine awareness/UPI Investigates.html 

56. Roman Bystrianyk, The Real Truth: Vaccination Inefficacy in the 
Reduction/Elimination of Infectious Diseases, copy on 

vaccine awareness/vaccination inefficacy.html 

57. Dr Russell Blaylock, author of Health and Nutrition Secrets That Can Save Your Life. 

Interviewed by Dr Stanley Monteith on Radio Liberty, 2 December 2003. 

58. Vaccination Statistics, Dr Joseph Mercola. 


59. The See 

60. Harold E. Buttram, MD; Susan Kreider, RN; Alan R. Yurko. Vaccines and Genetic 
Mutation. 11 Oct. 2002. See 

61. Measles meets its match, October 2003, Global Alliance for Vaccines and 
Immunization. See Documents/ 
Immunization Focus/Download/102003 specialfeature.php 

62. Dr. Garth L. Nicolson and Dr. Nancy L. Nicolson, The Vaccine Controversy: Why Full 
Informed Consent Must be Instituted for All Vaccines, Criminal Politics, February 2001. 

http://www.immed.oro/reports/autoimmune illness/Criminal Politics Vaccine Contraver 

63. Journal of Clinical Neuroscience 2002; 9:525-529. High Frequency of Systemic 
190 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Mycoplasmal Infections in Gulf War Veterans and Civilians with Amyotrophic Lateral 
Sclerosis (ALS). Garth L. Nicolson PhDl,2, Marwan Y. Nasralla PhDl,3, Joerg Haier MD, 
PhD 1,4. See Mlness/JNS.NetalOl.l 1.6RTFss.htm 

64. Dr Joseph Mercola, SV40, Polio Vaccine, and Cancer: Now Beyond Coincidence? See 

65. The Center for Complex Infectious Diseases. 

66. Gordon L. Ada (Editor) P. D. Griffin (Editor), Vaccines for Fertility Regulation :The 
Assessment of Their Safety and Efficacy, Cambridge University Press, ISBN:0521392527, 
July 1991. See 

67 see for the transcript 

68. HcG Vaccine for Population Control, Tetrahedron Publishing Group. See 

new world order/HcG Vaccine for Pop. Control.html 

69. UNICEF Nigerian Polio Vaccine Contaminated with Sterilizing Agents, Scientist Finds, 
Lifesite news, 11 March 2004. 

70. Mercury, See 

71. Congressman Dan Burton, Press Release, California's Autism Caseload Doubles in 
Four Years, 13 May 2003 

72. Mark Benjamin, op cit. 

73. Kelly Patricia O Meara, CDC Study Raises Level of Suspicion, Insight on the News, 8 
Dec. 2003. See 

http://www.i in .cfm?include=search Results 

74. Press Release, Mothering Magazine warns Parents about Mercury in Flu Vaccines, 5 
July 2004 releases/MotherMagazinePressRelease.pdf 

75. Mark Geier, M.D., Ph.D. and David. Geier, Thimerosal in Childhood Vaccines, 
Neurodevelopment Disorders, and Heart Disease in the United States, Journal of The 
Association of American Physicians and Surgeons, April 2003. 


76. Congressman Dave Weldon MD, letter to the CDC, 31 October 2003 

77. Lisa Reagan institute of Medicine Meets A Second Time to Review Vaccine/Autism 
Link, Mothering Magazine child/vaccines/IOM meeting.html 

78. Russell L. Blaylock, M.D., What They Don't Tell You About Vaccination Dangers Can 
Kill You or Ruin Your Life, newletter, 12 May 2004. 

191 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) danqers.htm 

79. Blaylock RL. Chronic microglial activation and excitotoxicity secondary to excessive 
immune stimulation: possible factors in Gulf War Syndrome and autism. J Amer Phys 
Surg 9: 46-51, 2004. 

80. The Yurko Project. See 

81. Viera Scheibner, Ph.D. Shaken Baby Syndrome Diagnosis On Shaky Ground, Journal 
of Australasian College of Nutritional & Environmental Medicine, Vol. 20 No. 2; August 

2001. See 

82. Robert C. Reisinger, D.V.M., SIDS: A final Mechanism. 

83. Wider cot deaths review considered, BBC news on-line, 20 January 2004 news/34 12307 .stm 

84. Sudden Infant Death Syndrome (SIDS) and Vaccination, CDC website 

85. American Association of SIDS Preventing Physicians, website, March 2005 

86. Study Reveals Shaken Baby Syndrome Statistics in Scotland, Karen M. Barlow, MRCP 

Royal Hospital for Sick Children 


87. Mark Benjamin, op cit. 

88. Dr. Garth L. Nicolson and Dr. Nancy L. Nicolson, The Vaccine Controversy: Why Full 
Informed Consent Must be Instituted for All Vaccines, Criminal Politics, February 2001. 
See illness/Criminal Politics Vaccine Contraver 

89. Horowitz, Death In the Air op cit, p. 276 

90. Report Criticizes French Hepatitis Vaccination Campaign, Reuters, 20 November 

2002. See 

91. Hep B vaccination trebles multiple sclerosis risk , Nursing Times, 9 September 2004, = 

92. MMR and Autism: The Link Really Has been Established, What Doctors Don't Tell You, 
September 2004 

93. Goldman GS, Yazbak FE: An Investigation of the Association between MMR 
Vaccination and Autism in Denmark. JAmPhysSurg 2004; 9(3):70-75 

192 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

94. Horowitz op cit., p. 277 

95. Garth L. Nicolson Ph.D. et al, The Pathogenesis and Treatment of Mycoplasmal 
Infections, Antimicrobics and Infectious Disease Newsletter (Elsevier Science) 1999; 17 
(11): 81-88. See 
autoimmune illness/pub 1-3- 13-00 .htm I 

96. Dr Leonard Horowitz, Autism, Allergy, Asthma and Vaccine Induced Autoimmunity. 
See awareness/ 
vaccine induced autoimmunity.html 

97. Harold E. Buttram, MD; Susan Kreider, RN; Alan R. Yurko. Vaccines and Genetic 
Mutation. 11 Oct. 2002. See 

98. Dr Russell Blaylock, interviewed by Dr Stanley Monteith on Radio Liberty, 2 December 

99. Christine Gorman, The Fires Within,Time Magazine, 23 February 2004. 
http://www.time.eom/time/archive/preview/Q, 10987, 9934 19, 00 .htm I 

100. Sophie Goodchild and Steve Bloomfield, Children to get jabs against drug addiction, 
The Independent, 25 July 2004. See =544439 

101. Over 5200 Concerned Adults Refuse to Comply with New Freedom Initiative for 
Mental Health Screening in the Schools (PRWEB) October 21, 2004 pettition.htm 

102. Jeanne Lenzer, Bush plans to screen whole U.S. population for mental illness, 21 
June 2004. ID= 39078 

103. Schools in row over Ritalin, BBC, London, 24 July 2003. 

104. Jon Henley, Depressed, moi? Why the French are driven to drugs, The Guardian, 
London, 8 Nov. 2003. See, 11882, 1080507, 00. html 

105. Implant 'could cure migraines,' BBC, London, 24 Feb. 2003. See 

106. Microchip 'could do away with pills', BBC, London, 19 Oct. 2003. See 

107. Horowitz, Death in the Air, op cit., pp. 301-304 and Dr Begich's article Star Wars, 
Star Trek and Killing Politely. See 

108. Ibid., p. 335 

109. Does TETRA pulse? Does it matter?, Tetrawatch website, 

193 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

110. Ibid., p. 223. 

111. Teen generation will be 'world's sickest adults', The Daily Telegraph, London, 9 Dec. 
2003. See 

112. Garth L. Nicolson Ph.D. and Richard Ngwenya Ph.D, Dietary Considerations for 
Patients with Chronic Illnesses and Multiple Chronic Infections: A Brief Outline of 
Eighteen Dietary Steps to Better Health. See considerations/ 

113. Health Risks from Processed Foods and The Dangers of Trans Fats 
Dr. Mary Enig Interviewed By Richard A. Passwater, Ph.D 

See fats. htm 

114. FX, the Campaign Against Trans Fats in Food 

115. USDA / HSS 2005 guidelines : "Cut trans, TFX, the Campaign Against Trans Fats in 

116. Dr Joseph Mercola, Aspartame: What You Don't Know Can Hurt You. See danqers.htm 

117. Racketeering (Rico)Charges filed Against NutraSweet, Dr. Moser of NS, American 
Diabetes Assn, Monsanto, Press Conf 9/16 A.M. Sacramento, PRWeb, 17 September 

119.. Dr Russell Blaylock, op cit. 

120. Soy: Too Good to be True 

Brandon Finucan & Charlotte Gerson, Gerson Institute Newsletter Volume 14 #3 on soy.htm 

121. Newest Research On Why You Should Avoid Soy 
Sally Fallon & Mary G. Enig, Ph.D. soy.htm 

122. The Guardian, 13 August, 2000 danqers.htm 

123. The Trouble With Tofu: Soy and the Brain 

By John D. MacArthur brain.htm 

124. Dr Russell Blaylock, Interviewed by Dr Stanley Monteith on Radio Liberty, 2 
December 2003. 


194 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

125. Report examines impact of phytoestrogens on health, 
01 May 2003 

126. MacArthur op cit. 

127. Fallon & Enig op cit. 

128. Ibid 

129. FAQs on Transexuality, Inland Revenue Diversity and Equality Unit, 2003 

130. Transgender | Background / Facts & Figures, The Cabinet Office 

131. James Owen, Animals' Sexual Changes Linked to Waste, Chemicals, National 
Geographic News 

1st March 2004 

132. Debbie Andalo, Public to make fluoride decision, The Guardian, 28 July 2004 

133. Andy Ke\\y,We'll Fight Fluoride Tooth and Nail, Warns Council, Daily Post, 02 August 

134. Stanley Monteith MD, Radio Liberty Newsletter. November, 2004. See 

135. See Fluoride Alert website, 

136. Stanley Monteith MD, Radio Liberty Newsletter. November, 2004. See 

137. Dr David Kennedy, interviewed on Radio Liberty, 30 December 2004. Listen on-line 

138. China, India face Aids disaster, BBC, London, 3 July 2003. 

139. Nicolson et al, op cit 

140. Garth L. Nicolson Ph.D. et al, Summary of Persian Gulf War Illness Pilot Study on 
Mycoplasmal Infections in Veterans and Family Members, National Forum for CFIDS/ME, 
FMS, GWI, MCS 1998. 

See war illness/sumpe.html 

141. U.S. Patent and Trademark Office website. 

142. Ibid p. 65 Example 23 

143. Journal of Clinical Neuroscience 2002; 9:525-529. 

High Frequency of Systemic Mycoplasmal Infections in Gulf War Veterans and Civilians 
with Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis (ALS). Garth L. Nicolson PhDl,2, Marwan Y. Nasralla 

195 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

PhDl,3, Joerg Haier MD, PhD 1,4. See Mlness/JNS.NetalOl.l 1.6RTFss.htm 

144. Dr. Garth L. Nicolson and Dr. Nancy L. Nicolson, The Vaccine Controversy: Why Full 

Informed Consent Must be Instituted for All Vaccines, Criminal Politics, February 2001. 

See illness/Criminal Politics Vaccine Contraver 


145.FEMS Immunol Med Microbiol 2002; 34:209-214, High Prevalence of Mycoplasma 
infections among European Chronic Fatigue Syndrome patients, Examination of four 
Mycoplasma species in blood of Chronic Fatigue Syndrome patients. Jo Nijs 1, MSc; Garth 
L Nicolson 2, PhD; Pascale De Becker 1, PhD; Danny Coomans 4, PhD;Kenny De Meirleir 
1, 3, MD, PhD illness/Niisetal FEMS 02 11 25.html 

146. Journal of Chronic Fatigue Syndrome 2003; 11(2): 7-19. 

Evidence for Bacterial (Mycoplasma, Chlamydia) and Viral (HHV-6) Co-Infections in 

Chronic Fatigue Syndrome Patients 

Garth L. Nicolson, 1 PhD, Marwan Y. Nasralla,2 PhD, Kenny De Meirleir,3 MD, PhD, Robert 

Gan,2 MB, PhD and Joerg Haier,4 MD, PhD disease/Netal coMyco JCFS03415.html 

147. Luc Montagnier, Virus: The Co-discoverer of HIV Tracks Its Rampage and Charts the 
Future, ISBN 0-393-03923-4, New York, NY, WW Norton, 2000. 

reports/iama Iasker/v285n5/ffull/ibk0207-3.html 

148. News, Institute of Molecular Medicine website. See 

149. Clinton Administration declares AIDS a security threat, CNN, 30 April 2000. See 

150. Dr Leonard Horowitz, CIA oversees "war" on AIDS, Idaho Observer, July 2000. See 

151. Horowitz, Emerging Viruses, op cit., p. 537 

152. Osier's Web, Hillary Johnson, Crown Publishers Inc. New York, 1996 
ISBN 0-517-70353-X 

153. Ellen Tomson, Gulf War Illnesses Affect 300,000 Vets. PioneerPlanet / St. Paul 
(Minnesota) Pioneer Press, 19 Sept. 2000. See 

154. Garth Nicolson Ph.D., Chief Scientific Officer, News, Institute of Molecular Medicine 
website. See 

155. The Darker Bioweapons Future, The CIA, Press Release (reference OTI SF 2003- 
108 ) 

3 Nov. 2003. See 

156. Michael Meacher, This War on Terrorism is Bogus, The Guardian, London, 6 Sept. 
2003. See,9115,1036688,00.html 

196 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

157. Major Doug Rokke interviewed on Radio Liberty 12 Jan 05. Listen on-line at 

158. Leuren Moret, World Affairs - The Journal of International Issues, 1 July 2004 

159. Steven W. Mosher, President Population Research Institute, The Case Against 
UNFPA Funding, PRI Weekly Briefing, 11 January 2002 Vol. 4/ No. 2. See 

160. 102 BBC Horizon, op cit. 

161. 5 reasons to keep Britain GM-free, The Ecologist Magazine, 22 June 2003. See article, htm Particle =432&cateoory= 58 

162. ProdiGene Receives National Institutes of Health Grant to Study Development Of 
Edible AIDS Vaccine, PRNewswire, 28 Nov. 2000. See 

163. Airforce 2025, The Air University website. 

164. Ibid., Weather as a Force Multiplier: Owning the Weather in 2025. 


Also, synopsis by Jon E. Dougherty, Air Force's weather-modification plans, 

18 Jan. 1999. See ID=15113 

165. Purpose and Objectives of the HAARP Program As stated in the Environmental 
Impact Statement, HAARP website. See 

166. Rosalie Bertell, Ph.D., GNSH, Background of the HAARP Project, Dr Begich's 
EarthPulse website. See 

167 HARRP Factsheet, HAARP website. 


168. Background Art, Method and apparatus for altering a region in the earth's 
atmosphere, ionosphere, and/or magnetosphere, U.S. patent no 4,686,605, 11 August 
1987. Go to and type in the patent no. The 
patent is held by Advanced Power Technologies, formerly ARCO Power Technologies, a 
division of The Atlantic Richfield Oil Company 

169. Dr Nick Begich and Jeane Manning, Vandalism In The Sky EarthPulse website. See 

170. Gordon J. F. MacDonald, Unless Peace Comes, 1968, ch. How to Wreck the 
Environment. See 

171. Report of The European Parliament Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and 

197 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

Defence Policy, Minutes of 14 Jan. 1999, Section 24, ref. A4-0005/1999, European 

Parliament website. See 


TEXT+REPORT+A4-1999-0005 + 0+NOT+SGML+V0//EN 

172. See Thomas, Legislative information on the internet, 107th Congress and type in 


173. Will Thomas, Chemtrails confirmed, 

174. Stratospheric Welsbach seeding for reduction of global warming, go to U.S. Patent 
and Trademark Office website and type in patent no. 5,003,186. See 

175. HAARP website. See 

176. Get Ready for New 'Nano' Products, Reuters, 23 July 2003. See 
http://www.wired.eom/news/technoloqy/Q, 1282, 59742, 00 .htm I 

177. National Nanotechnology Investment in the FY 2003 Budget Request by the 
President, The National Nanotechnology Initiative website. See 

178. World HIV and AIDS statistics, See 

Divisions of HIV/AIDS Prevention, Centers for Disease Control. 
See and World Population, The World Gazetter. 

179. Frequently Asked Questions about Human Cloning and the Council's Report, 
The President's Council on Bioethics. See faq.html 

180. 'First cloned human embryo ready' l~Y\l news, London, 19 Oct. 2003. See 

181. NHS euthanasia claims ludicrous', BBC, London, 6 Dec. 1999. 

182. 'Curb doctors' life or death powers', BBC, London, 28 April 2000. 

183. Wesley J. Smith, Forced Exit, Times Books, 1997. 
See http: //www .htm 

184. Patients must decide on resuscitation, BBC, London, 27 June 2000. 

185. Cold Spring Harbour Laboratory website. 


198 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 


Diet, injections, and injunctions will combine, from a very early 
age, to produce the sort of character and the sort of beliefs that the 
authorities consider desirable, and any serious criticism of the powers 
that be will become psychologically impossible 

- Bertrand Russell, The Impact of Science on Society 


Aired in 1984-5, the BBC serialization of John Christopher's novels, The 
Tripods, was one of the longest adaptations on British television. In this sci-fi 
drama, The City of The Masters was home to an unseen elite who occasionally 
ventured out into the countryside in giant three-legged machines to lord it over 
the technologically impoverished populace. Children would be taken up into the 
Tripods to undergo 'capping', the surgical attachment of an electrical circuit to 
their skulls. 

Unlikely as it is that we will open the curtains one morning to find a 30 
metre tall metal leg in front of the window, the Tripods contains the essential 
theme of our current predicament: The dawn of a new dark age of global 
technocratic feudalism. 

Most human beings are targeted for extermination and the remainder will be 
indentured on the global plantation. The 'sort of character' that the authorities 
consider desirable is the diseased, impoverished, infertile, sexless, dumbed down 
automaton, whose function in life is merely to enact the Masters' business plan. 
Some of the character-altering weaponry already at their disposal includes: 
Media brainwashing; water fluoridation; vaccination; gender altering foods and 
chemicals; neurotoxic food additives; and psychotropic drugs. Life expectancy is 
being gradually reduced by the modern day concentration camp which 
masquerades as the public healthcare system. On the horizon are: Implantable 
microchips; vaccines to alter brain chemistry; genetically modified 
pharmacological food; human cloning; and nanotechnology 

Under pending U.K. legislation, the process of generational transformation will 
be monitored on a special children's database. Family life will be replaced by a 
gigantic welfare apparatus and state controlled childcare. 

Privacy will become an alien concept. Citizens will be permanently logged on 
to the Big Brother surveillance grid, through their implanted microchip, the face 
scanning CCTV in the street, the RFID tracking chips in every supermarket 
product, and the biometric identification that accompanies every transaction. 
Government will have instant access to all public and private sector databases. 

Don't think of getting in your car and heading for hills. Under current 
proposals, Big Brother will be able to track cars by satellite and disable them by 
remote control. Think you can escape to another country? Sorry, under world 
government, there is no 'other country'. The Tripods series ended with the 
heroes fleeing across the Alps with their giant three-legged oppressors in hot 
pursuit. If you want to escape, think about becoming an astronaut. 

199 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition) 

How about joining the rebel forces? Well, this may land you in some serious 
hot water. Literally in hot water, because already, the U.S. Government is 
shipping out 'terrorists' to foreign countries to be tortured. With distinction 
between ordinary crime and terrorism swept aside, rebels can expect the 
harshest treatment. Orwell observed that,' reprisals against prisoners which 
extend even to boiling and burying alive, are looked upon as normal, and, when 
they are committed by one's own side and not by the enemy, meritorious.' 

What about voting the regime out? Votes cast on electronic voting machines 
will disappear straight down the memory hole. 


How did we get into this mess? Observing that the gap between rich and poor 
was getting wider, the BBC's Jeremy Paxman wondered whether someone could 
become too rich. The capitalist system is destined to create a financial elite as 
the big fish get bigger and bigger. The financial barons provide the money and 
organization for all the Utopian dreamers who believe in a command and control 
society. But the Devil's greatest trick is to persuade man that he does not exist. 
The ablility of the hidden hand to manipulate policy depends upon concealment. 
It has been assisted by the widespread apathy towards public affairs, generated 
largely by the relative tranquillity of life in the West over the last sixty years. 

However, through the internet, it is becoming much easier to demonstrate 
and communicate both the existence of the cartel and the cumulative toxicity of 
its various activities. Support for the party line will dwindle as soon as its real 
purpose and its beneficiaries are exposed. 

200 The Police State Road Map (March 2005 Edition)